Cat MGR Users Guide

SmartPlant Catalog Manager
User's Guide
Version 2014 (7.0.0)
January 2014
DPID2-PE-200012N
Copyright
Copyright © 1999-2014 Intergraph® Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Intergraph is part of Hexagon.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains
confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and
international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was
developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with
subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal
Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the
United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS
252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
300 Intergraph Way
Huntsville, AL 35813
Documentation
Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form, User's Guides, Installation Guides, Reference Guides,
Administrator's Guides, Customization Guides, Programmer's Guides, Configuration Guides and Help Guides delivered with a
particular software product.
Other Documentation
Other Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form and delivered with software or on eCustomer, SharePoint, or
box.net, any documentation related to work processes, workflows, and best practices that is provided by Intergraph as guidance for
using a software product.
Terms of Use
a. Use of a software product and Documentation is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with the
software product unless the Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the
Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take
precedence and govern the use of this software product and Documentation. Subject to the terms contained within the
applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the
Documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for Licensee's internal,
non-commercial use. The Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.
b. For use of Documentation or Other Documentation where end user does not receive a EULA or does not have a valid license
agreement with Intergraph, Intergraph grants the Licensee a non-exclusive license to use the Documentation or Other
Documentation for Licensee’s internal non-commercial use. Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a
reasonable number of copies of Other Documentation for Licensee’s internal, non-commercial. The Other Documentation may
not be printed for resale or redistribution. This license contained in this subsection b) may be terminated at any time and for any
reason by Intergraph Corporation by giving written notice to Licensee.
Disclaimer of Warranties
Except for any express warranties as may be stated in the EULA or separate license or separate terms and conditions, Intergraph
Corporation disclaims any and all express or implied warranties including, but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed
a modification or amendment of such disclaimer. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its
publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
The software, Documentation and Other Documentation discussed in this document are furnished under a license and may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data.
Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.
2 SmartPlant Catalog Manager User's Guide

Limitation of Damages
IN NO EVENT WILL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF USE OR PRODUCTION, LOSS OF
REVENUE OR PROFIT, LOSS OF DATA, OR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, EVEN IF INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION’S LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT THAT
INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN PAID BY LICENSEE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AT THE TIME THE CLAIM IS
MADE. EXCEPT WHERE PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO CLAIM, REGARDLESS OF FORM, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE BROUGHT BY LICENSEE MORE THAN TWO (2)
YEARS AFTER THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO THE CAUSE OF ACTION HAS OCCURRED.
IF UNDER THE LAW RULED APPLICABLE ANY PART OF THIS SECTION IS INVALID, THEN INTERGRAPH LIMITS ITS
LIABILITY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY SAID LAW.
Export Controls
Intergraph Corporation’s software products and any third-party Software Products obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its
subsidiaries, or distributors (including any Documentation, Other Documentation or technical data related to these products) are
subject to the export control laws and regulations of the United States. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. These Software
Products, and the direct product thereof, must not be exported or re-exported, directly or indirectly (including via remote access)
under the following circumstances:
a. To Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Sudan, or Syria, or any national of these countries.
b. To any person or entity listed on any U.S. government denial list, including but not limited to, the U.S. Department of Commerce
Denied Persons, Entities, and Unverified Lists, http://www.bis.doc.gov/complianceandenforcement/liststocheck.htm, the U.S.
Department of Treasury Specially Designated Nationals List, http://www.treas.gov/offices/enforcement/ofac/, and the U.S.
Department of State Debarred List, http://www.pmddtc.state.gov/compliance/debar.html.
c. To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, the end use of the Software Product is related to the design,
development, production, or use of missiles, chemical, biological, or nuclear weapons, or other un-safeguarded or sensitive
nuclear uses.
d. To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, that an illegal reshipment will take place.
Any questions regarding export or re-export of these Software Products should be addressed to Intergraph Corporation’s Export
Compliance Department, Huntsville, Alabama 35894, USA.
Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, Intergraph Smart, PDS, SmartPlant, SmartMarine, FrameWorks, I-Sketch, IntelliShip, ISOGEN,
SmartSketch, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, and SupportModeler are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph
Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation. MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Inc. Other brands and product names are
trademarks of their respective owners.
SmartPlant Catalog Manager User's Guide 3

Contents
Catalog Manager ........................................................................................................................................ 11
Navigating in Catalog Manager ............................................................................................................. 11
Connect to a Database ................................................................................................................... 11
Catalog Explorer ............................................................................................................................. 13
Properties Window ......................................................................................................................... 22
View Window .................................................................................................................................. 24
Toolbars .......................................................................................................................................... 30
General Commands ....................................................................................................................... 36
Working with Symbols .............................................................................................................................. 39

Symbol Guidelines ................................................................................................................................ 39
Symbol Conversion Utility ..................................................................................................................... 41
Convert Symbols with the Symbol Conversion Utility .................................................................... 41
Creating Symbols .................................................................................................................................. 42
AABBCC Codes for Symbols ......................................................................................................... 42
Open Symbols in Catalog Manager ............................................................................................... 45
Create a Symbol ............................................................................................................................. 45
Create a Symbol with Predefined Properties ................................................................................. 46
Defining a Title Block ...................................................................................................................... 46
Create a Symbol Containing an Assembly of Items ....................................................................... 49
Create Piping Symbols ................................................................................................................... 50
Create Equipment Symbols ............................................................................................................ 51
Create Instrumentation Symbols .................................................................................................... 51
Create a Parametric Symbol .......................................................................................................... 52
Add Smart Text to Symbols ............................................................................................................ 58
Define Heat Tracing for New Symbols ........................................................................................... 59
Define Jacketing for New Symbols ................................................................................................. 60
Define Icons for New Symbols ....................................................................................................... 60
Modify Symbols .............................................................................................................................. 61
Display Symbol Connect Points ..................................................................................................... 61
Place Symbol Connect Points ........................................................................................................ 62
Edit Symbol Connect Points ........................................................................................................... 62
Creating Symbols Commands, Ribbons and Dialog Boxes ........................................................... 63
Editing Symbols .................................................................................................................................... 69
Edit a Symbol ................................................................................................................................. 69
Edit Symbol Properties ................................................................................................................... 69
Mirroring Symbols ................................................................................................................................. 70
Mirror a Symbol .............................................................................................................................. 70
Rotating Symbols .................................................................................................................................. 71
Rotate a Symbol ............................................................................................................................. 71
Viewing the XML Symbol Structure ...................................................................................................... 72
View XML Symbol Structure ........................................................................................................... 72
Working with Labels.................................................................................................................................. 73

Label Types ........................................................................................................................................... 73
Label Properties and Guidelines ........................................................................................................... 74

Contents
Create a Label....................................................................................................................................... 76
Create a Text Label .............................................................................................................................. 77
Edit Text in a Text Label ....................................................................................................................... 77
Move a Label......................................................................................................................................... 77
Create a Property Break ....................................................................................................................... 78
Add Smart Text to Labels ..................................................................................................................... 78
Edit Smart Text ..................................................................................................................................... 79
Paste Unicode Characters into Smart Text Editor ................................................................................ 80
Set an Item Type for a Label................................................................................................................. 80
Labels Commands and Dialog Boxes ................................................................................................... 81
Property Breaks Command ............................................................................................................ 81
Property Breaks Dialog Box ........................................................................................................... 82
Set Item Type Command................................................................................................................ 83
Set Item Type Dialog Box ............................................................................................................... 83
Smart Text Command .................................................................................................................... 83
Smart Text Editor Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 84
Using the Line Style Editor ....................................................................................................................... 87

Install the Line Style Editor ................................................................................................................... 88
Creating a Customized Line Style......................................................................................................... 88
Create a Customized Line Style ..................................................................................................... 89
Create a Point Style ........................................................................................................................ 90
Create a Style for a Linear Pattern ................................................................................................. 91
Create a Style for a Linear Style .................................................................................................... 94
Test a New Linear Style ................................................................................................................. 97
Line Style Editor Toolbar ....................................................................................................................... 97
Create Custom Point Styles .................................................................................................................. 98
Create Custom Linear Patterns ............................................................................................................ 98
Create Custom Linear Styles ................................................................................................................ 99
Copy Point Styles, Linear Styles, or Linear Patterns ............................................................................ 99
Import Point Styles, Linear Patterns, and Linear Styles ....................................................................... 99
Delete Point Styles, Linear Styles, or Linear Patterns ........................................................................ 100
Modify Point Styles, Linear Styles, or Linear Patterns ........................................................................ 100
Redefine Point Styles .......................................................................................................................... 100
Place Point Styles in the Drawing Sheet ............................................................................................ 101
Line Style Editor Commands and Dialog Boxes ................................................................................. 101
Copy Linear Pattern Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 101
Copy Linear Style Dialog Box ....................................................................................................... 101
Copy Point Style Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 102
Copy Style Command................................................................................................................... 102
Create New Linear Pattern Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 102
Create New Linear Style Dialog Box ............................................................................................ 102
Create New Point Style Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 102
Create New Style Command ........................................................................................................ 102
Define Point Style Graphics Command ........................................................................................ 102
Delete Style Command................................................................................................................. 103
Import Style Command ................................................................................................................. 103
Linear Pattern Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 103
Linear Style Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 105
Place Point Style Graphics Command ......................................................................................... 107
Point Style Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 107
Properties Command.................................................................................................................... 107

Contents
Show Styles in Resource Files Command ................................................................................... 108
Working with Drawing Tools .................................................................................................................. 109

Documents in Catalog Manager ......................................................................................................... 109
Drawing Setup .............................................................................................................................. 109
Saving Documents ....................................................................................................................... 113
Close a Document ........................................................................................................................ 114
Printing Documents ...................................................................................................................... 114
Document Commands, Controls, and Dialog Boxes .................................................................... 118
Drawing Basic Elements ..................................................................................................................... 140
Drawing Lines ............................................................................................................................... 141
Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses .............................................................................................. 144
Drawing Squares, Rectangles, and Polygons .............................................................................. 160
Drawing FreeForm Shapes .......................................................................................................... 163
Mechanism Modeling.................................................................................................................... 171
Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements ......................................................................................... 171
Selecting Elements ....................................................................................................................... 173
Moving Elements .......................................................................................................................... 178
Copying and Pasting Elements .................................................................................................... 181
Creating Patterns .......................................................................................................................... 186
Cutting or Deleting Elements ........................................................................................................ 190
Create (clone) a Symbol Using Elements of an Existing Symbol ................................................ 192
Drawing with Relationships ................................................................................................................. 192
Using Relationships as You Draw ................................................................................................ 194
Sample Workflows ........................................................................................................................ 202
Drawing Precisely ............................................................................................................................... 207
Placing Elements in Precise Locations ........................................................................................ 207
Placing Elements with a Grid ....................................................................................................... 211
Dimensioning Drawing Elements ................................................................................................. 213
Setting Paper and Model Units ..................................................................................................... 243
Measuring Distances and Areas .................................................................................................. 245
Using the Variable Table .............................................................................................................. 249
Transforming Elements ....................................................................................................................... 266
Changing the Shape of an Element ............................................................................................. 267
Rotating Elements ........................................................................................................................ 268
Mirroring Elements ....................................................................................................................... 269
Scaling Elements .......................................................................................................................... 271
Extending or Trimming Elements ................................................................................................. 273
Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements .................................................................. 280
Transforming Elements Commands and Ribbons ....................................................................... 286
Arranging Elements ............................................................................................................................ 293
Grouping Elements ....................................................................................................................... 293
Element Display Priority ............................................................................................................... 295
Using Layers to Arrange Elements............................................................................................... 297
Arranging Elements Commands, Ribbons, and Dialog Boxes ..................................................... 301
Placing Annotations ............................................................................................................................ 311
Place a Text Box .......................................................................................................................... 313
Move a Text Box ........................................................................................................................... 313
Delete Text in a Text Box ............................................................................................................. 313
Apply a Border to a Text Box ....................................................................................................... 313
Edit a Text Box ............................................................................................................................. 314

Contents
Resize a Text Box ........................................................................................................................ 314

Place a Balloon ............................................................................................................................. 314
Insert a Font Character into a Text Box ....................................................................................... 315
Add a Leader ................................................................................................................................ 315
Insert a Vertex in a Leader ........................................................................................................... 316
Delete a Vertex from a Leader ..................................................................................................... 317
Move an Annotation...................................................................................................................... 318
Annotations Commands, Ribbons, and Dialog Boxes ................................................................. 320
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors ............................................................................................... 332
Applying Formats with Styles ....................................................................................................... 333
Applying Unique Formats ............................................................................................................. 341
Applying Colors and Patterns to Closed Boundaries ................................................................... 354
How Embedding Works ...................................................................................................................... 361
Embed an Object .......................................................................................................................... 362
Edit an Embedded Object with the Source Software ................................................................... 363
Embedding Objects Commands and Dialog Boxes ..................................................................... 364
How Linking Works ............................................................................................................................. 365
Link an Object ............................................................................................................................... 366
Open an OLE Object for Editing ................................................................................................... 367
Edit a Linked Object ..................................................................................................................... 367
Change the Source for a Linked Object ....................................................................................... 368
Break a Connection to a Linked Object ........................................................................................ 368
Linking Objects Commands and Dialog Boxes ............................................................................ 368
Customizing the Software ...................................................................................................................... 371

Designing Symbol Toolbars ................................................................................................................ 371
Define a Custom Symbol Toolbar ................................................................................................ 371
Create a New Menu ............................................................................................................................ 372
Add a Command to a Menu ................................................................................................................ 372
Delete a Command from a Menu ........................................................................................................ 373
Add a Button to a Toolbar ................................................................................................................... 373
Remove a Command from a Toolbar.................................................................................................. 373
Restore All Built-in Menus to the Original Settings ............................................................................. 374
Install or Remove an Add-In ............................................................................................................... 374
Display or Hide Toolbars ..................................................................................................................... 374
Create a New Toolbar ......................................................................................................................... 374
Restore a Customized Toolbar to Default Settings............................................................................. 375
Run a Custom Command ................................................................................................................... 375
Customizing the Software Commands and Dialog Boxes .................................................................. 375
Add-Ins Command........................................................................................................................ 376
Add-In Manager Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 376
Custom Commands Command .................................................................................................... 376
Custom Command Dialog Box ..................................................................................................... 377
Customize Command ................................................................................................................... 377
Customize Dialog Box .................................................................................................................. 377
New Toolbar Dialog Box ............................................................................................................... 379
Refresh Symbol Toolbar Command (Catalog Explorer > Catalog Menu) .................................... 379
Toolbars Command ...................................................................................................................... 379
Toolbars Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................... 379

Contents
ActiveCGM ............................................................................................................................................... 381

Open a Document Inside Internet Explorer ........................................................................................ 381
Working with CAD Drawings .................................................................................................................. 383

Working with AutoCAD Files ............................................................................................................... 383
Open an AutoCAD Document ...................................................................................................... 383
Command Comparison with AutoCAD ......................................................................................... 384
Task Comparison with AutoCAD .................................................................................................. 390
Working with MicroStation Files .......................................................................................................... 401
Open a MicroStation Document ................................................................................................... 401
Command Comparison with MicroStation .................................................................................... 402
Task Comparison with MicroStation ............................................................................................. 411
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................... 417
Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 433

Contents

SECTION 1
Catalog Manager
The SmartPlant Catalog Manager is a stand-alone application that you can use to define
symbols and their properties for use in SmartPlant P&ID or SmartPlant Electrical. Catalog
Manager is supplied with a varied selection of symbols for use in different types of drawings.
You can use these symbols "as is" straight from the box, or edit them in Catalog Manager to
create your own customized symbols. Catalog Manager includes several of the commands
available in SmartSketch® for the creation of graphics.
Your editing privileges determine if you can use Catalog Manager commands to
create and edit items. See your System Administrator for information regarding your current
editing privileges.
Navigating in Catalog Manager

The Catalog Manager interface is divided into the following areas. Each area provides specific
features that you need to create and edit symbols and labels.
View Window — Allows you to display, edit, and create symbols. For more information, see
View Window (on page 24).
Catalog Explorer — Allows you to view and manipulate an electronic catalog containing
symbols and their associated properties. For more information, see Catalog Explorer (on page
13).
Properties Window — Displays properties for selected symbols. For more information, see
Properties Window (on page 22).
Toolbars — Provide quick access to the various commands available in Catalog Manager. For
more information, see Toolbars (on page 30).
Connect to a Database
1. Click File > Open Database.
 You can also click the Open Database command on the Main toolbar.
 The network name of the computer and the name of the site to which the user is
currently connected, are displayed in the title bar of the Open Plant Structure dialog
box.
2. From the Application type list, choose the application whose database you want to connect
to.
If the plant structure that you want appears in the Available plant structures list, you
can select it in the List view on this dialog box, and go to step 6.
3. On the Open Plant Structure dialog box, click Site Server.

Catalog Manager
4. On the Open Site Server dialog box, select the correct SmartPlant initialization file and click
Open.
5. From the Available plant structures list, select the plant you want to open.
6. Click Open.
When you click Open, the software checks to make sure you have the correct access
privileges for the selected plant structure and passes your access information back to
Catalog Manager.
Open Database Command

Opens the Open Plant Structure dialog box, allowing you to connect to the plant you want to
work with in Catalog Manager. In order to use this command, your computer must be able to
connect to the network where the server is located.
Open Site Server Dialog Box

Allows you to specify the initialization file associated with the site server you want to work with in
Catalog Manager.
Look in — Lists the available folders and files. To see how the current folder fits in the hierarchy
on your computer, click the down arrow. Click a folder to see its contents. In the displayed list,
you can double-click a folder or file to open it. To open the folder one level higher, click Up One
Level on the toolbar.
Up One Level — Navigates one level higher in the directory.
Create New Folder — Adds a new folder in the current directory.
View Menu — Allows you to select the format in which the files are displayed in the main
window of the dialog box. Options include Large Icons, Small Icons, List, Details, and
Thumbnails.
File name — Provides space for you to type the name of the file.
You can use * as a wildcard. For example, you can type *.* to see a list of all files.
Alternately, you can type the full path of a file, such as c:\rules\rules.rul.
Files of type — Specifies that only files of type '.ini' will be displayed in this dialog.
Open — Opens the file with the name, file type, and location that you specified.
This dialog box is displayed differently in client/server machines operating with Windows
Vista. The functionality has not been changed.

Catalog Manager
Open Plant Structure Dialog Box

Sets options for connecting to a site and plant structure and passes user access information to
the application.
Available plant structures — Lists plant structures in the site to which you are currently
connected. You can select only one item from this List view at a time.
Application type — Allows you to display those plants associated with the selected application
type.
Open — Connects you to the selected plant. When you click Open, the application also checks
to make sure you have the correct access privileges for the selected plant structure and passes
your access information back to Catalog Manager.
Site Server — Opens the Open Site Server dialog box, allowing you to select a SmartPlant
initialization file (.ini file) from local and network directories. Plant structures that correspond to
the initialization file that you choose are subsequently displayed in the list of available plant
structures.
Catalog Explorer
Applications such as SmartPlant P&ID and SmartPlant Electrical use Catalog Explorer as an
interface to view and manipulate an electronic catalog containing symbols and their associated
properties. Conceptually, the catalog resembles a manufacturer catalog, printed on paper, with
pictures of parts to build an industrial plant. The paper catalog contains many items arranged in
sections. You can search for items or browse through the catalog and bookmark certain pages
and sections.
Catalog Explorer replaces the paper catalog with an electronic equivalent. You can browse a
Tree view for information that you need, apply filters to discriminate the specific items that you
want to check, or create bookmarks for important sections.
Catalog Explorer consists of two main views: the Tree view and the List view. In the Tree view,
you can view the nodes of the catalog file system and open or close the nodes to see the
contents. In the List view, you see the contents of the opened node. You also use the List view
to select catalog items before opening them to modify them. The List view allows you to create
and clone new symbols as well. To bookmark places throughout the catalog, you can create a
shortcut bar region between the Tree and List views.

Catalog Manager
Toolbar buttons carry out commands and allow you to customize the Tree and List views to suit
your work session. These toolbar buttons are located at the top of the Tree view.

Catalog Manager
Tree View
The Tree view in Catalog Explorer displays a hierarchy of nodes (categories) that contain
catalog items. Navigate through the Tree view by clicking the different nodes. To open a node,
click the + to the left of the node name. To close a node, click the – to the left of the node name.
If the selected node contains any drawing symbols, the software displays them in the List view.
Navigate the Catalog Explorer Tree View

1. Click + to the left of a node name to open the catalog item hierarchy below the node.
2. Click – to the left of a node name to close the hierarchy below the node.
3. Click the horizontal and vertical scroll bars to view other portions of the hierarchy.

Catalog Manager
Open Symbol Catalogs

When you open Catalog Manager, by default it connects you to the symbol information of the
last plant you opened. To open the symbol information for another plant, follow the steps below.
1. In Catalog Manager, click File > Open Database.
 If the plant structure that you want appears in the Available plant structures list, you
can select it in the List view on this dialog box, and go to step 5.
 You can also click the Open Database command on the Main toolbar.
2. On the Open Plant Structure dialog box, click Site Server.
3. On the Open Site Server dialog box, select the correct SmartPlant initialization file and click
Open.
4. From the Available plant structures list, select the plant you want to open.
5. Click Open.
When you click Open, the software checks to make sure you have the correct access
privileges for the selected plant structure and passes your access information back to
Catalog Manager.
List View
The List view in Catalog Explorer displays the symbols that are associated with the active node
in the Tree view. Usually, only the contents of one node display. However, in Catalog Manager,
you can display several nodes at once in the List view by holding down the CTRL key while
clicking more than one node.
Specify the view style for the symbols in the List view. View styles available are: large icons,
small icons, list, and detail.

Catalog Manager
Change the List View Display

1. In Catalog Explorer, click View Settings.
2. Select one of the view styles: Large Icons, Small Icons, List, or Detail.
Catalog Explorer Command

Turns the display of the Catalog Explorer on or off.
Add Shortcut Buttons to the Catalog Explorer

1. Verify that shortcut buttons are set to appear on the Catalog Explorer by clicking the
Navigation menu and making sure that Show Buttons is active (checked).
2. In the Catalog Explorer Tree view hierarchy, navigate to the position to which you want to
map the shortcut button.
3. Click Navigation > Add Button to create a shortcut button for the currently selected node.
The software displays the new shortcut button below any existing shortcut buttons.
Display Shortcut Buttons in Catalog Explorer

In Catalog Explorer, click Navigation > Show Buttons. A check mark appears next to the menu
item indicating that shortcut buttons will appear in Catalog Explorer.
Shortcut buttons appear on the navigation bar between the Tree and List views.
Remove Shortcut Buttons from the Catalog Explorer

In Catalog Explorer, click Navigation > Remove Button to delete the active shortcut button
from Catalog Explorer.
Assign a Command to a Catalog Explorer Toolbar Button

1. Click the down-arrow portion of a Catalog Explorer toolbar button to open the associated
menu.
2. On the menu, click an available command, for example, File > Find. The software assigns
the selected command to the Catalog Explorer toolbar button, the icon located next to the
menu button.
3. Click the toolbar button itself, and that most recent command from the menu is carried out.
For example, click the File menu button (not the down-arrow) and the Find command is
invoked again.

Catalog Manager
Create Catalog Items

1. Browse the Catalog Explorer Tree view to where you want to add the new item.
2. Click the List view.
3. Click File > New Item. The software creates an item named New Item and displays a field
for editing.
4. Type the name for the new catalog item.
5. Double-click the item to enter the Catalog Manager View window.
Depending on your editing privileges, you may or may not be able to create items in
certain catalogs. See your System Administrator for information regarding your current editing
privileges.
Open Catalog Items

1. Click the item in the Catalog Explorer List view.
2. In Catalog Explorer, click File > Open to start the Catalog Manager View window and
display the selected catalog item.
Depending on your editing privileges, you may or may not be able to open items
from certain catalogs. See your system administrator for information regarding your current
editing privileges.
Clone Catalog Items

1. Click the item that you want to copy in the Catalog Explorer List view.
2. Click File > Clone. The software places a copy of the selected item in the List view.
Depending on your editing privileges, you may or may not be able to clone items
editing privileges.
 Cloning symbols differs from creating new symbols. When you clone an existing symbol, the
software copies all of the graphics and associated properties for the original symbol to the
new, cloned symbol. You can then modify the properties of the cloned symbol. When you
create a new symbol, you must define all of the graphics and properties for the new symbol.
 When cloning a Conductor symbol for use as a Jumper symbol, you must rename the
symbol making sure that jumper is part of the name.

Catalog Manager
Rename Catalog Items

1. Click the custom catalog item in the List view that you want to rename.
2. In Catalog Explorer, click File > Rename. The software highlights the item and displays an
edit field.
3. Type the new name for the catalog item.
Depending on your editing privileges, you may or may not be able to rename items
in certain catalogs. See your system administrator for information regarding your current editing
privileges.
Create Catalog Nodes

1. Make the Catalog Explorer Tree view the active window.
2. Browse the Catalog Explorer Tree view to the location where you want to add a node on the
same level of the tree hierarchy.
3. Click File > New. The software creates a node with the name New Category and displays a
field for editing.
4. Type the name for the new catalog node.
You can also add nodes to a custom catalog by dragging nodes from an existing catalog to
the appropriate location in custom catalog.
Depending on your editing privileges, you may or may not be able to create nodes
privileges.
Delete Catalog Items

1. Click the catalog item in the List view that you want to delete.
2. Click File > Delete.
3. Click Yes on the confirmation box to delete the selected item.
Depending on your editing privileges, you may or may not be able to delete items
editing privileges.
Delete Catalog Nodes

1. Click the catalog node that you want to delete in the Catalog Explorer Tree view.
2. Click File > Delete.
3. Click Yes on the confirmation box to delete the selected node.
Depending on your editing privileges, you may or may not be able to delete nodes
privileges.

Catalog Manager
Rename Catalog Nodes

1. In Catalog Explorer click the custom catalog node that you want to rename in the Tree view.
2. Click File > Rename. The software draws a box around the highlighted node and displays
an edit field.
3. Type the new name for the custom catalog node.
Depending on your editing privileges, you may or may not be able to rename nodes
privileges.
Search for Items in Catalog Explorer

1. In Catalog Explorer, click File > Find.
2. Define the Name & Class search criteria.
3. Click Find Now to start the search with the defined criteria.
 Items found by the search appear at the bottom of the Catalog Find Item window.
 You can save the set of current search results to use later by dragging them into a My
Catalog folder or subfolder.
Close Catalog Explorer

Click File > Close to close the Catalog Explorer window.
Catalog Explorer Toolbar Commands and Dialog Box

The Catalog Explorer toolbar buttons provide access to the Catalog Explorer Catalog, Views,
and Buttons menus. The commands on these menus allow you to customize Catalog Explorer.
After customization, you can control the content and display of drawing components in the
Catalog Explorer view. For example, you can control the display of icons in the List view, and
define shortcut buttons that allow you easy access to user-defined groups of catalog items. You
can also open other symbol libraries or create your own symbol catalogs.
Add Button Command (Catalog Explorer Navigation Menu)

Adds a shortcut button to Catalog Explorer for the active Tree view node.
Delete Command (Catalog Explorer File Menu)

Removes the selected item or node from Catalog Explorer.
Details Command (Catalog Explorer View Menu)

Displays smaller icons with names and source information vertically in a single column in the
List view.
Clone Command (Catalog Explorer File Menu)

Creates a copy of the selected catalog item.

Catalog Manager
Close Command (Catalog Explorer File Menu)

Closes the Catalog Explorer window.
Find Command (Catalog Explorer Find Menu)

Displays the Find dialog box. The Find Item dialog box allows you to search the catalog for a
specific item or group of items.
See Also
Find Dialog Box (on page 21)
Find Dialog Box
Allows you to search the active catalog for a specific item based on user-defined search criteria.
Name — Specifies the name of the item for which you want to search. You can type the
* character as a wildcard character to find multiple characters, or type ? as a wildcard character
for a single character.
Class — Specifies the class (item type) of item for which you want to search. Select from the list
the required class.
Look In — Specifies the drive or folder that contains the symbol library you want to search.
Browse — Allows you to search any network drives or the local directory structure for a symbol
library to appear in the Look In combo box.
Results List — Lists the items that met the defined search criteria. You can drag catalog items
displayed in this area into a My Catalog set of items in the Catalog Explorer Tree view.
Find Now — Starts a search of the symbol library defined in the Look In: box based on defined
search criteria.
Stop — Ends the current search.
New Search — Clears all search criteria in preparation for a new search.
Large Icons Command (Catalog Explorer View Menu)

Displays larger icons and names horizontally in the List view and does not list details.
List Command (Catalog Explorer View Menu)

Displays smaller icons with names vertically using multiple columns in the List view and does
not list details.
New Item Command (Catalog Explorer File Menu)

Creates a new item in the List view.
Open Command (Catalog Explorer File Menu)

Displays the selected catalog item for editing.
Remove Button Command (Catalog Explorer Navigation Menu)

Removes the active shortcut button from the list of shortcut buttons in Catalog Explorer.

Catalog Manager
Rename Command (Catalog Explorer File Menu)

Displays an edit field so that you can type a new name for the item.
Show Buttons Command (Catalog Explorer Navigation Menu)

Displays a check mark next to the menu item to indicate that shortcut buttons will appear.
Small Icons Command (Catalog Explorer View Menu)

Displays smaller icons with names horizontally in the List view and does not list details.
Properties Window
The Properties window displays properties for selected symbols. Depending on your access
privileges, properties can appear in either read-only or read/write mode. If the symbol displayed
in the view window does not have any properties associated with it, the Properties window is
blank.
The button located at the top of the Properties window allows you to sort properties either
alphabetically or by category.

Catalog Manager
 When you select an item in the Catalog Explorer List view but do not open the item, a short
list of properties is displayed in the Properties window. You cannot edit properties in the
short list. You must open the symbol in order to edit properties.
 When a symbol is open for editing, if you subsequently select the symbol in the Catalog
Explorer List view, then the short list of properties is displayed in the Properties window
even though the symbol is open. To see the entire properties list, click the symbol page
again or select the open symbol from the Window menu. You can view the short list of
properties for any symbol by selecting it in the Catalog Explorer List view, regardless of
whether any symbols are open in the view window.
 If you clone a symbol, the item type is derived from the cloned item. If you create a new
symbol, the default item type is the last item type selected in the Properties window.
Sort Properties by Category

In the Catalog Manager Properties window, click the Categorized button.
 If the Categorized button is not available, but the Alphabetized button is, the list of
properties is already sorted by category.
 You can add custom categories by modifying the Property Category select list in
SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager.
Sort Properties Alphabetically

In the Catalog Manager Properties window, click the Alphabetized button.

Catalog Manager
If the Alphabetized button is not available, but the Categorized button is, the list of
properties is already sorted alphabetically.
Properties Command
Turns the display of the Properties window on or off.
View Window
Allows you to display, edit, and create symbols. If the View window is empty, drag items from
the Catalog Explorer List view to the View window. You can also display items by using the File
> Open command or by double-clicking a symbol in the List view.
The tabs at the bottom of the view window help to control the display of the following symbol
components.
Graphics — Displays only the basic graphics associated with the symbol.
Heat Trace (P&ID only) — Displays the geometry of any heat tracing associated with the
selected symbol. Line width and style are set in Options Manager. To draw the heat tracing
geometry, view both the Graphics and Heat Trace layers, and then draw the heat tracing on the
Heat Trace layer.
Jacket (P&ID only) — Displays the geometry of any jacket associated with the selected symbol.
Line width and style are set in Options Manager. To draw the jacket geometry, view both the
Graphics and Jacket layers, and then draw the jacket on the Jacket layer.
Label — Displays any label text associated with the selected symbol. For more information on
creating label text, see Create a Text Label. Labels for SmartPlant Electrical symbols should be

Catalog Manager
placed on the Hidden tab, and labels for SmartPlant P&ID symbols should be placed on the
Labels tab.
Hidden Objects — Displays any hidden objects associated with the selected symbol in the
View window. Hidden objects are objects that users do not need to see in drawings, but that the
software needs to check property values, such as attribute break labels.
Icon — Displays the icon bitmap representation that displays in the Catalog Explorer. If you do
not define a special icon for a symbol on the Icon layer, the software uses the graphics that you
define on the Graphics tab as the icon for the symbol.
 To view two layers at once, hold down the CTRL key and select the second tab of the layer
to be displayed. The layer name appearing in bold text is the layer you can modify. Only the
Graphics, Heat Trace, Jacket and Label layers can be displayed simultaneously.
 To switch between the displayed layers, click the other tab.

 To stop displaying a layer, hold down the CTRL key and click the tab of the layer you want
to stop displaying.
Change the Display of Catalog Manager View Window

Click the appropriate tab at the bottom of the Catalog Manager View window to change the
window display.
To apply multiple tabs to the View window, press and hold the CTRL key and select the
appropriate tabs. The bold tab name designates the active display.
Fit All Elements in the Active View

 On the Main toolbar, click Fit .
Fits all visible elements in the active view if no elements are currently selected. If any elements
are selected, the command zooms to the selected elements. You can also click View > Fit.
If you have a Microsoft IntelliMouse, you can press SHIFT and click the mouse wheel to
fit the view.
See Also
Fit Command (on page 27)
Pan a View
1. On the Main toolbar, click Pan .
2. Click in the view you want to pan.
3. Click in the view again to show how far you want to pan.
 You can also drag the pointer to pan the view.

 When you drag using the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel, the view pans.

Catalog Manager
 Click the wheel to start the pan, and then click when the pan is complete.
 When you press and drag the mouse wheel and move the pointer from one location to
another, the view pans from one location to another.
 To go back to the previous view, click Previous on the View menu.
 To exit the command, right-click or press ESC.
See Also
Pan Command (on page 28)
Restore a View
 Click View > Previous.
 You can also right-click to access Previous on the shortcut menu.

 You can also select the Previous option by right-clicking within the drawing area.
 You can also press ALT and click the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel to restore the view.
See Also
Previous Command (on page 28)
Zoom Area
1. On the Main toolbar, click Zoom Area .
2. On the drawing sheet, drag around the area that you want to zoom in on. The view zooms in
on the area you fenced with the pointer.
 When you roll the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel forward, the view zooms in at the current
pointer location. You can also press CTRL and drag the mouse wheel to zoom an area or
window.
 To go back to the previous view, click View > Previous, or click ALT + F5.
See Also
Zoom Out (on page 27)
Zoom In
1. On the Main toolbar, click Zoom In .
2. Click the view.
 You can drag the mouse to dynamically zoom in to the view.

Catalog Manager
 When you roll the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel forward, the view zooms in at the current
pointer location.
 To go back to the previous view, click View > Previous or ALT + F5.
Zoom Out
1. On the Main toolbar, click Zoom Out .
2. Click the view.
 You can drag the mouse to dynamically zoom out of the view.
 When you roll the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel backward, the view zooms out at the current
pointer location.
 To go back to the previous view, click View > Previous, or click ALT + F5.
See Also
Zoom Area Command (on page 29)
Zoom Out Command (on page 30)
Zoom In Command
View Window Commands

This section contains topics about the commands used in the View window of Catalog Manager.
Cascade Command
Overlaps windows diagonally across the screen.
You can use Tools > Customize to place the Cascade Windows button on a toolbar.
See Also
New Window Command (on page 28)
Fit Command
Fits all visible elements in the active view if no elements are currently selected. If any
elements are selected, the command zooms to the selected elements.
See Also
Fit All Elements in the Active View (on page 25)
Fit to Symbol Command

Fits the active view to the open symbol in Catalog Manager view window.

Catalog Manager
New Window Command

Opens a new window that displays the same document as the active window. The new
window appears on top of all the other windows and becomes the active window. If you change
the contents of the open document in one window, the other windows that contain the same
document reflect the changes.
You can use Tools > Customize to place the New Window button on a toolbar.
See Also
Cascade Command (on page 27)
Pan Command
Allows you to move in any direction from a specific point in a document to see other areas of
the drawing or model.
You can also right-click to access Pan on the shortcut menu.
See Also
Pan a View (on page 25)
Previous Command
Restores the previous view.
 You can use Tools > Customize to place the Previous button on a toolbar.
 You can also right-click to access Previous on the shortcut menu.
See Also
Restore a View (on page 26)
Tile Horizontally Command

Arranges windows to fit horizontally on the screen. All the windows appear at an even distance
from each other on the screen.

Catalog Manager
See Also
Tile Vertically Command

Arranges windows to fit vertically on the screen. All the windows appear at an even distance
from each other on the screen.
See Also
Window List Command

Displays an alphabetical list of open document windows below the commands on the Window
menu. You can easily access another open document by clicking one of the window names on
the list.
See Also
Zoom Area Command

Enlarges the display of elements in the active window.
 If you have an IntelliMouse or a three-button mouse, you can zoom in an area by holding
CTRL, pressing the mouse wheel or middle mouse button, and dragging the pointer.
 You can also right-click to access Zoom Area on the shortcut menu.
See Also
Zoom In Command
Enlarges the display of elements around a specified point in the active window.
 If you have an IntelliMouse or a three-button mouse, you can zoom in by rolling the wheel of
the IntelliMouse.
 You can also right-click to access Zoom In on the shortcut menu.
See Also

Catalog Manager
Zoom Out Command

Reduces the display of elements around a specified point in the active window.
Select a point to zoom out from, and the active view is redrawn with that point as the center of
the display. This command shows more of the active view but at a lower resolution.
 You can also zoom out by rolling the wheel of the IntelliMouse.
 You can also right-click to access Zoom Out on the shortcut menu.
See Also
Zoom Out (on page 27)
Zoom In Command
Toolbars
The following standard toolbars provide quick access to the various commands available in
Catalog Manager.
Change Toolbar (on page 31)
Draw Toolbar (on page 32)
Label Toolbar (on page 32)
Main Toolbar (on page 33)
Ribbon Toolbar (on page 34)
Catalog Tools Toolbar (on page 35)
Place Label Ribbon (on page 63)
You can show or hide toolbars or move them to any location in your workspace. You can also
add or remove commands from toolbars, or create your own (for details, see Create a New
Toolbar (on page 374)).
 To show or hide a toolbar, click View > Toolbars and check or clear the box by the toolbar.
A check mark next to a toolbar name means that the toolbar will be displayed. You can also
use the right-click shortcut menu to show or hide a toolbar by clicking on the toolbars name
to select or clear the check box.
 To move a toolbar to a different location, click the toolbar's title bar and then drag the toolbar
to the new location.
 To access fly-out commands, click and hold the button on the toolbar. Fly-outs access
commands that are closely associated with the button that you clicked. These types of
buttons have a small black arrow in the bottom right corner.
 To add a command to a toolbar from a menu, click View > Toolbars > Customize and then
click the Toolbars tab. In the Buttons list, click the group that contains the command you
want to add, and then from the Buttons list drag the command to the toolbar in your
workspace.

Catalog Manager
 To return a customized toolbar to its original state, click the Reset button on the Toolbars
dialog box.
Change Toolbar
Allows you change the appearance or position of symbols in Catalog Manager.
Move Command (on page 181)
Offset Command (on page 185)
Rotate Command (on page 290)
Mirror Command (on page 289)
Scale Command (on page 292)
Delete Command (on page 191)
Bring to Front Command (on page 301)
Send To Back Command (on page 310)
Pull Up Command (on page 310)
Push Down Command (on page 310)
Group Command (on page 305)
Ungroup Command (on page 310)
Connect Command (on page 287)
Horizontal/Vertical Command (on page 289)
Parallel Command (on page 289)
Perpendicular Command (on page 290)
Tangent Command (on page 292)
Collinear Command (on page 287)
Concentric Command (on page 287)
Symmetric Command (on page 242)
Equal Command (on page 288)
Lock Command (on page 200)

Catalog Manager
Relationship Handles Command (on page 200)
Alignment Indicator Command (on page 200)
Draw Toolbar
Provides one-click access to several common features of Catalog Manager. This toolbar allows
you draw symbols and elements of symbols.
Select Tool (on page 177)
Line Command (on page 142)
Tangent Arc Command (on page 157)
Curve Command (on page 155)
Circle by Center Point Command (on page

147)
Rectangle Command (on page 162)
Point Command (on page 143)
Text Box Command (on page 325)
Fillet Command (on page 288)
Trim Command (on page 293)
Extend to Next Command (on page 288)
Fill Command (on page 359)
Create Symbol Command (on page 192)
Label Toolbar
Allows you to attach various types of labels to symbols in Catalog Manager.
SmartDimension Command (on page 242)
Distance Between Command (on page 240)
Angle Between Command (on page 231)

Catalog Manager
Axis Command (on page 232)
Coordinate Dimension Command (on page

233)
Symmetric Diameter Command (on page 243)
Measure Distance Command (on page 248)
Measure Area Command (on page 248)
Text Box Command (on page 325)
Character Map Command (on page 323)
Leader Command (on page 324)
Balloon Command (on page 321)
Main Toolbar
Allows you to perform various actions on the file as it is displayed in the window.
Open Command (Catalog Explorer File Menu)

(on page 21)
Open Database Command (on page 12)
Save Command (on page 114)
Print Command (on page 118)
Cut Command (on page 191)
Copy Command (on page 185)
Paste Command (on page 186)
Undo Command (on page 177)
Redo Command (on page 176)
PinPoint Command (on page 210)

Catalog Manager
Zoom In Command
Fit Command (on page 27)
Pan Command (on page 28)
Ribbon Toolbar
Ribbons help you control various settings for the active command. A unique ribbon appears
when you select the command or when you select an element. You can use the same ribbon for
creating an element or modifying it. For example, if you place a line or select an existing line to
modify it, the same ribbon is active.
The options on a ribbon work like options on dialog boxes. Any options that you set affect the
active command. For example, after you click Balloon on the Label toolbar, before you place a
balloon, you can set a style for it on the ribbon.
 You must turn on the Ribbon toolbar using the View > Toolbars command to open the
Toolbars dialog box where you can see the options related to the selected command.
 You can drag a ribbon to the top or the bottom of the drawing sheet, but not to the sides.
The following ribbon toolbars appear in Catalog Manager.
Arc Ribbon (on page 154)
Balloon Ribbon (on page 323)
Chamfer Ribbon (on page 286)
Circle Ribbon (on page 147)
Circular Pattern Ribbon (on page 188)
Curve Ribbon (on page 155)
Define PinPoint Origin Ribbon (on page 210)
Dimension Ribbon (on page 344)
Ellipse Ribbon (on page 159)
Fill Ribbon (on page 359)
Fillet Ribbon (on page 288)
FreeForm Ribbon (on page 169)
FreeSketch Ribbon (on page 170)
Group Ribbon (on page 306)

Catalog Manager
Layers Ribbon (on page 309)

Leader Ribbon (on page 325)
Line Ribbon (on page 142)
Mirror Ribbon (on page 289)
Move Ribbon (on page 181)
Offset Ribbon (on page 183)
PinPoint Ribbon (on page 210)
Place Label Ribbon (on page 63)
Point Ribbon (on page 143)
Rectangle Ribbon (on page 162)
Rectangular Pattern Ribbon (on page 189)
Rotate Ribbon (on page 290)
Scale Ribbon (on page 292)
Select Tool Ribbon (on page 177)
Text Box Ribbon (on page 330)
Catalog Tools Toolbar

Provide different options for creating or editing a new catalog item. The Catalog Tools toolbar
allows you to place and manipulate connect points, edit Smart Text labels, and edit symbol
properties.
Your editing privileges determine if you can use the Catalog Manager commands to
create and edit items. See your system administrator for information regarding your current
editing privileges.
Show Points Command (on page 68)
Place Point Command (on page 66)
Smart Text Command (on page 83)
Set Item Type Command (on page 83)
Fit to Symbol Command (on page 27)
Property Breaks Command (on page 81)
Properties Command (on page 24)
Catalog Explorer Command (on page 17)

Catalog Manager
General Commands
This section contains topics about general commands used in Catalog Manager.
Standard Control Keys

The following table lists the standard Microsoft shortcuts the software supports. You can access
these commands by pressing CTRL + a letter.
CTRL + A Select All
CTRL + C Copy Text
CTRL + N New
CTRL + O Open
CTRL + P Print
CTRL + S Save
CTRL + V Paste Text
CTRL + X Cut Text
CTRL + Y Redo
CTRL + Z Undo
Function Keys
Certain function keys work only when the appropriate command is active. For instance, F9
through F12 are only available when you use PinPoint.
The following table lists F-keys and their corresponding functions. Function key equivalents and
modifier keys, if any, display next to commands on menus, according to standard Microsoft
Windows conventions.
F1 Help
F3 Grid Snap
ALT + F4 Exit
CTRL + F4 Close File
F5 Update Active View
ALT + F5 Previous Zoom Level

Catalog Manager
CTRL + F7 Paste From Clipboard
F9 Toggle PinPoint Display
CTRL + F9 Cut to Clipboard
F10 PinPoint Lock X axis
SHIFT + Select First Menu Item

F10
F11 PinPoint Lock Y axis
F12 Reset PinPoint Home
Catalog Manager Help Command (Help Menu)

Displays the table of contents for Catalog Manager Help topics, which includes step-by-step
instructions for using the software, reference information, examples of features, and technical
support information. It also provides access to the Help index and full-text search.
Printable Guides Command (Help Menu)

Opens a page in your Internet browser that includes the links to the User's Guides in portable
document format. Click on a link and the guide is opened in the appropriate application, from
which you can print it. The User's Guides contain the same information as the Online Help.
About Command (Help Menu)

Displays information about your copy of the software, including the version number and the
copyright, legal, and licensing notices.

Catalog Manager

SECTION 2
Working with Symbols

Symbols are graphical representations of an item such as piping, vessels, pumps, generators
and so forth that include a drawing of the item as well as the properties associated with that
item. To create a new symbol, you must define everything from the item type (equipment,
piping, piping component, and so forth) to the graphic and pre-defined properties for the symbol.
Symbol Guidelines
Equipment
The graphical representation of a piece of equipment consists of outer graphics, which define
the perimeter shape, and inner graphics, which are contained within the perimeter shape.
Because the front-most graphics are located first, nozzle placement, for example, works much
better with the outer graphics in front. The outer graphics should be drawn "in front" of the inner
graphics using the Bring to Front command.
Piping Components
Consist of valves and fittings of various kinds and typically have one or more piping connect
points. The origin location depends on the number of connect points as follows:
 One Connect Point — A cap may have a single connect point. The origin must be at the
same location as the connect point.
 Two Collinear Connect Points — A normal two-way gate valve has two collinear connect
points. The origin must be midway between the two connect points.
 Two Non-Collinear Connect Points — A two-way angle valve is a good example of this.
The origin must be at the intersection of the two connect point axes.
 More than Two Connect Points — The connect point axes should all intersect at a point.
The origin must be at this intersection point. Any additional connect points, whose axes do
not intersect at that point, are ignored for placement purposes. However, you can still
connect pipes to these points after placing the symbol.
Placement of piping and/or signal points on equipment and equipment components is
not supported by SmartPlant P&ID. Doing so will result in several SmartPlant P&ID features not
working properly, including not being able to publish the item. Removing these points from these
equipment items is advised.
Flow-Oriented Components
A check valve is a prime example of this special category of piping components in which the
component has an inherent flow direction. The graphics within the symbol usually include an
arrow to indicate the flow direction. Flow direction consistency checking for this type of
component is handled as follows:
 The symbol must be drawn with the "natural" flow direction from left to right along a
horizontal line.

 The Flow Direction property is set in the Properties window. End 1 Is Upstream = the flow
follows the natural direction. End 1 Is Downstream = the flow is reversed from the natural
direction.
 The downstream (outlet) connect point must be oriented along the positive x-axis. An
ordinary check valve should be drawn with the natural flow direction from left to right along a
horizontal line. An angle check valve should be drawn with the outlet oriented along the
positive x-axis.
Reducers
Reducers are piping components that are used to change the nominal diameter of a pipe.
Reducers require special behavior when they are placed and modified. To obtain this special
behavior, observe the following requirements:
 The IsReducing property must be set to True in the Properties window.
 The symbol must be drawn with the primary axis as a horizontal line. The large end of the
reducer should be on the left and the small end on the right.
 The reducer should have a connect point at each end. Connect point 1 must be on the left
(at the large end) and connect point 2 must be on the right (at the small end).
Inline Instruments
The requirements for inline instruments, such as control valves, are the same as those for piping
components. Piping connect points are used to allow the inline instruments to be placed into
pipes. For an inline instrument that can accept an actuator, you should place an auxiliary
connect point at the location where the actuator will be attached.
Offline Instruments
Offline instruments are usually created with eight Signal connect points (one every 45 degrees)
around the perimeter of the instrument. This type of instrument usually contains Smart Text that
defines an embedded label. Any connect points above 8 will not be displayed in the Properties
grid when the symbol is placed in the drawing environment. For more information about Smart
Text, see Smart Text Editor Dialog Box (on page 84).
Off Page Connectors (OPCs)

Each OPC should abide the following rules:
 Each OPC should have two auxiliary connect points, one at each end.
 The origin of the symbol must be midway between the two connect points.
OPCs normally contain one or more Smart Text boxes that define an embedded label. For more
information about Smart Text, see Smart Text Editor Dialog Box (on page 84).
The OPC may be mirrored and/or rotated at placement time. To make the text readable, the
Smart Label rotates each text box about its own center point. To ensure that the text box
remains positioned correctly during this process, the text box properties should be set so that
the center of the text box remains fixed regardless of how much text it contains. To accomplish
this:
 Set the alignment and justification to Center/Center.
 Set the width and height to Exactly.

Scalable Symbols
Any symbol may be made scalable by setting the IsScalable property to True. By default, the
value of this property for all delivered reference data symbols is set to False.
Parametric Symbols
Parametric symbols contain geometry constrained together using relationships, with driving
dimensions that are defined as adjustable parameters.
Symbol Conversion Utility

With the introduction of the Enhanced Report Utility, there is a possibility that symbols shipped
or created with previous versions of the SmartPlant software will not function or appear correctly
in new reports. To make your upgrade as smooth as possible, Catalog Manager has included a
symbol conversion utility. You only need to run this utility if you experience problems with your
symbol files. If you select to use the conversion utility, you only need to run it once. The
conversion utility converts your old .sym files so that they can be used with the new Enhanced
Report Utility. During the conversion process the software finds all relationship handles and
deletes them, removes text styles other than Normal, and checks that the connection point type
for existing points is "Connection Point".
Convert Symbols with the Symbol Conversion Utility

1. Click Tools > Custom Commands.
To view the Tools menu, you must have a symbol open on the drawing sheet.
2. On the Custom Commands dialog box, navigate to the directory where the SmartPlant
Engineering Manager program files are installed and select the file
CMConvertSymbols413.dll.
3. Click Open.
4. On the Open dialog box, select the folder that contains your symbols.
5. Click Open.
6. On the Check and Correct dialog box, click Check.
The utility searches the selected folder and any sub-folders for .sym files and performs
the necessary changes.
7. At the prompt, click OK.
8. On the Check and Correct dialog box, click Cancel.
See Also
Symbol Conversion Utility (on page 41)

Creating Symbols
Symbols are comprised of a drawing (graphical representation) of the item as well as the
properties associated with that item. Some of the characteristics of a symbol might include the
drawing of the item, heat tracing, labels, the icon that represents the item in the Catalog
Explorer, and the properties associated with the item. Catalog Manager allows you to create
and edit these symbols.
There are two methods for creating a symbol. You can create a symbol by cloning an existing
symbol. When you clone a symbol, the software copies all of the graphics and associated
properties for the original symbol to the new, cloned symbol, and then you modify the properties
of the cloned symbol to create a new symbol. You can also create a completely new symbol
using the drawing tools. Creating new symbols is different from cloning existing symbols. When
you create a new symbol, you must define all of the graphics and properties for the new
symbol. The symbol is saved as a .sym file.
 Before creating a customized symbol you should make a copy of the symbols folder and
then use the symbols from the copied folder to edit or create your custom symbols. Do not
create customized symbols by editing the original symbols delivered with the software
reference data. If the Reference Database is ever uninstalled and then reinstalled, all edits
made to the original delivered symbols would be lost. It is advisable to create a new symbol
by cloning and renaming a delivered symbol rather than editing the delivered symbol
directly.
 Use care when editing symbols. If you change the number or type of connect points for
symbols that have already been placed in drawings, you must manually edit each drawing
and replace each changed symbol.
 Depending on the change you made to the symbol, the symbol graphics may no longer
match the graphics of the symbol as it currently exists in your drawings. For P&ID drawings,
from the Drawing Manager use the File > Out-of-Date Drawings > Update command, to
update changed symbols. For drawings in SmartPlant Electrical, refresh or close and
reopen the drawing to update changed symbols.
 Be sure that Itemtype matches the PlantItemType property for the item. Such a mismatch
can result in data loss in the plant structure.
 While you can control color, line weight, and line style for symbols with the Display
Manager feature, this information should be updated in the Options Manager application.
Changes you make in the Display Manager will override the defined plant symbology and
should be avoided.
AABBCC Codes for Symbols

Below is a list of the first two characters of the AABBCC codes currently used by the delivered
Intergraph Reference Data for SmartPlant P&ID. AABBCC codes are used in transferring data
for the PDS 3D piping package, as well as for migrating SmartSketch drawings to SmartPlant
P&ID drawings.
If a standard other than Intergraph-delivered, DIN, KKS, or ISOPlus is used, refer to this
information to help develop the new standard.

1A Equipment (Other)
1B Equipment (Vessels)
1C Equipment (Exchangers, TEMA)
1D Equipment (Mechanical)
1E Equipment (Other)
1F Equipment (Exchanger, TEMA) EQ Labels
1M Equipment Component (General)
1N Equipment Component (Nozzles)
1O Equipment Component (Trays)
1P Equipment Component (Heat Transfer)
1Q Equipment Component (Mechanical)
1T Equipment Component Label
1V Equipment Component Label (Nozzles)
6F Piping Segment Labels
6H Piping Segment Break Labels
6L Pipe Run (Hose)
6M Pipe Run (Primary, Secondary, Utility)
6P Piping Component (Macrocomponents, Inline Specialty)
6Q Piping Component (Valves, Inline Components, Implied

Components, Fittings)
6T Piping Component Labels, Piping Segment Labels
7N Instrument Signal Run
7P Instrument (Valves, Inline Instruments, Regulators)
7Q Instrument (Off-line, with Implied, Computer Functions,

System Functions)
7S Instrument Labels
7T Instrument (Actuators, Functions)

AABBCC codes for PDS and SmartPlant products must be made of six characters. Each
regional standard must have completely unique AABBCC codes. Each non-Intergraph standard
will replace the first numeric character of the AABBCC code (such as 1, 6, or 7) with an
alphanumeric character (A-Z). In order to ensure uniqueness, a range of codes will be assigned
to each standard.
The first character of the AABBCC code for all P&ID symbols for each standard is assigned
below:
Intergraph 1 for Equipment, 6 for Piping, and 7 for

Instruments. 0, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 9, and U are
reserved.
DIN A for Equipment, B for Piping, and C for

Instruments. D and E are reserved.
PIP F for Equipment, G for Piping, and H for

Instruments. I and H are reserved.
KKS K for Equipment, L for Piping, and M for

Instruments. N and O are reserved.
Customer User- V for Equipment, W for Piping, and X for

defined Instruments. Y and Z are reserved.
ISOPlus Standard P for Equipment, Q for Piping, and R for

Instruments. S and T are reserved.
As the first two characters for a vessel:
For Intergraph standard use 1B
For DIN use AB
For PIP use FB
For KKS use KB
For Customers use VB
For ISOPlus use PB
As the first two characters for a piping component valve:
For Intergraph standard use 6Q
For DIN use BQ
For PIP use GQ
For KKS use LQ

For Customers use WQ
For ISOPlus use QQ
As the first two characters for an instrument valve:
For Intergraph standard use 7P
For DIN use CP
For PIP use HP
For KKS use MP
For Customers use XP
For ISOPlus use RP
Open Symbols in Catalog Manager

1. Select an item in the Catalog Explorer List view.
2. In the Catalog Explorer, click File > Open.
Create a Symbol
1. In the Catalog Explorer, right-click on the Item screen and on the shortcut menu, click New
Item.
2. Right-click on the new item in the list, and click Rename to rename the new symbol.
3. Double-click the new symbol to open it in the View window.
4. Using the drawing tools create the new symbol.
5. Assign an item type by choosing an option in the list box at the top of the Properties
window.
6. Add labels as necessary, using the Smart Text Editor dialog box.
7. Do one of the following:
 Click File > Save.
 Click .
To save the symbol to a different directory click File > Save As and select the directory
you require.
 When creating transformer symbols for use with SmartPlant Electrical, you must create
three separate components for the transformer, as the SmartPlant Electrical software
combines these three components into one transformer symbol when it generates the single
line diagram.

 If you are creating schematic blocks for use with SmartPlant Electrical, you must use
SmartSketch to create blocks from the schematic drawing.
 Labels for SmartPlant Electrical symbols should be placed on the Hidden tab, and labels for
SmartPlant P&ID symbols should be placed on the Label tab.
 All the pre-defined attributes and the graphic for the symbol are saved in the .sym file.
Create a Symbol with Predefined Properties

1. In the Catalog Explorer Tree view, click the symbol node to which you want to add a symbol
with predefined properties.
2. In the List view for the selected node, right-click to display a shortcut menu.
3. On the shortcut menu, click New Item to create a blank symbol named New Item.
4. Right-click the new item.
5. On the shortcut menu, click Rename and type a unique name for the new symbol.
6. Double-click the new symbol to open it in the view window.
7. Set the properties as needed. For example, you could set the Cleaning Requirement to
None. For more information about adding property values, see Edit Symbol Properties (on
page 69).
8. Click File > Save .
 Creating new symbols differs from cloning existing symbols. When you clone an existing
symbol, the software copies all of the graphics and associated properties for the original
symbol to the new, cloned symbol. You can then modify the properties of the cloned symbol.
When you create a new symbol, you must define all of the graphics and properties for the
new symbol.
even though the symbol is open. In order to see the entire properties list, click the symbol
page again or select the open symbol from the Window menu. You can view the short list of
 If an item type property has Write P&ID or Write Both permissions in Data Dictionary
Manager and a symbol belonging to the item type is changed in Catalog Manager, running
the Update command on a drawing in Drawing Manager will NOT overwrite values assigned
to this property with any defaults that may have been pre-defined in Catalog Manager. If the
property permissions are Write Catalog in Data Dictionary Manager, Update will restore any
default property values defined in Catalog Manager.
Defining a Title Block

You can customize any symbol as a title block by adding graphical elements of the desired
dimensions according to the sheet size. To add labels to the title block for displaying various

types of title block information such as plant data, revision data, date and time stamps, and
display set data, a set of XML macros is available that display data entered in the tool itself or
retrieved from SmartPlant Foundation.
Define a New Title Block Label

1. In Catalog Manager, open the symbol to which you want to add the title block labels.
2. Click Insert > Title Block Field to display the Place Label ribbon bar.
3. From the Label Set list, select the desired title block category.
4. From the Field list, select the desired property.
For details of label options for SmartPlant P&ID, see Place Label Ribbon - Options for
SmartPlant P&ID (on page 64).
5. In the Alternate Text Value box, if desired, type a text string that will appear if the software
is unable to retrieve a value for the selected property.
6. Click Display Label Names to toggle the display between the macro source name and
the label name.
7. Click More to display more options used for formatting the label.
8. Select the Label tab, and click on the view area to position the label.
9. To increase the size of the label to accommodate more text, select the SmartFrame around
the XML string and drag the handles to make the SmartFrame larger.
10. Click File > Save As.

To make the symbol available in the Catalog Explorer of the SmartPlant application,
save it in the Symbols folder (or one of its sub-folders) on your Site Server location.
 The values for the selected fields are not displayed with the symbol in Catalog Manager;
only the alternate text is displayed. To display the values for the selected fields, place the
saved symbol in your P&ID drawing, save the drawing, then close and reopen the drawing to
view the label values.
 Some label sets are only relevant when you are working in an integrated environment, such
as Signature Area and Issue. The field values for these label sets are only displayed in
SmartPlant Foundation after publishing the drawings.
 To view or edit the XML text behind the label, select the label and click Smart Text Editor
. On the Smart Text Editor dialog box, the XML text appears in the Text box. If you
edit the text, be careful not to change any of the XML code strings.
Editing XML Data of Title Block Label

The Place Label ribbon is used to create labels for symbols using properties and values taken
from the title block label sets. The Place Label ribbon only supports downward growth of the
title block labels, it is however possible to edit the .xml data of the label in the Catalog Manager
SmartText Editor to achieve upward growth of the title block labels.
For example, a label with 4 rows of information to be displayed would look like this;
<?xml version="1.0"?><body><intstgxml stream="Revision" select="/Revision/Revision[last()-
0]/@SP_MajorRevisionNumber" alt=""/></body>
To alter the label to achieve upward growth instead of downward growth the .xml data Last()-0,
Last()-1, Last ()-2, and Last()-3 must be replaced with the .xml data:
[ ( (last() > 4) and position() = (last() - 0) ) or ( (last() <=4) and position() = 4 )]
Remembering that "<" and ">" are special syntax symbols used by XML and should be replaced
with the text "<" and ">" the new labels would look like this:
<?xml version="1.0"?><body><intstgxml stream="Revision" select="/Revision/Revision[( (last()
> 4) and position() = last() - 0 ) or ( (last() <= 4) and position() = 4)
]/@SP_MajorRevisionNumber" alt=""/></body>
> 4) and position() = last() - 1) or ( (last() <= 4) and position() = 3)
]/@SP_MajorRevisionNumber" alt=""/></body>>
> 4) and position() = last() - 2 ) or ( (last() <= 4) and position() = 2 )

> 4) and position() = last() - 3 ) or ( (last() <= 4) and position() = 1 )

Create a Symbol Containing an Assembly of Items

 Click File > Open Database.
 On the toolbar, click .

2. In the Open Plant Structure window, open the available plant structure.
3. From the Application Type box, select SmartPlant Electrical and click Open.
4. Click File > New Item or on the shortcut menu, click New Item.
5. Right-click the new item in the list, and click Rename.
6. Rename the symbol.
7. Use the Properties window to select in the list box the desired type of symbol.
8. Drag and drop the pre-defined symbol you want to use onto the Graphics grid.
 On the left side of the screen, in the Number field, notice that items of the same type
will be numbered chronologically, an additional item of a different type will be numbered
separately.
 On the left side of the screen, in the Item Type box that indicates the item type which
you have selected, click one of the items under Graphics to identify its type.
9. Add labels as necessary, using the Smart Text Editor dialog box.
10. Click File > Save As, and save the new symbol to a symbol file.
 In the Number box, you can choose the number of the item, but notice that the numbers
of each type of item should be set chronologically, otherwise the program will arrange
the numbers automatically.
 While you can control color, line weight, and line style for symbols with the Display
Manager feature, this information should be updated in Options Manager. Changes
you make in the Display Manager will override the defined plant symbology and should
be avoided.
11. On the Save As dialog box, select the directory where you want to save the symbol.
12. Type the name that you want for the symbol. The software saves the document with a .sym
extension.
 When creating transformer symbols for use with SmartPlant Electrical, you must create
three separate components for the transformer, as the SmartPlant Electrical software
combines these three components into one transformer symbol when it generates the single
line diagram.
 If you are creating schematic blocks for use with SmartPlant Electrical, you must use
SmartSketch to create blocks from the schematic drawing.

 Labels for SmartPlant Electrical symbols should be placed on the Hidden tab, and labels for
SmartPlant P&ID labels should be placed on the Labels tab.
 All the pre-defined attributes and the graphic for the symbol are saved in the .sym file.
See also
Create a Symbol (on page 45)
Create a Symbol with Predefined Properties (on page 46)
Create Piping Symbols

1. In the Catalog Explorer Tree view, click the symbol node where you want to add a piping
component, such as a valve.
2. In the List view of symbols for the selected node, right-click to display a shortcut menu.
5. On the shortcut menu, click Rename and give the symbol a name.
6. Double-click the new piping component to open the new symbol in the view window.
7. On the Item Type list at the top of the Properties window, click Piping Component.
8. Use the available drawing commands to add or edit any graphics for the new piping
component. Use the red dot as the origin of the symbol's coordinates.
9. Set the properties of the symbol as needed.
10. Click File > Save .

When you create specialty piping items, you must change the Pipe Spec validation code.
If the value in the IsSpecialtyItem column is True, the Pipe Spec lookup code will ignore this
item. If value is False, the Pipe Spec lookup processing will proceed normally.

Create Equipment Symbols

1. In the Catalog Explorer Tree view, click the symbol node to which you want to add an
equipment symbol, such as a pump.
2. In the list of symbols for the selected node, right-click to display a shortcut menu.
5. On the shortcut menu, click Rename.
6. Type a unique name for the new equipment.
7. In Catalog Manager, open the new symbol.
8. From the Item Type list, click Equipment: Mechanical.
9. Set the properties as needed.
10. Click File > Save.
Create Instrumentation Symbols

1. In the Catalog Explorer Tree view, click the symbol node that you want to add an instrument
to, such as a control valve.
6. Type a unique name for the new instrument.
7. Double-click the new instrument to open the new symbol in the view window.
8. On the Item Type list at the top of the Properties window, click Instrument.
9. Use the available drawing commands to add or edit any graphics for the new instrument.
The red dot is the origin of the symbol's coordinates.
10. Set the properties of the symbol as needed.

Create a Parametric Symbol

1. In the Catalog Explorer Tree view, browse to the folder where you want to store the
parametric symbol.
2. Right-click anywhere in the Catalog Explorer List view, and click New Item.
3. Right-click the new item, and click Rename on the shortcut menu.
4. Type the new name for the symbol.
5. Double-click the new symbol to open it in SmartPlant Catalog Manager.
 Before you begin drawing your new parametric symbol, verify that the Tools > Maintain
Relationships option is active.
 Activate the Alignment Indicator and Relationship Handles commands on the

Change toolbar to help you create your symbol.
6. In the Properties window, enter any predefined properties for the parametric symbol. For
example, you can define the equipment type, class, and subclass for equipment symbols.
7. On the Graphics tab, draw the graphics for the new symbol.
8. Click Tools > Layer Groups to open the Layer Groups dialog box.
9. Create two layers, one named Construction and the other named Dimension, by typing
the names of each new layer into the Layers field and pressing the ENTER key.
These new layers allow you to work in the background to specify aspects of the
parametric symbol. When the new symbol is complete, you will turn off these layers so the
driving dimensions and construction objects of the symbol do not appear in the graphic or
icon of the symbol.

10. Activate the Construction layer by clicking Tools > Layers and selecting the Construction
option on the Layers ribbon.
11. Make sure all of the elements in your graphic are connected and defined as necessary.
 Use the Connect feature, if necessary, to connect adjoining lines.

 Make sure the relationship handles indicate the alignment of the elements in your
drawing. For example, make sure vertical and horizontal lines are marked as such, as
illustrated in the previous graphic. If these relationships are not defined, the parametric
symbol may not act properly when used in drawings.

12. Use the Point command to add the point to your symbol from which you will define
dimensions.
 The Point command must be added to a toolbar before you can use it in SmartPlant
Catalog Manager. For more information about customizing toolbars, see Add Shortcut
Buttons to the Catalog Explorer (on page 17).
 You cannot define dimensions using the origin of your symbol as a reference point,
because symbol origins are deleted when you save the file, thereby deleting any
dimensions associated with the origin.
 If you want to dimension from the location of your origin, move the origin indicator, and
place a point where the origin had been previously located. Define your dimensions as
indicated in the following steps, and then return the origin to its original location.
 To add a point, click the Point command on the toolbar to which you added it, and then
click the location from which you want to define dimensions.
 For more information, see Draw a Point (on page 142).
 If you cannot see the point you placed, zoom in on that area until it is visible. Once you
see it, you can select it, and change the line width on the Point Ribbon to make the point
more easily visible.
13. Click the Lock command on the Change toolbar, and then click the point you added to
ensure that its position will not move when the symbol size is changed.
14. Activate the new Dimension layer by selecting Dimension on the Layers ribbon.

15. Use the commands on the Labels toolbar to define one or more driving dimensions for the
new parametric symbol.
 By default, unselected driving labels appear in black, while driven labels appear in a
greenish-blue.
 To define a label as a driving label, select it and click the Driving/Driven command
on the Dimension Ribbon.
16. If you temporarily moved your origin so that you could define dimensions from its location,
return the origin to its original position.
17. Click Tools > Variables. The dimensions you added should already appear in this table.
18. In the Name column, click an empty cell.
19. Type a name for the variable that you want to create and press ENTER.
 Only the following four variable names are acceptable for parameter handles (the yellow
handles on the edges of the symbol): Top, Bottom, Right, and Left. These names are
case-sensitive, and the handles cannot be moved.
 You may use any number and combination of these standard variables. For more
information, see Define Variables and Parameter Handles for Parametric Symbols (on
page 57).

20. For the variable you added, define the distance from the point you defined to the handle you
named in the Value field. This value will be the default when placing the symbol.
21. Enter additional variables and their values, as needed.
22. In the Formula column of each of the dimensions at the top of the Variable Table, define an
equation to determine the behavior of that dimension in relation to the variables you defined.
 For example, if you want the right side of a parametric box to correspond with the
placement of the Right handle, type Right in the Formula field for the dimension that
measures the distance between your point and the right side of the box.
 If you want the right side of the box to be half the distance between the point you
defined and the Right handle, type Right/2 in the Formula field for that dimension.
 You can use a formula to define a minimum value for a dimension of a parametric
symbol. For details, see Define Minimum Value for a Parametric Symbol Dimension (on
page 58).
 Variable names within a formula are case-sensitive.
23. Test the new symbol to make sure it is working parametrically with the dimensions used to
construct the symbol and for parametric handles.
Change the value assigned to a variable you created and made sure the driving
dimension and the graphic changed accordingly.
For example, if a dimension was defined to be equal to the value of the Top variable (as
shown in the previous graphic) and you divide the Top value by two, the dimension value
should also change to one-half its original value. The new dimension value should also
appear in the Variable Table dialog box and in the symbol display, and the affected graphic
element (such as a line) should move accordingly.
24. On the Heat Tracing, Label, Hidden Objects, and Icon tabs, define other information for
the parametric symbol, as needed.
 When you have finished creating your symbols, turn off the Dimension and Construction
layers so the driving dimensions of the symbols will not appear in the graphic or icon of the
symbol.
 If you set variables before creating a symbol graphic, you will lose your variable settings.
Always create the graphic before defining variables.

 Setting values for parametric symbol dimensions will vary from one symbol to another; no
single procedure can document how to create all parametric symbols. Formulas defining
how the elements behave may require a certain amount of trial and error before they work
as desired.
Define Variables and Parameter Handles for Parametric

Symbols
To define parametric handles for parametric symbols, you must first decide which parameter
handles you want to control your symbol. You can have, at most, four handles for a parametric
symbol; these four handles include Top, Bottom, Left, and Right. These handles correspond to
a variable and a dimension in your parametric symbol profile.
For more information, see Create a Parametric Symbol (on page 52).
1. To define variables and equations to control the behavior of your parametric symbol, click
Tools > Variables.
3. Type one of the predefined names for the variable that will represent the parameter handle
you want to create.
The following four variable names are acceptable for parameter handles, yellow
handles in the edges of the symbol: Top, Bottom, Right, and Left. These names are
case-sensitive.
4. Enter a default value for that dimension, and press ENTER to add the variable.
5. Enter additional variables depending on the number of parameter handles you will be using.
6. In the Formula column for each of the dimensions in the table, type the variable of the
parameter handle that will determine the dimension.

Define Minimum Value for a Parametric Symbol Dimension

To define a minimum value for a dimension of a parametric symbol, you use a formula to specify
a minimum distance between the symbol's lock point and the parametric handle that controls the
dimension.
For more information, see Create a Parametric Symbol (on page 52).
1. Click Tools > Variables.
2. In the Formula column for the desired dimension in the table, type the variable of the
parameter handle that will determine the dimension. In the example shown below, the
parametric black box includes a formula that sets a minimum height of 0.25.
In this example, the height of the top half of the parametric box is determined by the formula
0.25 + Top/2. Therefore, since the initial value of the Top variable is 0.5, the value
calculated by the formula is also 0.5 (0.25 + 0.5/2). When the value of Top is zero, the
height of the box becomes 0.25 (0.25 + 0/0). As the value of Top increases above 0.5, the
height of the top half of the box increases by half of that value (Top/2).
Add Smart Text to Symbols

1. Open the symbol to which you want to add Smart Text.
2. On the Catalog Tools toolbar, click Smart Text .
3. In the Item box on the Smart Text Editor dialog box, select the type of item the new label
defines. Your selection in the Item box determines the location in the database where the
data originates.
4. In the Property box, select the type of item property the new label defines. The Property
box contains the name of the property or database column that the software retrieves from
the placed item.

5. Select the Short Value check box (if available) to display the short value defined in Data
Dictionary Manager. Only select-listed properties can be displayed in their short value form.
In a few cases, the short value is longer than the regular value. When creating a single line
drawing in SmartPlant Electrical even if the Short Value check box is selected, the regular
entry is returned and not the short value.
6. In the Format box, select the appropriate data format for the new label. The Format box
determines how the value appears.
Select Plant Default as the format if you want the data to be displayed in the
SmartPlant P&ID Properties window or the Engineering Data Editor using the default
format as specified in Options Manager for the format category. Select As Entered as the
format if you want the data to be displayed in the exact value precision (decimals) and in
whatever units (UOM) it was entered with.
7. If working with SmartPlant P&ID, select the Driving field box if you want the label to be a
driving label, which means the specified value will overwrite the existing value for the object
to which the label is attached in the drawing. Examples of driving labels include slope
direction and mechanical driving labels. If you do not check this field, the label becomes a
driven label, which allows users to specify the value when they place the label on a
drawing. Examples of driven labels include line number labels, equipment name, and so
forth.
8. If the Driving field check box is selected, in the Value box, specify a value for the selected
property.
9. Select the Visible box if you want the Smart Text to appear on the label.
10. Click the Insert Field button to view the Smart Text label.
11. Type any additional text you want to include in the label.
This additional text is not connected to the database.
 As you edit the Smart Text string, view the changes in the view window by clicking Apply.
 You can use the Text Font button to format Smart Text values or any additional text you
want to include on the label.
 You can also control the formatting of the label by right-clicking the label text box in the view
window, label tab, and selecting Properties on the shortcut menu.
 If you use a font that does not exist on all machines used to view the symbol, it could result
in undesirable font substitutions where the correct font is not installed.
Define Heat Tracing for New Symbols

1. In the Catalog Explorer Tree view, click the node to which you want to add a symbol with
heat tracing.
6. Type a unique name for the new symbol.

7. Double-click the new label to open the new symbol in the view window.
8. Set the symbol properties as needed.
9. Use the available drawing commands to add or edit any graphics. Use the red dot as the
origin of the symbol's coordinates.
10. Hold down the CTRL key and click the Heat Trace tab.
11. Use the available drawing commands to add heat trace graphics to the symbol.
If desired, you can specify a custom value for the offset distance of heat trace lines.
For details, see Modify the Offset Distance of Heat Trace Lines in the SmartPlant P&ID
Options Manager User's Guide.
Define Jacketing for New Symbols

1. In the Catalog Explorer Tree view, click the node to which you want to add a symbol with a
jacket layer.
6. Type a unique name for the new symbol.
7. Double-click the new label to open the new symbol in the view window.
8. Set the symbol properties as needed.
9. Use the available drawing commands to add or edit any graphics. Use the red dot as the
origin of the symbol's coordinates.
10. Hold down the CTRL key and click the Jacket tab.
11. Use the available drawing commands to add jacketing graphics to the symbol.
Define Icons for New Symbols

1. In the Catalog Explorer List view, right-click the symbol for which you want to define an
icon.
2. On the shortcut menu, click Clone to create a copy of the item.
3. Right-click the clone and on the shortcut menu, click Rename.
4. Type a unique name for the item.
5. Double-click the new item to open the symbol in the view window.
6. Click the Icon tab.
7. Use the drawing tools to draw the icon you want to associate with the item.

Any changes made to the symbol on the Graphics tab, instead of the Icon tab, are
automatically added to the icon unless you click on the Icon tab. Once you click the Icon tab,
only the graphics in the symbol placed up to that time are added. From then on, you can either
manually add graphics in on the Icon tab or you can delete all the icon graphics, thereby
causing all the graphics on the Graphics tab to be copied to the icon layer when the file is
exited and saved.
Modify Symbols
1. From the Catalog Explorer List view, double-click the symbol you want to edit.
2. Modify the symbol properties as needed.
3. Modify the symbol graphics as needed.
 Do not create customized symbols by editing delivered SmartPlant P&ID or SmartPlant

Electrical symbols. If the Reference Database is ever uninstalled and then reinstalled, all
edits to the delivered symbols are lost. If you want to use a delivered symbol as a basis for a
creating a new symbol, clone and rename any delivered symbol before editing.
match the graphics of the symbol as it currently exists in drawings. You will have to manually
edit each drawing and replace each changed symbol.
Display Symbol Connect Points

1. On the Catalog Tools toolbar, click Show Points .
 The software displays and highlights the connect points in the view window.
 Click on a connect point to see the points properties.
 By default, the software displays the connect points. If no connect points appear, then
the symbol does not contain any connect points.
2. If necessary, click Show Points again to turn off the connect point display.
When you save the symbol, the software turns off the highlighted connect points.

Place Symbol Connect Points

1. On the Catalog Tools toolbar, click Place Points .
2. From the Point type list select the type of connect point.
 For information on connect point types in SmartPlant Electrical, see Place Point Ribbon
(SmartPlant Electrical) (on page 67)
 For information on connect point types in P&ID, see Place Point Ribbon (P&ID) (on
page 66)
3. Click the symbol at the location where you want to add the connect point.
 The software displays a dynamic dashed line representing the connection of the new
connect point.
 The sequence number for the selected connection point type is automatically displayed
in the Number field.
4. Orient the dashed line to represent the appropriate connection angle for the new connect
point.
The angle value appears in the Connect angle field. You can also type the exact
angle value in this field.
5. After the connection angle is correct, click again to place the connect point.
 You can right-click during this procedure to reset the command.

 In SmartPlant P&ID the piping and instrument connect points must be collinear with the
origin of the symbol in order for the item, when placed in a drawing, to trim the pipe or
instrument line properly.
Edit Symbol Connect Points

1. Open the symbol in Catalog Manager.
2. Select an existing connect point with the Select Tool .

The software displays a dashed line representing the connection angle, and the
connect point properties appear in the Connect Point ribbon.
3. Type a new connection angle in the Connect angle field.

Creating Symbols Commands, Ribbons and Dialog Boxes

This section contains topics about the commands, ribbons, and dialog boxes used when
creating symbols in a drawing.
Place Label Ribbon

Sets options for displaying specific title block fields, as labels, on a specific symbol.
Label Set — Lists available label sets, select from this list the label set you require.
Field — Lists all fields for selected label set, select from this list the field you want displayed on
your symbol drawing. For details of label sets and fields used with SmartPlant P&ID, see Place
Label Ribbon - Options for SmartPlant P&ID (on page 64).
Function, Operator, and Range of Values — These fields are only available when the SPPID
Revision label set is selected, or when certain specific fields are selected from the Issue label
set.
Function Operator Range of values Description
Index = 1 or higher The index value represents the actual position

of the revision in the list. The first revision
created always has the lowest index (1),
therefore as you add more revisions, the same
index number displays the properties of
progressively newer revisions.
First + 0 or higher The function specifies the position of the

revision relative to the first (oldest) revision, for
example, 'First + 2' means two revisions later
than the first revision, that is, the third revision
in the current order. If you delete a revision,
the indexes of all later revisions to which the
property applies change accordingly.
Last - 0 or higher The function specifies the position of the

revision relative to the last (newest) revision, for
example, 'Last - 1' means the revision
immediately before the last revision. If you add
a revision, the indexes of all the other revisions
to which the property applies change
accordingly; if you delete a revision, the
indexes of all earlier revisions change.
Alternative Text Value — Type a text string that will appear if the software is unable to retrieve
a value for the selected property.

Display Label Names — Click to toggle the display between the macro source name and
the label name.
More — Click to display the Text Box ribbon, for more options used for formatting the label.
 The values for the selected fields are not displayed with the symbol in Catalog Manager;
only the alternate text is displayed. To display the values for the selected fields, place the
saved symbol in your P&ID drawing, save the drawing, then close and reopen the drawing to
view the label values.
 The Title Block ribbon only supports downward growth of the title block labels, it is however
possible to edit the label in the Catalog Manager SmartText Editor to achieve upward growth
of the title block labels. For more details, see Editing XML Data of Title Block Label (on
page 48).
 In some instances it may be necessary to close and reopen your drawing to populate some
of the fields.
Place Label Ribbon - Options for SmartPlant P&ID

Many of the label sets and fields that are available on the Place Label ribbon are used by the
common title blocks for SmartPlant Enterprise products other than SmartPlant P&ID, for
example, SmartPlant 3D and SmartPlant Foundation. This topic describes a number of labels
that relate specifically to SmartPlant P&ID or are otherwise particularly useful.
The following label sets are used for displaying SmartPlant P&ID properties:
 SPPID Drawing — Displays properties from the Drawing table of the SmartPlant P&ID Data
Dictionary, including any custom properties added by the user to the Drawing table. The
following list shows some examples of fields that appear in the Drawing table.
Field Description
Revision Drawing title block revision.
Version Drawing title block version.
Name Drawing name.
Description Drawing description.
Title Drawing title.
DateCreated Drawing creation date.
DrawingNumber Drawing number.
Template Template used by the drawing.

 SPPID Revision — Displays properties from the Revision table of the SmartPlant P&ID
Data Dictionary, including any custom properties added by the user to the Revision
table. When adding revision properties, you need to select one of the following functions:
Function Operator Range of values Description
Index = 1 or higher The index value represents the actual

position of the revision in the list. The
first revision created always has the
lowest index (1), therefore as you add
more revisions, the same index number
displays the properties of progressively
newer revisions.
First + 0 or higher The function specifies the position of

the revision relative to the first (oldest)
revision, for example, 'First + 2' means
two revisions later than the first revision,
that is, the third revision in the current
order. If you delete a revision, the
indexes of all later revisions to which
the property applies change
accordingly.
Last - 0 or higher The function specifies the position of

the revision relative to the last (newest)
revision, for example, 'Last - 1' means
the revision immediately before the last
revision. If you add a revision, the
indexes of all the other revisions to
which the property applies change
accordingly; if you delete a revision, the
indexes of all earlier revisions change.
 SPPID General — Allows you to select the DisplaySet field, which reads the active display
set. You can fill the display set value at print time. Note that you cannot add custom values
to the SPPID General category.
 Date and Time Stamp — You can create a label that displays the current date or time. To
do so, you select the <default> label set and then choose the Current Time or Current
Date field.
 Label Set — The fields Document Name, Full Document Name, and Last Modified refer
to the current document. The field Creation Date does not refer to the current document
and is not meaningful within SmartPlant P&ID or SmartPlant Electrical.
 Date and time displays use the current Windows format.


 In some instances it may be necessary to close and reopen your drawing to populate some
of the fields.
Place Point Command

Allows you to place connect points in the symbol that you are creating or editing.
 Use care when editing existing symbols. If you change the number or type of connect points
for symbols that have already been placed in drawings, you must manually edit each
drawing and replace each changed symbol.
Place Point Ribbon (P&ID)

The Place Point ribbon is available only after you click the Place Point command on the Catalog
Tools toolbar.
Point type — Select the type of connect point you want to add to the drawing sheet. Choose
from the following types of connect points. You can also change the type of an existing connect
point.
 Piping Points — Add these connect points to an equipment nozzle, piping component, or
inline instrument to connect a pipe run or another piping component, such as a nozzle and a
flange or a reducer and a valve.
 Ducting Points — Add these connect points to an equipment nozzle, ducting component,
or in-duct instrument to connect a duct run or another ducting component, such as a nozzle
and a flange or a reducer and a valve.
 Signal Points — Add these connect points to an equipment nozzle of an instrument
connector or an offline instrument to connect signal lines.
 Auxiliary Points — Add these connect points to piping components for placing of jacketed
nozzles on the piping component. Also these connection points can be added to inline
instruments or an off page connector. For inline instruments, an auxiliary connect point in the
middle of the component allows you to place an actuator on the instrument.
Connect angle — Indicates the angle at which the pipe run, duct run, piping or ducting
component, signal line, or actuator will attach to the component at that connect point. This field
is populated automatically when you create a connect point, but you can alter the value in this
field if necessary.
Number — Each connect point on a nozzle, piping component, ducting component, or
instrument is assigned a number at the time it was created. In this field you can see the number
assigned to an existing connect point or assign a new number to a new or existing connect
point.
The recommended order of priority for connection points in P&ID is first by type and
then by number. It is essential to follow this order when working in an integrated environment.

All the numbers must run consecutively, starting from one (1) for the first connection point with
no gaps in the numbering. In the example below, all four connection point types are required,
and two connection points of each type are defined.
Connection Point Numbering Sequence
Piping point 1
Piping point 2
Signal point 3
Signal point 4
Auxiliary point 5
Auxiliary point 6
Ducting point 7
Ducting point 8
Place Point Ribbon (SmartPlant Electrical)

The Place Point ribbon is available only after you click the Place Point command on the Catalog
Tools toolbar.
Point type — Select the type of connect point you want to add to the symbol. There are five
types of connect points available for SmartPlant Electrical symbols. You can also change the
type of an existing connect point.
 Connect Points — These connect points are used to connect regular power connections
between equipment on SLDs, CBDs and other drawings.
 Wiring Points — These connect points are used for wiring terminations.
 Auxiliary Points — These connection points are used to show connections not covered by
the connect, wiring, and non-power connect points.
 Non-Power Connection Points — These connect points are used for connecting control
cables, instrument cables, and other non-power cable.
 Jumper Point — These connect points are used for connecting jumpers between terminals.
Connect angle — Indicates the angle at which the connector will attach to the equipment at the
connect point. This field is populated automatically when you create a connect point, but you
can alter the value in this field if necessary.
Number — Each connection point is assigned a number at the time it was created. In this field
you can see the number assigned to an existing connect point or assign a new number to a new
or existing connect point.
The connection point's priority is set first by type and then by side, with the numbers
running in sequence per type per side. The numbering starts from one and there must be no
gaps in the numbering sequence.

Side 1 (electricity flows Numbering Side 2 (electricity flows Numbering

'From') 'To')
Type=Connect Point 1, 2, 3, 4... Type=Connect Point 1, 2, 3, 4...
Type=Wiring 1, 2, 3, 4... Type=Wiring 1, 2, 3, 4...
Type=Auxiliary 1, 2, 3, 4... Type=Auxiliary 1, 2, 3, 4...
Type=Non-Power Connect 1, 2, 3, 4... Type=Non-Power Connect 1, 2, 3, 4...

Point Point
Connect Points Numbering Sequence Dialog Box

Displays an error message when the software discovers a problem with the connect point
numbering sequence.
Sequence numbers are not unique — The numbers given to each connect point must be
unique, there can be no connect points with the same number.
Sequence numbers are not consecutive — The connect point numbers must run in a
consecutive order, there can be no missing numbers in the order.
Sequence numbers not assigned in accordance with the connection point type — The
connection point numbers must run in a consecutive order and according to the priority of the
connection point type. Each connection point type must have a group of numbers that run
consecutively, with the lowest numbers associated with the highest priority connect point type,
the next group with the lesser priority connect point type, and the highest group of numbers
associated to the lowest priority connect point type. The connect point numbers must form one
consecutive string of number with no duplicate numbers.
Show Points Command

Turns the display of bolded connect points on or off. The software does not save bolding
when you save the symbol.
Title Block Field Command (Insert Menu)

Opens the Place Label Ribbon (on page 63), which allows you to insert dynamic title block
labels into your document. These labels use XML code and provide a means of retrieving
updatable data such as revision numbers.
The Title Block Field command is available on the Insert menu by default, but you must
use the Customize command to place it on a toolbar.

Editing Symbols
A complete set of tools are supplied with SmartPlant Catalog Manager to edit your symbols.
After opening the symbol you want to edit, various toolbars and ribbons become available.
These tools allow you to change the look of your symbol by adding or removing elements, by
rotating, mirroring, or resizing the symbol, and so forth.
You can also edit drawings created in MicroStation (.cel or .dgn) and AutoCAD (.dwg or .dxf)
and then save them in their original format or as a Catalog Manager symbol (.sym) file.
See Also
Creating Symbols (on page 42)
Working with CAD Drawings (on page 383)
Edit a Symbol
1. In the Catalog Explorer locate the symbol you want to edit.
2. Do one of the following to open the symbol:
 Double-click on the symbol.
 Right-click, and on the shortcut menu, click Open.
3. Edit the symbol using the various tools on the toolbars.
5. Select File > Close.
If you did not save your changes, the software prompts you to save when you close the
symbol.
Edit Symbol Properties

1. From the Catalog Explorer List view, double-click to open the symbol you want to modify.
2. Select the appropriate property box.
If the Properties window is not visible, select View >Toolbars > Properties.
3. Edit or add a value for that property.
Be sure that Itemtype matches the PlantItemType property for the item. Such a
mismatch can result in data loss in the plant structure.
 After you edit a value, the software displays the value in a bold font to indicate that you have
changed the value.
even though the symbol is open. To see the entire properties list, click the symbol page
again or select the open symbol from the Window menu. You can view the short list of

Mirroring Symbols
Use the Mirror command to create a mirror image of your symbol. You can create mirror
images both horizontally and vertically. After selecting a center line for the X and Y axis
appears in the center of the symbol, when you move the cursor over the center line, the mirrored
symbol is displayed dynamically on the other side of the axis.
Mirror a Symbol
You can mirror symbols by defining a mirror axis or by using a linear element as a mirror axis.
You can also mirror and copy symbols.
To mirror about an existing mirror axis

1. Right-click, and on the shortcut menu, click Select All to select all the elements of the
symbol.
2. On the Change toolbar, click Mirror.
 Click Copy if you want to copy the symbol to the mirrored position.
3. Locate a mirror axis. The mirrored symbol is displayed dynamically on the other side of the
axis.
4. Position the pointer so that the mirrored symbol is where you want, and then click.
 If you selected Copy then the copied symbol is placed at the marked
position.
To mirror about a mirror axis that you define

1. Right-click, and on the shortcut menu, click Select All to select all the elements of the
symbol.
 Click Copy if you want to copy the symbol to the mirrored position.
3. Define one end of the mirror axis by clicking in free space. The software displays the mirror
axis and mirrored symbol dynamically.

4. Move the pointer until the mirror axis and the mirrored symbol are where you want them to
be, then click.
 If you selected Copy then the copied symbol is placed at the marked position.
 If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places a symmetric relationship when you
mirror and copy elements. The mirror axis is used as the symmetry axis.
 Relationships within the selection set are copied to the mirrored elements if they are still
applicable.
 You can click Mirror before you select elements to mirror.
 Instead of positioning the mirror axis dynamically, you can use the Position Angle box on
the ribbon.
 You can use other view manipulation commands, such as Zoom and Pan, while you are
using Mirror.
See also
Rotating Symbols
The Rotate command, allows you to rotate a symbol a precise distance or angle about a
specified point. You can rotate and copy at the same time thus making a new symbol based on
the original symbol. The Rotate ribbon allows you to set a step angle, specifying the increments
in degrees that the symbol rotates from a temporary axis. The ribbon also displays the number
of degrees the symbol has been rotated and the position angle.
Rotate a Symbol
1. Right-click, and on the shortcut menu, click Select All to select all the elements of your
symbol.
2. On the Change toolbar, click Rotate .

3. Click where you want the center of rotation to be. The software dynamically displays a
reference axis for the rotation.
4. Click to define the other end of the reference axis. The software dynamically displays the
rotation axis and the symbol being rotated. The location and position of the reference axis
defines the rotation 'from' point.
5. Position the symbol where you want and then click to define the rotation 'to' point.
 To rotate by increments, type a value in the Step Angle box on the ribbon.
 You can click Rotate before you select elements to rotate.
using Rotate.
 When you finish manipulating the view, the software returns you to Rotate at the point
where you left off.

See also
Viewing the XML Symbol Structure

Catalog Manager allows you to view symbol or assembly structures. The symbol structure
shows the assembly symbols, their sequence in-group, file name and path in a tree-view
pattern. You can expand and collapse the tree view. The symbol structure specifies the
symbols within the assembly.
 Catalog Manager displays the symbol structure of an assembly only for symbols associated
with SmartPlant Electrical.
 The symbol structure does not show any other drawing objects, just symbols.
View XML Symbol Structure

1. In Catalog Manager, open the desired symbol.
3. On the Custom Command dialog box, browse to SmartPlant
Engineering\Program\CMSymbolStructure413.dll, and click Open.
On the Symbol file pane, the path of the selected symbol should appear. Click
Browse if you want to select a different symbol.
4. On the Xml Symbol Structure dialog box, click Generate

SECTION 3
Working with Labels

Technical drawings often have many labels that display important information about the objects
or elements in the document. The text and graphical information in labels completes the drawing
and constitutes its intelligence to the reviewer.
The textual part of a label is attribute data from the database and is defined using the Smart
Text Editor. Defining text this way makes labels containing this text a true reflection of the
information in the database. To help you maintain this data, you can also add and modify
information as you place labels in the drawing.
Label Types
Driving and Driven Labels
Every label is either a driving label or a driven label. A driving label specifically defines the
properties of a symbol. For example, if you associate an electric driver motor label with a pump
symbol and the motor label is a driving label, the pump becomes an electric driven pump.
Driven labels simply display information about the object with which they are associated. For
example, placing a nominal diameter label on a gate valve displays the size of the valve, but
does not change any properties of the valve. The majority of labels in the SmartPlant products
are defined as driven labels.
To define whether a label is driving or driven, select the Driving Field option on the Smart Text
Editor dialog box. You can clear this option to create a driven label. For more information, see
Smart Text Editor Dialog Box (on page 84).
Visible and Hidden Labels

Visible labels are visually represented in a drawing, such as a line number label. The majority of
labels in the SmartPlant products are visible. To define a visible label, use the Label layer in
Catalog Manager. For more information, see View Window (on page 24).
Hidden labels are not visible in drawings, but can be used to define specific properties for items
when you place the label. For example, the slope label is a driving label that sets the slope of a
piping segment. The slope label has graphics and some text, but the text in the label does not
set the property of the line. Instead, a hidden label is defined on the Hidden Objects layer to set
the slope property of the line to a certain value when you place the label.
Embedded Labels
Embedded Labels use a combination of information defined on the Graphics, Label, and
perhaps the Hidden Objects layers in the View window. Symbols that contain embedded labels
have both graphics and labels defined for them before they are placed in a drawing. When you
place a symbol with an embedded label, the label updates automatically. For example, the
off-line instruments with implied components (analyze, flow, level, pressure) are made up of
both graphics and embedded labels.

Working with Labels
Label Properties and Guidelines

A label is defined in the catalog by a symbol definition. At placement time the symbol is
converted into a Smart Label. A label symbol usually contains one or more Smart Text objects
and may also contain other graphical elements. The property values assigned to the symbol
define what type of label it will be and how it will behave.
Is Leader Visible — Set this to True if you want the label to be placed with a leader line. For
special cases, you can always turn the leader line on or off using the shortcut menu on the label.
Label Behavior — Defines if and how the label moves when the labeled item is moved. Fixed
means that the label does not move. Follow means that the label is transformed exactly the
same as the labeled item. Follow (no rotate) means that the label is moved, but not rotated.
Label Type — (Required) Every label must have this property set. Available label types include
Component, Title Block, Flow Arrow, and Attribute Break (also referred to as Segment
Break labels).
Labeled Item Type — (Required) Every label must have this property set. You set the value
for this property using the Set Item Type command.
Leader Style — Enter the name of the line style to be used for the leader line. This line style
must be an existing style in the plant style file.
Offset Distance — Defines the distance by which the label should be offset from the labeled
item. Only used with One Point placement when the Offset Source is set to Local.
Offset Source — Define whether an offset is to be used for One Point placement, and, if so,
where the offset should come from. None means no offset. Local means use the offset distance
defined for this label. Plant Settings means use the offset distance defined in Options Manager.
Placement Type — (Required) You must select either One Point or Two Point placement. If
you select One Point, the placement command automatically positions the label at an offset
from the given point. This is typically used for line labels. If you select Two Point, the placement
command allows you to reposition the label after identifying the item to be labeled with the first
click.

Working with Labels
Terminator Style — Choose from the following styles the type of terminator to be used at the
end of the leader line: None, Solid Arrow, Solid Dot, Arrow, Ellipse, and Use Default. If you
select Use Default, the terminator style defined in Options Manager is used.
Special Case Guidelines

 Title Block Labels — A special type of label used to display properties of the drawing itself.
Use the following recommended property values for title block labels.
Property Value
Label Type Title Block
Labeled Item Type Drawing
Placement Type One Point
Label Behavior Fixed
 Flow Arrows — A special type of label used to indicate the flow direction in a pipe. The flow
arrow symbol must be built so that it is pointing along the positive x-axis and the origin must
be at the tip of the arrow. Placing Smart Text in a flow arrow label is not necessary. Use the
following recommended property values for flow arrow labels.
Property Value
Label Type Flow Arrow
Labeled Item Type Pipe Run
Placement Type One Point
Label Behavior Follow
 Segment Breaks (Attribute Breaks) — A special type of label used to suppress an

inconsistency at the end point of a piping segment. Smart Text fields within the label define
the properties for which the inconsistencies are to be suppressed. If you do not want the text
to be visible, you can make it hidden text. A typical set of label properties for a segment
break is shown below.
Property Value
Label Type Attribute Break
Labeled Item Type Pipe Run
Placement Type Two Point
Label Behavior Follow (no rotate)
 Line Labels — This common type of label used for labeling pipes consists of a single Smart
Text object. When the placement command sees this type of label, it does some special

Working with Labels
work to place the text box at the desired offset from the line. To accomplish this, set the
vertical justification property on the text box at placement time. To get a good dynamic
display during placement, we recommend that you set the Vertical Justification property on
the text box to Center.
 Component Labels — For labels that are to be placed on components, we recommend that
you comply with the following guidelines during label creation to avoid undesirable results
that may occur when drawings are re-created:
 Create separate component labels for placement on horizontal and vertical objects.
 If you want to pre-rotate a text box for a label, rotate it -90 degree rather than +90
degree, so that when the label is placed on vertical objects, it will be left-aligned and will
grow towards the right if a value is assigned after placement.
 Do not combine mirror and rotate operations on a symbol for a label. This means that if
a label needs to be rotated, then do not further mirror it; if a label needs to be mirrored,
do not further rotate it.
 If you do need to mirror and rotate a symbol, make sure that the text box is center
aligned and justified.
Create a Label
1. In the Catalog Explorer Tree view, click the symbol node to which you want to add a label
symbol.
2. In the List view for the selected node, right-click and on the shortcut menu click New Item.
3. On the new item, right-click and on the shortcut menu click Rename.
4. Type a unique name for the new label.
5. Double-click the new label to open the new symbol in Catalog Manager.
6. In the Properties pane from the Item Type list, select Label: Catalog Item.
7. On the Catalog toolbar, click Set Item Type , and set the item type for the new label.
8. Use the available drawing commands to add or edit any graphics for the new label.
9. On the Catalog toolbar, click Smart Text Editor , and add the required text for the label.
10. In the Properties window, define properties for the label.
The Disable Flip Text property allows you to rotate or orient text for readability. By
default, the software displays text in a readable manner and will not allow it to display upside
down. For example, if you move a label in a direction that would affect the readability of the
text, the software automatically flips the text so that it can still be read. Set this property to
True to disable this option and allow the text to display upside down if needed.
11. Click Save to save the new label.
 To change the text or value of the label based on properties of its associated item in P&ID
drawings, define Smart Text for the new label.
 To view the graphics and label for the new label at the same time, click the Graphics tab,
and then click the Label tab while holding down the CTRL key.

Working with Labels
 Right-click the label in the Catalog Manager Design window and select Properties to edit
label properties such as justification, margins, underlining, alignment, borders, and so on.
Create a Text Label

1. Open the symbol to which you want to add text.
2. Click on the draw toolbar.

3. From the Text Box ribbon, select the font, size, and any other required properties.
You can also make these selections after typing the text.
4. On the symbol do one of the following:
 Click and drag the cursor where you want to place the text box.
 Move the cursor to where you want your text label, and click
You can also move and resize the text box after completing the label.
5. A flashing cursor appears, type the text for your message.
6. When you have finished typing, do one of the following:
 If you want to add another label, right-click and then repeat this procedure from step 3.
 If you do not want to add another label, click to close the Text tool.
See also
Text Box Ribbon (on page 330)
Edit Text in a Text Label

1. Double-click on the text box, the cursor starts blinking at the insertion point of the text.
To move the insertion point, click on the text box where you want the insertion point.
You can also use the Arrow keys to move the insertion point.
2. Type the new text.
3. Click out of the text box.
You can use the tools on the Text Box toolbar to change the formatting of the text.
Move a Label
1. Click .
2. Click and drag the text box to a new location.

Working with Labels
Create a Property Break

1. Use Filter Manager to create a special pipe run, duct run, or signal run filter that includes the
properties to be broken as criteria in the filter.
 The value for each property and comparison operator in the filter is not important.
 For each Property added to the filter, a relationship must exist between the piping
points (or ducting points) of the component and the pipe run (or duct run) in Rule
Manager. If they do not exist, add them to the Consistency tab of the Piping Comp to
Process Pipe Run rule.
 If you cannot find the required property for the item type, add it using the Data
Dictionary Manager. For more information consult the Defining Item Type Properties
section in the Data Dictionary Manager User's Guide.
2. Open the component symbol in Catalog Manager.
3. Click the Property Breaks command on the Catalog Tools toolbar.
4. Browse to and select the filter you defined in step 1.
5. Check the Set the Is Reducing property option if you want the IsReducing property set for
this component.
6. Click OK on the Property Breaks dialog box.
7. Save the symbol and close Catalog Manager.
8. Place the new break component in your drawing.
Placing a property break component is identical to the placement of any other
component. When you place a property break component into a pipe run, duct run, or signal
run, the run is automatically broken (just as a reducer currently breaks the run).
If you place a catalog item in a drawing and then change its definition to be a break
component, you may encounter problems with certain commands in SmartPlant P&ID. For
example, the Replace command does not allow a non-breaking component to be replaced with
a break component. The Update Drawings command relies on the Replace command to
replace out-of-date symbols. Therefore, Update Drawings does not update any symbol whose
definition has been changed into a break component.
Add Smart Text to Labels

1. Open the symbol to which you want to add Smart Text.
2. On the View window, click the Label tab.
3. Click Smart Text .
4. In the Item box on the Smart Text Editor dialog box, select the item that will be defined by
the label.
5. In the Property box, click the property from the Item that will be defined by the label.

Working with Labels
6. Select the Short Value check box (if available) to display the short value defined in Data
Dictionary Manager. Only select-listed properties can be displayed in their short value
form. In a few cases, the short value is longer than the regular value. When creating a
single line drawing in SmartPlant Electrical even if the Short Value check box is selected,
the regular entry is returned and not the short value.
7. In the Format box, specify the appropriate data format.
8. If working with SmartPlant P&ID do the following, check the Driving field box if you want
the label to be a driving label, which means the specified value will overwrite the existing
value for the object to which the label is attached in the drawing. Examples of driving
labels include slope direction and mechanical driving labels. If you do not check this field,
the label becomes a driven label, which allows users to specify the value when they place
the label on a drawing. Examples of driven labels include line number labels, equipment
name, and so forth.
9. If the Driving field check box is selected, in the Value box specify a value for the Property.
10. Select the Visible box if you want the Smart Text to appear on the label when the label is
placed in a drawing.
11. Type any additional text you want to include in the label.
12. Click the Insert Field button to view the Smart Text label.
 As you edit the Smart Text string, you can view the changes in the View window by clicking
Apply.
 You can use the Text Font button to choose the font of the Smart Text values or any
additional text you want to include on the label (this feature does not function with Title Block
labels).
 Using a font that does not exist on all machines used to view the symbol, could result in
undesirable font substitutions where the correct font is not installed.
 When creating a title block label containing labels for both the long and short values of a
select list property, you must create the label containing the short value first and then the
label containing the long value.
Edit Smart Text

1. Select the Smart Text string you want to edit.
2. On the Catalog Tools toolbar, click Smart Text .
3. On the Smart Text dialog box, edit the existing or add Smart Text fields.
4. If necessary, drag the resulting text string to reposition it in the Catalog Manager View
window.
5. Click Apply to place the Smart Text string.
6. Click OK to complete your editing session.

Working with Labels
Paste Unicode Characters into Smart Text Editor

1. Click Tools > Character Map.
2. Click the Unicode character you want to place, and then click the Select button.
3. Click the Copy button to copy the character to the Clipboard.
4. In the Smart Text Editor dialog box, place the cursor in the Text box where you want the
Unicode character to go.
5. Press CTRL + V to paste the character. Do not use Edit > Paste.
Set an Item Type for a Label

1. In Catalog Explorer, locate the desired label.
2. Open the label by doing one of the following;
 Double-click the label.
 Right-click the label and on the shortcut menu, click Open.
3. From the list box at the top of the Properties list, select Label: Catalog Item.

Working with Labels
4. Click the Set Item Type command on the Catalog Tools toolbar.
5. On the Set Item Type dialog box, select the type of item for the label.
Labels Commands and Dialog Boxes

This section contains topics about the commands and dialog boxes used when working with
labels in a drawing.
Property Breaks Command

Displays the Property Breaks dialog box, allowing you to define a catalog item as a break
component, which allows properties to be different on the two sides of that item, suppresses the
consistency checking, and limits the propagation of the properties that are broken. For example,
reducers break the nominal diameter property, and pressure relief devices break the pressure
property. A component can break properties of the connected runs.
Currently, only the PipingComp, Instrument, and Nozzle items types can be defined as
property breaks.
To create a break component, you must first create a special pipe run or signal run filter that
includes the properties to be broken as criteria in the filter. The value and comparison operator
for each property in the filter is not important. After creating this filter, open the component
symbol in Catalog Manager and use the Property Breaks command to select the filter. When
the resulting break component is placed into a drawing, it breaks the pipe run (or signal run) it is
placed into. When a broken property value is changed on either side of the component, the
break component limits the propagation of the changed value. For more information about
consistency checking, properties, update drawing, and system editing, see the SmartPlant P&ID
User's Guide.
 Changes in filter definitions are not automatically detected when those filters are used by
break components. Also, the Update Drawing process does not update a symbol when the
property definition of the symbol changes. For example, when you assign a filter to a symbol
as part of creating a break component, the definition of what properties are being broken are
assigned to the symbol at that time. If you later change the filter definition (even if you
change only a property), changing the filter does not change the nature of that symbol. To
have the filter changes reflected in the drawings, you must edit the symbol in Catalog
Manager so that it must be saved. Once the symbol is saved, it is flagged as out-of-date in
SmartPlant P&ID, allowing the Update Drawing process to make the changes.
 If you place a catalog item in a drawing and then change its definition to be a break
component, you may encounter problems with certain commands in SmartPlant P&ID. For
example, the Replace command does not allow a non-breaking component to be replaced
with a break component. The Update Drawings command relies on the Replace command
to replace out-of-date symbols. Therefore, Update Drawings does not update any symbol
whose definition has been changed into a break component.
 The IsReducing property still works like it always has in that setting the IsReducing property
to True causes the symbol to be a break component for Nominal Diameter. To create a
break component for any other property, you must create a filter as described above.

Working with Labels
Property Breaks Dialog Box

Allows you to define a catalog item as a break component, which suppresses the consistency
checking and limits the propagation of the properties that are broken.
Before using this dialog box, you must create a special filter that applies to pipe runs or duct
runs and includes the properties to be broken as criteria in the filter. You then select this filter
using this dialog box.
Set the Is Reducing property — Select this option if you want this component to break the
Nominal Diameter property.
Property break filter — Select the pipe run, duct run, or signal run filter that specifies the list of
properties to be broken by this component.
Browse — Opens the Select Filter dialog box, allowing you to browse to the pipe run or signal
run filter that you want to apply to component definition.
OK — Closes the dialog box and sets the value of the IsReducing, PropertyBreakFilter, and
PropertyBreakRevID properties for the component.
 For each Property added to the filter, a relationship must exist between the piping points of
the component and the pipe run in Rule Manager. If they do not exist, add them to the
Consistency tab of the Piping Comp to Process Pipe Run rule.
 If you cannot find the required property for the item type, add it using the Data Dictionary
Manager. For more information consult the Defining Item Type Properties section in the
Data Dictionary Manager User Guide or Online Help.
Select Filter Dialog Box

Allows you to define options for items using definitions associated with a filter. Using this dialog
box, you can create a new filter or modify an existing filter. In SmartPlant P&ID Options
Manager, this dialog box appears when you define options for a new symbology or gapping
priorities.

Working with Labels
New — Displays the New Filter dialog box, which allows you to specify a new simple or
compound filter.
Properties — Allows you to edit the properties of the selected filter. This button displays the
Filter Properties dialog box or the Compound Filter Properties dialog box, depending on your
selection in the filter list. If you create a compound filter, select the individual simple filters that
comprise a compound filter, and click Properties to view the Filter Properties dialog box for
those simple filters.
Set Item Type Command

Allows you to set the item type for labels you create with Catalog Manager.
This command appears on the Catalog Tools toolbar and is available only when you
select Label: Catalog Item from the list box at the top of the Properties list.
Set Item Type Dialog Box

Allows you to set an item type for labels created with Catalog Manager. This dialog box opens
when you click the Set Item Type command on the Catalog Tools toolbar for a symbol that
represents a label.
Item type for label — Allows you to select the item type for the new label that you created.
Smart Text Command

Displays the Smart Text Editor dialog box, which allows you to create intelligent labels by
building the labels from fields of information that the software fills in automatically when you
place the label in your drawing.

Working with Labels
Smart Text Editor Dialog Box

Allows you to create intelligent labels. You build the labels from static text and from fields of
information that the software fills in automatically when you place the label in your drawing.
Item — Select the type of item you want to label from the list.
Property — Select the property you want to add to the label from the list.
Short value — Check this option to display the short value defined in Data Dictionary Manager.
Only select-listed properties can be displayed in their short value form. In a few cases, the short
value is longer than the regular value.
Format — Select the format you want to apply to the selected property from the list.
Select Plant Default as the format if you want the data to be displayed in the SmartPlant
P&ID Properties window or the Engineering Data Editor using the default format as specified
in Options Manager for the format category. Select As Entered as the format if you want the
data to be displayed in the exact value precision (decimals) and in whatever units (UOM) it was
entered with.
Value — Type the value you want to associate with the selected property. This field is available
only when the Driving field option is checked.
Driving field (only available in P&ID) — Check this option if you want the label to be a driving
label, which means the specified value will overwrite the existing value for the object to which
the label is attached in the drawing. Examples of driving labels include slope direction and
mechanical driving labels. If you do not check this field, the label becomes a driven label, which

Working with Labels
allows users to specify the value when they place the label on a drawing. Examples of driven
labels include line number labels, equipment name, and so forth. For more information, see
Label Types (on page 73).
Insert field — Click to add the Smart Text field to the label.
Text — Displays the Smart Text label as you create it. An <F> tag comes before each property
definition, and a </F> tag ends each property definition. Click Apply to see your latest changes.
Visible — Check this option to display the field in the drawing when you place the label. If you
do not check this option, you cannot see this label value when it is placed on a drawing. These
hidden values are located on the Hidden Objects layer.
Text Font — Displays the Font dialog box, allowing you to change the font of the selected text.
Ignore font size in preview — Displays the entered text, in the Text pane, in a font size that
can be easily read without altering the font size set in the Font Properties dialog box. Use this
feature when using very large or small font sizes.
 If you use a font that does not exist on all machines used to view the symbol, undesirable
font substitutions could result where the correct font is not installed.
 For information about how to copy and paste symbols from the Character Map, see Paste
Unicode Characters into Smart Text Editor (on page 80).

Working with Labels

SECTION 4
Using the Line Style Editor

The Line Style Editor allows you to create and modify point styles, linear patterns, and linear
styles through a user-friendly interface. You can create custom styles based on existing ones,
modify the properties of existing styles, or delete styles that are not used or referenced by
others.
Linear patterns and styles are defined by a series of strokes, called a stroke sequence. Each
stroke appears either as a dash or a gap; however, point styles may be added to the stroke
when necessary. The strokes, when used together in a stroke sequence, are placed in locations
indicated by a stroke index, a number indicating the order in which the individual strokes appear
in the sequence.
The Line Style Editor appears as a frame in the Catalog Manager window. The Line Style
Editor toolbar appears at the top of the frame. A tree window displays line styles defined for the
active document or within any applicable resource files, and a preview window at the bottom of
the frame provides a graphic representation of selected styles.
If the Line Style Editor is not installed, follow the steps in the topic Install the Line Style
Editor (on page 88); if the Line Style Editor is installed but not displayed, right-click anywhere in
the toolbar area and on the shortcut menu, click Line Style Editor.
Using the Line Style Editor, you can create the following custom tools, which are saved within
the active symbol (.sym) file.
Point Styles — Holds graphical images used periodically throughout a line or as a terminator at
the beginning or end of a line. Examples of common point styles might include arrowheads used
at one end of a line or symbols drawn over a line to indicate what the line represents.
Linear Patterns — Adds point styles, if applicable, to a series of dashes and gaps (strokes).
When defining a linear pattern, you set both, the order in which dashes, gaps, and point styles
appear, and the position of the point styles relative to the stroke.
Linear Styles — Provides point styles and linear patterns in a format that can be used in
drawings. When you define a linear style, you provide width and color to linear patterns so they
can be applied to linear geometry.
If you are using a Workshare environment, point styles, linear patterns, and linear styles
should not be created at a satellite site.

Install the Line Style Editor

1. In SmartPlant Catalog Manager, open a symbol.
2. Click Tools > Add-Ins.
3. On the Add-In Manager dialog box, use the Browse button to navigate to Program Files /
Program Files (x86) > SmartPlant > Engineering Manager > Bin and select the
igrSEAddin420.dll file.
4. Select the Line Style Editor check box and click OK.
After browsing for the file and selecting this option one time, Add-In Manager
remembers the location of the file and the Line Style Editor becomes available for displaying
in Catalog Manager.
5. To open the Line Style Editor window, right-click anywhere in the toolbar area and on the
shortcut menu, click Line Style Editor.
Creating a Customized Line Style

Customized line styles can be used for any number of purposes when creating symbols or
drawings. In this sample workflow you will use the Line Style Editor to create a customized linear
style that represents a buried pipe line, similar to the illustration.

Create a Customized Line Style

1. On the Draw toolbar, click .
2. Click on the drawing sheet and type the letter B. This text will become part of the new point
style.

 Click on the text box and select Edit > Properties.
 Right-click on the text box, and on the shortcut menu, click Properties.
4. On the Text Box Properties dialog box, click the Info tab.
5. Change the Justification for both the Horizontal and Vertical options to Shape Center.
Each occurrence of the letter "B" will be centered horizontally and vertically in the new line
style.

Create a Point Style

1. On the Line Style Editor do one of the following:
 Click Point Styles, and then click

 Right-click Point Styles, and on the shortcut menu, click Add Style.
2. On the Create New Point Style dialog box, type the name for the point style. For example
BuriedPipe.
3. On the Point Style Properties dialog box, in the Notes field type Buried Pipe Point Style.
4. Click OK. The BuriedPipe style appears in the Point Styles list.
5. On the drawing sheet, select the letter "B", and then click on the Line Style Editor
toolbar.
6. Click on the "B" to place the origin of the point style.

Create a Style for a Linear Pattern

1. On the Line Style Editor, do one of the following:
 Click Linear Patterns, and then click .

 Right-click Linear Patterns, and on the shortcut menu, click Add Style.
2. On the Create New Linear Pattern dialog box, in the Style name field, type a name for the
linear pattern. For example BuriedPipe.
3. On the Linear Properties dialog box, in the Notes field, type BuriedPipe.
4. Under Stroke sequence definitions, in the Stroke index, select 1.

5. Set the Dash length to 0.50 in.
6. In the Stroke index, select 2.

7. Set the Gap length to 0.25 in.
8. Under Point style, from the Name list, select BuriedPipe.
9. In the Position along stroke box, type 50.

10. In the Orientation list, select Always up.
As you define properties for the new linear pattern, the results are displayed in the
Preview pane.
11. Click OK. BuriedPipe appears in the Linear Patterns list.

Create a Style for a Linear Style

1. On the Line Style Editor, do one of the following:
 Click Linear Styles and then click .

 Right-click Linear Styles, and on the shortcut menu, click Add Style.
2. On the Create New Linear Style dialog box, in the Style name field, type a name for the
linear pattern. For example BuriedPipe.
3. In the Linear Style Properties dialog box, in the Note field, type Buried Pipe Linear Style
Property.
4. Under Component definitions, from the Color selection palette, select a color. For
example, red.

5. From the Linear pattern list, select BuriedPipe.

6. Click OK. The entry for BuriedPipe appears in the Linear Styles list.

Test a New Linear Style

1. On the Draw toolbar, click .
2. On the Line ribbon, from the Style list, select BuriedPipe.
3. Draw a line on the drawing sheet. The drawn line should look similar to this:
Line Style Editor Toolbar

The following commands are available on the toolbar at the top of the Line Style Editor.
Editor (on page 88); if the Line Style Editor is installed but not displayed, right-click anywhere in
the toolbar area and on the shortcut menu, click Line Style Editor.
Create New Style — Creates a new point style, linear pattern, or linear style. Depending on
what you have selected in the tree window of the Line Style Editor, clicking this button will open
either the Create New Point Style, Create New Linear Pattern Style, or Create New Linear
Style dialog box, which you use to define a new style.
Copy Style — Creates a copy of the style selected in the tree window of the Line Style
Editor.
Import Style — Imports a selected style into the active document. This command is
available only when you have selected a style object in a resource file.
Delete Style — Removes the selected style from the active document only if the style is not
in use or referenced by another style as a base style or as a component of another style.
Properties — Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected style.
Place Point Style Graphics — Places the selected point style graphic into the active
drawing so that it can be modified using the standard drawing tools. This command is available
only if you have selected a point style in the tree.

Define Point Style Graphics — Defines the graphic for a point style from ordinary graphics
in the active drawing. This command is available only when you have selected a point style in
the tree and one or more objects are selected in the drawing.
Show Styles in Resource Files — Displays or hides styles from attached styles resource
files in the tree window. Resource files are attached to a file using the host application.
Styles that appear bolded in the tree are styles currently saved in the active document,
while non-bolded styles are located in resource files.
Create Custom Point Styles

1. On the tree in the Line Style Editor, select Point Styles.
Editor (on page 88); if the Line Style Editor is installed but not displayed, right-click
anywhere in the toolbar area and on the shortcut menu, click Line Style Editor.
2. On the Line Style Editor Toolbar, click Create New Style .

3. Name the new point style and add any applicable notes on the Point Style Properties
dialog box.
4. Draw the image for the new point style in the drawing sheet.
5. Select the image using the Draw > Select Tool command.
6. On the Line Style Editor toolbar, click Define Point Style Graphics.
7. Click on the image to place the origin of the point style.
 You can also access the Create New Point Style dialog box by right-clicking on Point
Styles in the Line Style Editor tree and clicking Add Style.
 Use the Redefine Point Styles (on page 100) procedure to define a new image for the point
style or to reset the origin of the point style.
Create Custom Linear Patterns

1. In the tree in the Line Style Editor, select Linear Patterns.
2. Click Create New Style on the Line Style Editor Toolbar.

3. On the Create New Linear Pattern dialog box, name the new linear pattern.
4. If applicable, select the existing linear pattern on which the new one should be based, and
click OK.
5. Configure the settings on the Linear Pattern Properties dialog box as necessary.

You can also access the Create New Linear Pattern dialog box by right-clicking on
Linear Patterns in the Line Style Editor tree and clicking Add Style.
Create Custom Linear Styles

1. In the tree in the Line Style Editor, select Linear Styles.
2. Click Create New Style on the Line Style Editor Toolbar.

3. On the Create New Linear Style dialog box, name the new linear style.
4. If applicable, select the existing linear style on which the new one should be based, and
click OK.
5. Configure the settings on the Linear Style Properties dialog box as necessary.
You can also access the Create New Linear Style by right-clicking on Linear Styles in
the Line Style Editor tree and clicking Add Style.
Copy Point Styles, Linear Styles, or Linear Patterns

1. On the tree in the Line Style Editor, select the point style, linear style, or linear pattern that
you want to copy.
2. Click Copy Style on the Line Style Editor Toolbar.

3. Name the new item on the dialog box that appears, either the Copy Point Style Dialog Box
(on page 102), the Copy Linear Pattern Dialog Box (on page 101), or the Copy Linear Style
Dialog Box (on page 101).
4. Modify attributes of the new styles on the applicable Properties dialog box that appears.
Import Point Styles, Linear Patterns, and Linear

Styles
1. Find the line style you want to import from a resource file, and select it in the tree in the Line
Style Editor.
If styles in resource files are not displayed in the tree, click Show Resource File
Styles on the Line Style Editor Toolbar.
2. Click Import Style on the Line Style Editor toolbar. The software copies the style
from the resource file into the active document.

Styles that appear bold in the tree are styles currently saved in the active document,
while non-bold styles are from the resource files.
Delete Point Styles, Linear Styles, or Linear Patterns

1. On the tree in the Line Style Editor, select the point style, linear style, or linear pattern, you
want to delete.
2. Click Delete Style on the Line Style Editor Toolbar.

You cannot delete point styles used to define linear patterns or linear styles or linear
patterns used to define linear styles.
Modify Point Styles, Linear Styles, or Linear Patterns

1. On the tree in the Line Style Editor, select the point style, linear style, or linear pattern you
want to modify.
2. Double click the selected item.
3. On the appropriate Properties dialog box, make the desired changes.
Refer to the Point Style Properties Dialog Box (on page 107), Linear Pattern Properties
Dialog Box (on page 103), or Linear Style Properties Dialog Box (on page 105) topics for
additional information about the fields on these dialog boxes.
Redefine Point Styles

1. In the drawing sheet, draw the image you want to define as a point style.
2. Click Select on the Draw toolbar, and then select the image on the Drawing sheet.
3. On the tree in the Line Style Editor, select the point style you want to redefine with the new
image.
4. On the Line Style Editor Toolbar, click Define Point Style Graphics .
5. Click on the image to place the origin of the point style.

Place Point Styles in the Drawing Sheet

1. From the tree in the Line Style Editor, select the point style you want to insert into the
drawing sheet.
2. Click Place Point Style Graphics on the Line Style Editor Toolbar.
3. Click in the drawing sheet where you want to place the graphic.
Line Style Editor Commands and Dialog Boxes

Topics
Copy Linear Pattern Dialog Box .................................................... 101
Copy Linear Style Dialog Box ........................................................ 101
Copy Point Style Dialog Box .......................................................... 102
Copy Style Command .................................................................... 102
Create New Linear Pattern Dialog Box .......................................... 102
Create New Linear Style Dialog Box ............................................. 102
Create New Point Style Dialog Box ............................................... 102
Create New Style Command ......................................................... 102
Define Point Style Graphics Command ......................................... 102
Delete Style Command .................................................................. 103
Import Style Command .................................................................. 103
Linear Pattern Properties Dialog Box ............................................ 103
Linear Style Properties Dialog Box ................................................ 105
Place Point Style Graphics Command .......................................... 107
Point Style Properties Dialog Box .................................................. 107
Properties Command ..................................................................... 107
Show Styles in Resource Files Command .................................... 108
Copy Linear Pattern Dialog Box

Creates a copy of an existing linear pattern, which you can modify as necessary for the active
document.
Style name — Type a name for the new linear pattern.
Copy Linear Style Dialog Box

Creates a copy of an existing linear style, which you can modify as necessary for the active
document.
Style name — Type a name for the new linear style.

Copy Point Style Dialog Box

Creates a copy of an existing point style, which you can modify as necessary for the active
document.
Style name — Type a name for the new point style.
Copy Style Command

Creates a copy of the style selected in the tree window of the SmartPlant Line Style Editor.
Create New Linear Pattern Dialog Box

Defines a new linear pattern for the active document.
Style name — Type a name for the new linear pattern.
Based on — Select an existing linear pattern on which to base the new pattern.
Create New Linear Style Dialog Box

Defines a new linear style for the active document.
Style name — Type a name for the new linear style.
Based on — Select an existing linear style on which to base the new style.
Create New Point Style Dialog Box

Defines a new point style for the active document.
Style name — Type a name for the new point style.
Create New Style Command

Creates a new point style, linear pattern, or linear style. Depending on what you have
selected in the tree window of the Catalog Manager Line Style Editor, clicking this button will
open either the Create New Point Style, Create New Linear Pattern Style, or Create New
Linear Style dialog box, which you use to define a new style.
Define Point Style Graphics Command

Defines the graphic for a point style from ordinary graphics in the active drawing. This
command is available only when you have selected a point style in the tree and one or more
objects are selected in the drawing.

Delete Style Command

Removes the selected style from the active document only if the style is not in use or
referenced by another style as a base style or as a component of another style.
Import Style Command

Imports a selected style into the active document. This command is available only when
you have selected a style object in a resource file.
Linear Pattern Properties Dialog Box

Displays specific descriptive information and attributes of the selected linear pattern.
Notes — Type a brief description or other useful information about the linear pattern.
Based on — Displays the name of the pattern on which this linear pattern was based.
Units — Specifies the geometric definition for the linear pattern. World units define the width of
the line in geometric space; Paper units define the width of the line on paper. Changing the
drawing scale has no effect on styles defined in Paper units; however, it does change styles
defined in World units.
When using the Line Style Editor to create new styles, if a linear style uses a linear
pattern and/or point style, it is recommended that they all have the same units.
Phasing — Select how dashes will be displayed.
 Normal — Repeats the stroke sequence without altering the strokes between repetitions.
 Autophasing — Adjusts the length of stretchable strokes so that the line always starts and
ends with a dash.
 Single Stroke Sequence — Scales the stroke sequence uniformly so that the first stroke
sequence begins the line and the last stroke sequence appears at the end of the line.
Fraction of first dash (%) — Set a numeric between 0 and 100 that represents the fraction of
the first dash to be used as the last dash of a line when the phasing is set to Autophasing or
Single Stroke Sequence.
Display dashes — Indicates whether dashes in this pattern are visible.
Break on change in direction — Indicates that a break in the linear pattern occurs whenever
the line changes direction.
Stroke index — Indicates the location within a stroke sequence where each stroke is displayed.
Each stroke within a sequence appears as a gap or a dash. Information about the stroke located
in a selected index location appears in the remaining fields in this section of the dialog box.
Dash length — Set the length of the current stroke.
Fixed length — Indicates that the length of the stroke is definite and cannot be lengthened or
shortened for phasing.
Stretchable — Indicates that the active stroke may be altered for phasing.

Dot — Indicates that the stroke should be displayed as a dot.

Selecting the Dot option disables the Dash length field, as the length is set by the
selection.
Zero length — Indicates that the active stroke has no length. A stoke with no length is often
used as a place holder for a point style or as the last stroke if no gap is wanted between cycles.
Selecting the Zero Length option disables the Dash length field, as the length is set by
the selection.
Name — Select a point style from this list box to apply to the active stroke.
Angle — Set the angle which the point style should be rotated when it is displayed. This value is
measured from the selected Orientation. This field is available only when you have selected an
option from the Name list box.
 The angle appears in the default units set in the host application; however, the field accepts
any unit of measure applicable to an angle.
 A positive value in this field rotates the point style in a counter-clockwise direction about its
origin, while a negative value results in clockwise rotation.
Orientation — Specifies the reference from which rotation is measured, as specified in the
Angle field. This reference may be the sheet or the line to which the point style is applied. This
field is available only when you have selected an option from the Name list box.
 Relative — Indicates rotation should be calculated from the slope of the line.
 Absolute — Indicates rotation should be calculated relative to the sheet.
 Always Up — Indicates rotation should be calculated relative to the slope of the line, but
that the x-axis of the point style is aligned with the line before the specified rotation is
applied. In other words, if a line is horizontal, the top of the point style is aligned toward the
top of the page, or if the line is vertical, the point style is aligned toward the left side of the
page before the rotation is applied.
This setting allows you to ensure that text within a pattern is displayed so that it is
readable from left to right or from bottom to top. Even if a line is drawn from right to left the
images within the pattern are displayed as if the line was drawn from left to right.
Position along stroke (%) — Using a numeric value between 0 and 100, set the fraction into
the stroke from which the X and Y offsets are measured. For example, if you set this value to 50,
the offsets will be measured from the middle of the selected stroke. This field is available only
when you have selected an option from the Name list box.
X offset — Distance along the stroke, at which the point style's origin is located. This distance is
measured from the point specified in the Position along stroke field. This field is available only
when you have selected an option from the Name list box.
Y offset — Distance perpendicular to the stroke at which the point style's origin is located. This
distance is measured from the point specified in the Position along stroke field. This field is
available only when you have selected an option from the Name list box.
Add stroke — Creates a new stroke. A new number will be added to the Stroke index list box,
and the new stroke is made active in the dialog box.

Remove stroke — Removes the active stroke from the linear pattern. This button is available
only when more than two strokes exist.
 To create a solid line with superimposed point style images, create dashes and apply the
point styles relative to those dashes. Then create gaps with zero length.
 When you turn off the Display dashes command on this dialog, point styles applied to the
linear pattern are still displayed positioned relative to the invisible dashes.
Preview — Displays the linear pattern image.
Linear Style Properties Dialog Box

Displays specific descriptive information, attributes, and an image of the selected linear style.
Notes — Type a brief description or other useful information about the linear style.
Based on — Displays the style on which this linear style was based.
Units — Specifies the geometric definition for the linear pattern. World units define the width of
the line in geometric space; Paper units define the width of the line on paper. Changing the
drawing scale has no effect on styles defined in Paper units; however, it does change styles
defined in World units.
pattern and/or point style, it is recommended that they all have the same units.
Component index — This list contains a number for each of the components within the linear
style. Information about the component selected in this field is displayed in the remaining fields
in this section of the dialog box.
Override point style color — Indicates that the color specified for this component will override
the color defined for any point style used as the component.
Override point style width — Indicates that the width specified for this component will override
the width defined for any point style used as the component.
Do not print — Displays objects using this linear style on screen but does not print them. The
option is applied per component. For example, a style can have two components, both of which
will display but only one of which will print.
Color — Select the color to be used for the active component.
If the component you are defining is a point style, and the color you select is not the color
with which the point style was defined, you should select the Override point style color check
box.
Transparency (%) — Indicate how transparent the drawn line will be. Zero (percent) indicates
that you will not be able to see through the line at all, while 100 (percent) indicates the line will
not be visible, as it will be completely transparent.
Linear pattern — Select a defined linear pattern to use as the active component in the linear
style.
Width - Select the width to be used for the active component.

If the component you are defining is a point style, and the width you select is not the width
with which the point style was defined, you should select the Override point style width check
box.
Offset — Specify the distance the active component should be placed from the centerline of the
linear style. The offset distance appears in the default length units set in the host application;
however, the field accepts any distances in any unit of measure applicable to a distance.
Crossover orientation — Controls how the component with an offset crosses over the
component without an offset. As such, this option is typically used on a style with two
components, one of which has an offset and one which does not. In the following illustration, the
darker line is the component without the offset, while the lighter line is the component with the
offset and the Crossover orientation.
Start terminator — Select the point style with which you would like to start the line.
End terminator — Select the point style with which you would like to end the line.
End cap type — Indicate the type of cap you want to place at the end of the line. You can
choose from a rounded, flat, squared, or triangular end. For examples of each type of end cap,
see the following graphic.

Join type — Select the kind of join you want to use for line strings and complex strings created
through automation. You can choose from rounded, beveled, and mitered joints. For examples
of each type of joint, see the graphic below.
The selected type of joint is not applied to regular lines joined at the end point.
Add component — Creates a new component. A new number will be added to the Component
index list box, and the new component is made active in the dialog box.
Remove component — Removes the active component from the linear style. This button is
available only when more than one component exists.
Preview — Displays the linear style.
Place Point Style Graphics Command

Places the selected point style graphic into the active drawing so that it can be modified
using the standard drawing tools. This command is available only if you have selected a point
style in the tree.
Point Style Properties Dialog Box

Displays specific descriptive information and an image of the selected point style.
Notes — Type a brief description or other useful information about the point style.
Units — Specifies the geometric definition for the point style. World units define the width of the
point style in geometric space; Paper units define the width of the point style on paper.
Changing the drawing scale has no effect on styles defined in Paper units; however, it does
change styles defined in World units.
pattern and/or point style it is recommended that they all have the same units.
Preview — Displays the point style image.
Properties Command
Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected style.

Show Styles in Resource Files Command

Displays or hides styles from attached styles resource files in the tree window. Resource
files are attached to a file using the host application.
Styles that appear bolded in the tree are styles currently saved in the active document,
while non-bolded styles are located in resource files.

SECTION 5
Working with Drawing Tools

Catalog Manager provides many various tools for creating and editing drawings, from drawing
simple straight lines and shapes, to creating complex designs that include different formatting
styles, text and so forth. After creating these drawings they can be used in SmartPlant P&ID or
SmartPlant Electrical to represent different items on P&ID and Electrical drawings.
Documents in Catalog Manager

Catalog Manager provides quick and easy to use tools for setting up, saving, and printing
documents.
You can create documents by selecting one of the many symbol templates in the Catalog
Explorer and then editing them with the tools provided, or you can open an existing MicroStation
(.cel or .dgn), AutoCAD (.dwg or .dxf), or Catalog Manager (.scm) document.
From the Sheet Setup dialog box, you can setup the sheet size, drawing scale and various
other parameters.
Catalog Manager provides several options for printing and saving your documents in different
formats.
Drawing Setup
You create a new, blank drawing in the Catalog Explorer; you can also copy or clone an existing
drawing in the Catalog Explorer as a starting point for a new drawing and save the changes
when you are finished.
When you create a drawing, the drawing is displayed on your screen. You can use toolbars or
menu commands to add, edit and modify information to your drawing.
Any changes you make are temporarily stored in memory. You have to save the drawing to
preserve the changes to your drawing. You can also save drawing in a specific format.
Opening Existing Drawings

File > Open opens existing drawings that cannot be opened from the Catalog Explorer. Use the
Open button or the right-click shortcut menu to open drawings from the Catalog Explorer.
Catalog Manager keeps track of the drawings you open and displays them at the bottom of the
File menu. Use Tools > Options to set the number of entries Catalog Manager displays in the
list. To open or switch to one of these drawings, choose it from the list.
Setting Up Properties for a Drawing

File > Properties allows you to view, edit, and store properties for a drawing. Drawing
properties can include the title, the author, and keywords that identify important information.
These properties also can include drawing statistics, such as drawing size and the date that a
drawing was created and last modified. Some properties, such as the date the drawing was last
modified, are updated automatically.

Setting Up Units of Measure for a Drawing

The units of measure settings for a drawing are stored as a property. You can set units of
measure in both English and metric units for values such as length, area, or angles. Once you
set the units of measure, all the measurements in the drawing are affected. For example, if you
set the length unit of measure to inches, then all the measurements in the drawing display in
inches.
You can change the unit of measure at any time while you are drawing, and the drawing still
retains complete accuracy of the measurements in the drawing.
The precision readout determines the accuracy of the unit readout value by setting the number
of significant figures to display. The precision setting does not alter the numbers that you type
into the fields, only the display of the numbers in the field. Values ending in 5 are rounded up.
For example, if the precision readout is .123 and you draw a line that is 2.1056 inches long, then
the line value length is rounded. The length value appears as 2.106 inches long. If you are using
mm as your drawing sheet units, you can have the values display in the fields as 3.5 mm or 3.50
mm.
When you set the units of measure for a drawing, the settings do not affect the dimensional
values for the drawing. You can set units for the dimensional values with the Dimension
Properties dialog box. You can access this dialog box by selecting a dimension and then
clicking Properties on the shortcut menu. You can also set the dimension units by editing a
dimension style with Dimension on the Format menu.
Working with Several Open drawings

Several drawings can remain open in the same session. You can use Cut, Copy, and Paste to
move or copy information between the drawings or within one open drawing. You can use
commands on the Window menu to arrange all the open drawings so that you can view them
easily.
You can also use Insert > Object to import objects, such as drawings, spreadsheets, or text
created in other software, into an open drawing. You can link or embed the imported objects.
You can also drag information from another drawing into an open drawing.
Open a Document
Open a Document without Exiting the Software
1. On the Main toolbar, click Open .
You also can click File > Open.
2. Select the folder containing the document you want to open.
3. Type the name of the document or select it from the list of documents.
4. On the Open dialog box, click Open.

Drag and Drop a Document

1. Open the Windows Explorer and select the document that you want.
2. Drag the document to the title bar at the top of the software window.
 Documents created using SmartSketch 1.0 or SmartSketch 2.0 are not supported in this
version of the software.
 The bottom of the File menu displays the last four files you opened.
 In the Open dialog box, you can double-click the document name for the document to open
the document.
 The last file type opened displays automatically in the Files of Type field.
 If you do not see the document you want to open, make sure the drive, folder, and type are
correct.
 If you do not know the location of a document, you can look for the document. On the
Windows Taskbar, click Start > Find.
See Also
Open Dialog Box (on page 119)
Activate a Drawing Sheet

A drawing consists of six drawing sheets, these sheets are:
 Graphics
 Heat Trace
 Jacket
 Label
 Hidden Objects
 Icon
To display a drawing sheet, click a drawing sheet tab.
 You can display the Graphics, Heat Trace, and Jacket sheets together by holding down
the CTRL key and clicking the tabs of each sheet.
 To access the Sheet Setup dialog box, click File > Sheet Setup.

Set Up a Drawing Sheet

1. Click File > Sheet Setup.
2. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, set the options that you want.
If you want to set up a background sheet, click the Background tab and set the
options that you want.
You can save the sheet setup as a default using Save Defaults on the Sheet Setup
dialog box. The current settings will then be used as the default settings for any new drawing
sheets you create in the document.
Display Background Sheets

 Click View > Background Sheets.
Change the Background Sheet

2. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, click the Background tab.
3. Select a new background sheet from the list.
If a background sheet has not been created, the list does not display any options.
When you change the background sheet, the size and margins of your working sheet
equal the settings of the selected background sheet.
Set Document Properties

1. Click File > Properties.
2. On the Properties dialog box, set the options that you want, such as summary information
or keywords.
You must save the document before you can set or view the document statistics or
summary information on the Statistics and Summary tabs of the Properties dialog box.
See Also
Properties Dialog Box (on page 130)
View the Properties of a Document

2. On the Properties dialog box, click the tab that contains the information you want to see.
You must save the document before you can set or view the document statistics or
summary information on the Statistics and Summary tabs of the Properties dialog box.

The Properties dialog box displays information about the current condition of the active
document. If the document has unsaved changes, you must save the document to update the
property information.
See Also
Customize the Software with the Options Command

You can use Options on the Tools menu to customize the software. You can change such
things as the screen appearance, document location, and display colors.
1. Click Tools > Options.
2. On the Options dialog box, select the tab containing the information you want to customize.
3. Use the controls on the Options dialog box to make the appropriate changes.
Set File Locations

2. On the Options dialog box, click the File Locations tab.
3. Select one of the file types in the list.
4. Click Modify and, on the Browse for Folder dialog box, select the directory and folder
where you want the software to look for the file type.
Saving Documents
After creating or editing a document you must save it. Depending on the type of document, and
its format, the document can be saved in various different formats.
By default, the save format for documents created or opened from the Catalog Explorer are
saved as Symbol (.sym) files. For documents opened or created in a format other than the
.sym format, they are saved as a Catalog Manager Document (.scm) file.
Save a Document
 Do one of the following:
 Click Save .
 Click File > Save.
 Click File > Save As.
 When saving a document for the first time, a document created in the Catalog Explorer is
automatically saved to the same category the document was created in.

 In Catalog Manager, you cannot save a symbol with grouped elements; therefore you must
ungroup all grouped elements before saving the symbol.
 The Save As dialog box opens when saving a document created in a different drawing
program or format from the .sym format for the first time, . Here you can type in the name
for the document, choose the required format, and select where you want to save the
document.
 The Save As command can be used to save a document, opened from the Catalog Explorer
to change the name of the file, for example when creating a copy, but it cannot change the
.sym format to another format.
 A document that is not opened from Catalog Manager, for example an AutoCAD (.dwg)
document, can be renamed and saved in a different format using the Save As command.
 Clicking the document Close icon prompts you to save the document.
Save Command
Saves the active document with its currently defined name, folder, and format. If you are
saving the document for the first time, the Save As dialog box is displayed so that you can give
the document a name and specify a folder and format to save it to.
In Catalog Manager, you cannot save a symbol with grouped elements; therefore you
must ungroup all grouped elements before saving the symbol.
Close a Document
1. Click File > Close.
2. If you have made changes since the document was last saved or if you have never saved a
new document, you are prompted to indicate if you want to save your changes. Do one of
the following:
 If you do not want to save your changes, click No.
 If you want to save the changes, click Yes. If you click Yes, the Save As dialog box is
displayed so that you can give the document a name and specify a directory and format
to save it to.
 If you do not want to close the document, click Cancel.
Printing Documents
You can print your documents on many different devices ranging from dot matrix printers to
high-end laser printers. Except for the color settings and a few special effects, your drawing
prints exactly as it appears on the drawing sheet.
Preparing to Print
The printer you use affects the way the current document prints and displays text on the screen.
Before you print a document, you must install and select the printer that you want to use. For
more information about installation, see your printer documentation.

Before you print, you will want to choose a printer and the settings for it. To do this, click Print
on the File menu and then click the printer that you want to use. You can set properties for the
printer by clicking Properties. To set the print range and scale, click Settings.
Printing a Document
As you work on a document, you might need to send a copy of it to a specified printer, plotter, or
file. You can click Print on the File menu to do the following:
 Print an entire document or specific sheets from a document.
 Print a draft copy of a document.
 Set printing options, such as the range of sheets or number of copies to print.
The software supports WYSIWYG plotting, using standard Windows® plotting capabilities. The
software also supports pen plotters, subject to the limitations of the device driver. Elements
appear the same on the screen and in the printed document.
Printing Part of a Document

You can print selected sheets in a document or a selected area. This practice is handy if you are
working on a complex drawing and you want to print only certain parts to proof them.
You select the various options for printing from the Print dialog box. To open the Print dialog
box, click File > Print.
Printing Time
Required time for printing varies by document. Expect longer print times when you have
drawings that contain a large number of the following items:
 Curved elements
 Many fills that have complex colors, patterns, or textures
 Large bitmaps
 Links to various documents
The type of printer that you have also affects the printing time. PostScript® printers print faster
than LaserJet printers because they can calculate faster. Some older versions of PostScript
printers are slower when compared to the newer ones. The type of controller boards and the
amount of RAM in the printer also affect your printing times.
Print a Document
 Click File > Print.
 Click .
2. Under Printer, from the Name list, select the required printer.
3. Under Copies, in the Number of Copies box, type the number of copies you want to print.
You can also use the Spinners to adjust the number of copies

4. Under Print range, select the range type.

 To print all the drawing, select All sheets.
 To print selected sheets, select Selected sheets.
 To print the Graphic or Icon sheet, select Sheets and then select Graphics or Icon.
 To print a specific area, select Print area. For more information see Print an Area of a
Drawing Sheet.
5. Click OK.
 Other printer options can be set by clicking Properties or Settings on the Print dialog box.
 To display on screen your drawing as it will be printed, click Tools > Options and select
Display as printed on the View tab.
Print to a File
1. On the Main toolbar, click Print .
2. On the Print dialog box, set Print to file.
3. Click OK.
4. On the Print to file dialog box, type the name of the file and select the folder to print to.
See Also
Set Printing Options

1. On the Main toolbar, click Print .
To print Do this
An entire document Under Print Range, select All Sheets. This is recommended only
when all the sheets have the same orientation and paper size.
Selected sheets In the document, select the sheets you want to print; then, on the
Print dialog box, under Print Range, select Selected Sheets. This
prints the selected sheets as a composite drawing, like layers on a
single sheet of paper. The software uses the scale, paper size, and
orientation of the active sheet for printing the final document.
A selected area of Under Print Range, select Print Area and then click OK. The Print
a sheet dialog box closes and a set of crosshairs appear on the drawing. You
drag the crosshairs across the drawing to define the area to be
printed. The Print Area dialog box automatically appears so that you
can set options for printing the area. For more information, see Print
an Area of a Drawing Sheet.

To print Do this
The Graphic or Under Print Range, select Sheets and from the data window select
Icon sheet which sheet to print.
3. Under Copies, in the Number of copies field, use the spinners or type the number of
copies wanted.
4. Select Collate, to sort the sheets by numbers, if required.
5. Click OK.
 You can set other options for the printer by clicking Properties or Settings on the Print
dialog box. You can set the paper size, source, and orientation.
 Click File > Sheet Setup to specify the drawing sheet size and scale.
Print an Area of a Drawing Sheet

 Click .
 Click File > Print.
2. On the Print dialog box in the Name box, select the printer you want to use.
3. In the Number of Copies box, type the number of copies that you want.
4. In the Print Range box, click Print Area and click OK, the dialog box closes and a set of
crosshairs appear on the drawing.
5. Click and drag the crosshairs to define the area that you want to print.
6. On the Print Area dialog box, set the options to print the selected area.
7. Click OK.
 You can set other options for the printer by clicking Properties or Settings on the Print
dialog box. You can set the paper size, source, and orientation.
 You can display the document as it will be printed. Click Tools > Options and then, on the
View tab, click the Display as Printed check box.
Print Several Documents Simultaneously

The command line that you type to print several documents simultaneously uses the
options that you set in the software, except for printer selection and the number of copies.
Before you begin, review the options on the Print dialog box. On that dialog box, click Settings
to review the options on the Settings dialog box.
1. Open a Command Prompt window.
 Click Start > Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.

 Click Start > Run. In the Open box, type command and then click OK.
2. In the Command Prompt window, type a command line with the following syntax:
<space>/p<space>/q<space><printer path><space>/c<integer for number of
copies><space><document path><space><document path><space><document
path, and so forth>
Example: /p /q \\print1\laserjet /c2 “c:\temp\first file.igr” c:\temp\second_file.igr
 Spaces separate the document paths. If the printer name or filename contains a space,
you must use double quotes.
 Press ENTER to print the document.
Print Command
Sends a copy of the active document to a specified plotter, printer, or file. Options are
available for defining the printing area, range, number of copies, and other printing
characteristics.
Before using this command, you must install and select a printer. For help on installing a printer,
see the Windows documentation.
See Also
Print to a File (on page 116)
Print Dialog Box (on page 136)
Document Commands, Controls, and Dialog Boxes

This section contains topics about the commands, controls, and dialog boxes used to create and
work with documents and drawings.
Background Sheets Command (View Menu)

Switches the view from a working sheet to the background sheet. When you set this toggle, all
of the background sheets in the document are displayed as tabs at the bottom of window. All
working sheet tabs are hidden. You can use a background sheet to draw graphics that you want
to display on more than one drawing sheet. For example, you can draw borders and title blocks
that contain your company logo, your name, and information about the drawings.
 To switch back to the working sheet, click View > Working sheets.
 You can display background sheet graphics on any or all working sheets, by selecting Show
background on the Background tab of the Sheet Setup dialog box.

Close Command (File Menu)

Closes the active document. If you have made changes since the document was last saved or if
you have never saved a new document, you are prompted to indicate if you want to save your
changes. If you do not want to save your changes, click No. If you want to save the changes,
click Yes. If you do not want to close the document, click Cancel. If you click Yes, the Save As
dialog box is displayed so that you can give the document a name and specify a directory and
format to save it to.
You can use Tools > Customize to place the (Close) on a toolbar.
Most Recently Used Files Command (File Menu)

Opens one of the documents that you worked on most recently. The file names are listed near
the bottom of the File menu.
 You can change the number of files listed on the menu by clicking Tools > Options and
selecting the General tab and then use the spinners or type the number of files you want to
be displayed in the Entries field.
 You can turn this option off by clearing the Recently used files list check box on the
General tab of the Options dialog box.
Open Command (File Menu)

Opens an existing document or template in a new window.
Open Dialog Box

Controls how a document is opened.
When you position the pointer on this dialog box and right-click, you can access a variety of
standard commands that help you manage your documents more efficiently. For example, right
click on a document, and click Select on the shortcut menu to automatically open a document.
You can also perform other tasks like creating shortcuts and mailing your documents.
The last file type opened displays automatically in the Files of Type field.
See Also
Open a Document (on page 110)
Options Command (Tools Menu)

Changes settings that control screen appearance, document location, user information, and so
forth.
You can use the Options command to set options for importing MicroStation or AutoCAD
documents into the software.

Options Dialog Box

Sets options for the current document. For example, you can set the grid display by clicking the
View tab.
Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Controls color settings for the active document.
Sheet — Sets the default color of all drawing sheets in the active document.
Sheet color is stored in the file. However, when you specify a sheet color on the
Colors tab, it will override the sheet color stored in previously saved files. To allow the display of
a saved sheet color, access the Colors tab and select Default before re-opening the drawing
file.
Highlight — Sets the highlight color.
Selected Element — Sets the color of selected elements.
Disabled Elements — Sets the color of disabled elements. This setting can also define the
color of relationship indicators and their corresponding glyphs if Maintain Relationships is
disabled. Select Tools > SmartSketch Settings to see the relationship indicators and their
corresponding glyphs or images.
Handles — Sets the color of handles when an element is selected. Also, if Maintain
Relationships is enabled, the Handles option sets the color for the relationship indicators that
display during element placement.
Preview — Displays your selection as it appears in a document.
If you set the sheet color the same as another control setting, the control color setting
and the cursor color is automatically changed to a complementary color. For example, if you
have both the Selected Element color and the Sheet color set to Yellow, the sheet background
displays yellow and the selected elements display in a complementary blue color.
General Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Controls settings such as the display of 3-D effects and the number of entries in the list of
recently used files.
Update links automatically at open — Updates links automatically when the document is open
and this option is set.
Recently used files list — Sets the number of entries for the Recent Files area of the File
menu when the Recent Files area is set.

Dimension key-in values automatically — Places dimensions for recognized step values or
for values you type in a ribbon field while drawing a geometric element. For example, select
Rectangle on the Draw toolbar. On the ribbon, type a value in the Width, Height, and/or Angle
fields, press ENTER or TAB, and then click the location in the Drawing sheet where you want to
place the rectangle.
Display unit of measurement labels — Displays the units of measurement in the value field.
Set printer paper size to sheet size — Automatically sets the printer paper size to match the
sheet size (if the printer supports that size).
Display XY coordinate readout — Displays the XY coordinate of the cursor position in the right
side of the application window status bar.
Undo steps — Sets the number of operations that can be undone.
Middle Button Operation — Sets up the middle mouse button so that it can be used for either
scrolling or panning. The default action of the middle mouse button is Windows Scrolling.
File Locations Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Specifies the default location for documents, templates, and other objects you create or use in
the software. You can set the default locations for the following items:
 Documents
 User-defined templates
 Fonts
 Macros
 MicroStation references
 AutoCAD references
File Types — Indicates the file type for which you want to specify a location.
Location — Displays the designated location for each file type.
Modify — Accesses the Modify Location dialog box. The folder selected with the dialog box is
displayed in the Location column on this tab. After you select a location, you can delete it later
by selecting the location in the Location column and pressing Delete.

View Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Controls the appearance of the software and document window, such as the display of the
graph paper, ruler, and scroll bar.
Display
Controls display settings.
Display as printed — Displays the drawing as it appears on paper. This option is enabled by
default.
Style view scale — Controls the width of linear styles as displayed on the screen. This option
is only available when Display as printed is disabled and will not apply to printed drawings.
Maximum line width — Sets the maximum width allowed for the display linear styles. This
option is only available when Display as printed is disabled and will not apply to printed
drawings.
Reset — Resets Style view scale and Maximum line width to their default values. This option
is only available when Display as printed disabled.
Window
Controls the window display.
Vertical Scroll Bar — Displays the vertical scroll bar of the active window.
Horizontal Scroll Bar — Displays the horizontal scroll bar of the active window.
Status Bar — Displays the status bar of the application.
Sheet Tabs — Displays the drawing sheet tabs.
Grid
Sets options for the grid.
The grid display option must be checked from the view menu before these settings will be
visible.
Grid Display — Displays a grid so that you can place elements with precision. The grid lines
are not considered part of the document and do not print.
Grid Snap — Aligns elements with the grid. The grid is an invisible set of lines in the document
that helps you align elements. When you set Grid Snap, elements always align with the grid
lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines.
Grid Style — Changes the format of the grid lines to either static or dynamic. When you zoom in
or out, the software dynamically generates the grid lines for a dynamic grid. You can set
dynamic grid lines to appear at fine, medium, or coarse levels. The grid lines appear at common
major measurement increments. A dynamic grid displays index lines that intersect with the
darker, solid grid lines. A static grid displays solid grid lines that do not move as you zoom in or
out. The grid maintains a constant minimum spacing.
Grid Index — Determines the number of index grid lines, also known as minor grid lines, to be
equally spaced between the major grid lines. This option is available only if you select Static in
the Grid Style list box.

Grid Spacing —- Sets the spacing of the major grid lines. This option is available only if you
select Static in the Grid Style list box. The selected options on the Units tab of the Properties
dialog box determine the units that you can enter, such as inches or centimeters.
You can open the Properties dialog box by clicking Properties on the File menu.
Grid Density — Changes the number of dashes in the index lines, or minor grid lines, between
intersections with the grid lines. This option is available only if you select Dynamic in the Grid
Style list box.
Sheet outline
Sets options for the outline of the drawing sheet.
Display — Displays the outline of a drawing sheet so you can view its boundaries.
Use during fit — Specifies whether or not to use the sheet outline during a fit.
Symbols Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Determines the default actions when you drag a symbol into the document. You can override the
settings on this tab when you drag a symbol. You can press CTRL to embed the symbol or
CTRL + SHIFT to link the symbol.
Drag and Drop Default

Specifies actions when you drag a symbol into the document.
Embed — Sets the default action so that the symbol embeds when you drag it on the drawing
sheet. Embedding the symbol means that the software places a copy of the symbol in the
document. If you edit one instance of the embedded symbol in a document, all copies of that
symbol within the current document reflect those changes.
Link — Sets the default action so that the symbol is linked when you drag it into the document.
Linking the symbol allows you to edit the original symbol document. The symbol that you placed
on the drawing sheet updates automatically. If you edit the symbol inside the active document,
those changes are saved in the .sym document on your computer.
Reference Files Tab (Options Dialog Box)
Scale
Sets a scale option for importing a document.
Coincident — Brings in a reference file, also known as an inserted object, at full scale (1:1) and
coincident to its original coordinate position. The setting shifts the drawing sheet to the lower left
of the document graphic range and then determines a drawing sheet scale that fits the reference
file within the sheet. If the current document already contains graphics, the drawing sheet shifts
to include those graphics.
If you use the Coincident setting, the reference file does not appear when you drag the
pointer.
Select Scale — Sets the drawing scale to a standard ratio. The specified ratio defines the size
of the drawing in relation to the size of the real-world object. For a 2:1 ratio, 2 represents the
size of the drawing and 1 represents the size of the real-world object.

Fit to Sheet determines a drawing sheet scale that fits the reference file within the sheet,
but allows you to specify where to insert the file by clicking on the drawing sheet.
Custom Scale — Sets the scale that you type in the boxes for a document that you insert or
drag. For example, when you type in 3 and 2 in each of the respective boxes, the scale of the
foreign document is one-and-a-half times its original size.
Foreign Data Tab (Options Dialog Box)

The Foreign Data tab is only available on the Options dialog box if you install the
Translators option.
Sets options for moving information into the current document by dragging a document or by
clicking one of the following commands:
 Paste Special on the Edit menu
 Object on the Insert menu
 Open on the File menu.
Format —Sets the type of format that you can use for importing or saving a document. When
you click MicroStation or AutoCAD and then click the appropriate Options, you can access a
specific dialog box to set options for importing or saving AutoCAD (.dxf, .dwg) or MicroStation
(.dgn) documents.
Import
Sets options for importing an AutoCAD or MicroStation document.
File Units — Sets the units for the document you want to import. When you insert or drag a
document into the drawing sheet, the software uses this setting only when the document has
units assigned that the software does not recognize.
Orientation —- Sets the orientation for the document that you want to import.
Options —- Accesses one of the dialog boxes for importing an AutoCAD or MicroStation
document.
Export
Sets options for exporting an AutoCAD or MicroStation document.
Options —- Accesses a dialog box for exporting an AutoCAD or MicroStation document.
MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box

Controls how a MicroStation document is opened or inserted into the current document.
To use this functionality, you must install the Translators option.

General Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box)
Cell Library
Sets options for translating MicroStation cell libraries. When a cell library is imported, a symbol
document with a .sym extension is created.
Units of Resolution — Determines the sub-unit and positional unit settings for MicroStation cell
libraries. Cell libraries do not have units and depend on the MicroStation document for their units
of resolution. These settings have no effect on translating documents with a .dgn extension; the
settings only affect documents with a .CEL extension.
Cells
Sets options for importing cells in MicroStation documents. When you import a MicroStation
document, a temporary folder is created in the Temp folder on your computer. The temporary
folder contains the symbols that are embedded in the MicroStation document. By default, these
symbols are deleted after the document is imported into the drawing sheet. You can change a
setting in ITMSTN.INI to save the symbols instead. In Notepad, open ITMSTN.INI and change
the following line in the Options section: Delete Symbol Definitions = 0.
Options — Determines if cells are imported as elements on the drawing sheet or embedded
symbols. Symbol documents have a .sym extension. For example, type 2 cells are imported as
groups and shared cells, type 34, are imported as symbols.
Template File — Specifies the path and filename for the template that you want to use to create
a document. Click Browse to change the specified path and filename for the template.
Fit imported data to active sheet —- Places the MicroStation data on the active drawing
sheet. If the check box is not selected, the imported data is placed on a new drawing sheet.
Font Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box)

Maps the software font to a MicroStation font.
Linestyle Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box)

Maps the MicroStation line styles to line style definitions in the software. The core MicroStation
line styles (0 - 7) default to equivalent Catalog Manager line styles unless they are mapped on
the Linestyle Tab.
The number values listed below can be used in the line style table to map MicroStation line
styles to line style definitions in the software. When mapping line styles use the line style
number, not the line style name.
MicroStation Catalog Manager
Line Style Number Line Style Number
Solid 0 Normal 9
Dotted 1 Dashed 10
Medium Dotted 2 Dotted 11

Long Dotted 3 Dash Dot 12
Dot Dash 4 Dash 2Dot 13
Short Dash 5 Chain 18
Dash Dot Dot 6 Double Chain 20
Long Short 7 2Dash Dot 21

Dash
Line Width Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box)

Maps the MicroStation weights to line widths in the software.
MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box

Controls how a document will be translated to a MicroStation file format.
General Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box)

Version — Specifies the version of MicroStation you want to use.
Seed File —- Specifies the path of a default seed file that contains appropriate units, color
tables, and other important information. Click Browse to change the specified path of the seed
file.
When you specify a 2D seed file while exporting a 3D MicroStation reference file from
the current document, the 3D reference file is not saved in MicroStation. For the 3D MicroStation
reference file to be saved in MicroStation, you must specify a 3D seed file on the MicroStation
Export Options dialog box.
Font Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box)

Maps the software font to a MicroStation font.
Linestyle Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box)

Maps the line styles in the software to MicroStation line styles.

The number values listed below can be used in the Linestyle table to map line styles in the
current document to MicroStation line styles. When mapping line styles, use the line style
number; not the line style name.
Solid 0 Normal 9
Dotted 1 Dashed 10
Medium Dotted 2 Dotted 11
Long Dotted 3 Dash Dot 12
Dot Dash 4 Dash 2Dot 13
Short Dash 5 Chain 18
Dash Dot Dot 6 Double Chain 20
Long Short 7 2Dash Dot 21

Dash
Line Width Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box)

Maps the software line widths to MicroStation weights.
Layer Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box)

Layer Mapping Table — Displays an alphanumeric ordered list of the layers.
Controls how an AutoCAD document is opened or inserted into the current document.
AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box
General Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box)
Blocks
Options — Specifies whether an AutoCAD block is imported as an embedded symbol or a
group of elements. An embedded symbol document has a .sym extension. When you import an
AutoCAD document, a temporary folder is created in the Temp folder on your hard drive. The
temporary folder contains the symbols that are embedded in the AutoCAD document. By
default, these symbols are deleted after the document is imported into the drawing sheet. You

can change a setting in ITACAD.INI and change the following line in the Options section: Delete
Symbol Definitions = 0.
Template File — Specifies the path and filename for the template that you want to use to create
a document. Click Browse to change the specified path of the template file.
Fit imported data to active drawing sheet — Places the AutoCAD data on the active drawing
sheet. If the check box is not selected, the imported data is placed on a new drawing sheet.
Font Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box)

Maps AutoCAD fonts to system TrueType fonts.
If a font is not mapped, it defaults to the font specified in the first entry in the font mapping
list.
Linestyle Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box)

Maps the line style of the current document to AutoCAD line types. The values for mapping are
as follows:
Line Style Type Number
Normal Continuous 9
Dashed Dash 10
Dotted Dot 11
Dash Dot Dash Dot 12
Dash 2Dot Dash Dot Dot 13
Chain Chain 18
No Style Centered Chain 19

Delivered
Double Chain Double Chain 20
2Dash Dot Dash Dash Dot 21
Zig-Zag No Type 22
Delivered
No Style End Gap 23

Delivered
Line Width Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box)

Maps a line width for the current document to an AutoCAD color.

Default Width — Defines the width to assign to all AutoCAD entities that do not have width or
color-to-width mapping.
AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box

Controls how a document will be saved to AutoCAD file format.
General Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box)

Version — Specifies the version of AutoCAD you want to use. Only AutoCAD versions
2000/2002 and 2004/2005/2006/2007 are supported for export.
Prototype DWG File — Specifies the default prototype drawing (.dwg) file to use during
translation. This document can contain appropriate styles, color tables, and other preconfigured
settings. Click Browse to change the specified path of the DWG file.
Font Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box)

Maps the fonts in the current document to AutoCAD-compiled shape fonts (.shx), AutoCAD
postscript binary fonts (.pfb), or system TrueType fonts (.ttf).
If a font is not mapped, it defaults to the font specified in the first entry in the font mapping
list.
Linestyle Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box)

Maps the line style of the current document to AutoCAD line types. The values for mapping are
as follows:
Normal Continuous 9
Dashed Dash 10
Dotted Dot 11
Dash Dot Dash Dot 12
Dash 2Dot Dash Dot Dot 13
Chain Chain 18
No Style Centered Chain 19

Delivered
Double Chain Double Chain 20
2Dash Dot Dash Dash Dot 21

Zig-Zag No Type 22
Delivered
No Style End Gap 23

Delivered
Line Width Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box)

Maps a line width in the current document to an AutoCAD color.
Polyline Width Threshold — Defines the threshold used to determine when polylines with
width must be created.
Properties Command (File Menu)

Retrieves general information about the current document. You can review and edit the following
document information: the document summary, statistics, units, and Browser properties. If a
symbol document (.sym) is open, you can review and edit the general, unit, behavior, and
specific symbol properties for the document. This command is available only on the File menu.
Properties Dialog Box

Manages information about the properties of a document.
You must save the document before you can access the Statistics and Summary tabs of
the Properties dialog box. If a symbol document (.sym) is open, the only tabs that appear are
the General, Units, Browser, Symbols, and Behavior tabs.
See Also
General Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) (on page 130)
Summary Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) (on page 131)
Statistics Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) (on page 131)
Units Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) (on page 132)
Browser Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) (on page 132)
Symbol Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) (on page 132)
Behavior Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) (on page 133)
General Tab (File Properties Dialog Box)

Displays general information about the current document.
If some of the following information is not available, the boxes display "Unknown."
Filename — Displays the name of the document.
Type — Displays the type of document. The type is based on the application used to create the
document.
Location — Displays the folder containing the document.

Size — Displays the size of the document in bytes, kilobytes, and megabytes.
MS-DOS Name — Displays the name of the document as it would appear in a File Allocation
Table file naming system. These types of documents have an eight-character name and
three-character extension.
Created — Displays the date and time the document was created or copied.
Modified — Displays the date and time the document was last modified.
Accessed — Displays the date that the document was last opened or copied.
Attributes — Displays the attributes of the current document. These settings are read-only.
Read-Only — Indicates that the document is read-only. You cannot open a read-only file for
writing. You cannot create a file with the same name as a read-only file.
Archive — Shows that the document is an archive document.
Hidden — Indicates that the document is a hidden document. You usually cannot see this
document in the Windows Explorer.
System — Shows that the document is a system document. You usually cannot see this
document unless you change the options in the Internet Explorer.
Summary Tab (File Properties Dialog Box)

Displays the title and author, if available, along with keywords and comments for the current
document. The software generates the author and template information when you create, save,
or print the document. You can also edit these properties, with the exception of the template,
unless the document is write-protected.
Title — Specifies the title of the current document.
Subject — Gives a general description of the current document.
Author — Displays the name of the person who created the document.
Keywords — Displays a list of words that identify the document when you browse or search
documents.
Comments — Specifies comments about the current document.
Template — Displays the name of the document template that was used to create the
document.
Statistics Tab (File Properties Dialog Box)

Displays detailed information about the current document. The software automatically generates
these properties when you create, save, or print the document.
Created — Displays the date and time the document was created or copied.
Creating Application — Displays the name of the application that created the document.
Modified — Displays the date and time the document was last modified.
Accessed — Displays the date that the document was last opened or copied.
Last Saved By — Displays the name of the person who last saved the document.

Saving Application — Displays the name of the application that most recently saved the
document.
Currently Opened By — Displays the name of the person who has the document open.
Units Tab (File Properties Dialog Box)

Sets up units of measure and precision readout for the length, area, or angle values in a
drawing.
The precision readout sets the number of significant figures to display. It sets the accuracy of
the unit readout value. The precision setting does not alter the numbers that you type into the
fields, only the display of the numbers in the field. Values ending in 5 are rounded up. For
example, if the precision readout is .123 and you draw a line that is 2.1056 inches long, then the
line value length is rounded. The length value appears as 2.106 inches long. If you are using
mm as your drawing sheet units, you can have the values display in the fields as 3.5 mm or 3.50
mm.
Length Readout — Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the length values in a
document.
Angle Readout — Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the angle values in a
document.
Area Readout — Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the area values in a
document.
Browser Tab (File Properties Dialog Box)

Sets the home address for the active document. Every time you open this document and click
Home on the Symbol Explorer, the Symbol Explorer goes to the address in the Address box.
Address - Sets the home address for the current document. When you open a document and
then open the Symbol Explorer and click Home , the Symbol Explorer goes to the
address that you type here. You can any address that you use in a web browser, such as
Microsoft Internet Explorer; for example, you can type http://www.smartsketch.com.
If you want to set the Symbol Explorer to always look at the symbols folder on your computer,
you can type the full path to your symbols folder in the Address box. Each time you open this
document and click Home in the Symbol Explorer, the symbol documents in the folder path
you specified are displayed.
Browse - Accesses the Modify Location dialog box so that you can set another folder for the
Symbol Explorer to look in. You can set the dialog box to look in folders on your computer or a
network drive.
Symbol Tab (File Properties Dialog Box)

This tab is available only for documents that are symbols and have a .sym
extension.
Defines the symbol properties for a .sym document. With this tab, you can assign descriptive
information that identifies the symbol. When you drag the symbol into a document, these values
appear in the Attribute Viewer.

For example, if you wanted to define a bill of materials, you can assign manufacturing
information on this tab for a door symbol, place the symbol in a document, and then create a
report that displays the manufacturing information.
Name — Defines a property name.
Type — Specifies the property type you want to define for the symbol property name. You can
choose from Text, Number, Money, or Date.
Value — Specifies a value for the symbol. For example, you can assign a manufacturer's name,
a serial number, or other descriptive information as a value.
Attributes — The properties table lists all the properties currently defined for the symbol.
See Also
Set Document Properties (on page 112)
Behavior Tab (File Properties Dialog Box)
This tab is available only for documents that are symbols and have a .sym
extension.
Insertion Type — Specifies the insertion type for a symbol. You can set the insertion type by
clicking Options on the Tools menu and then clicking the Symbols tab on the Options dialog
box. After you set an insertion type for a symbol, you cannot change the type.
Update — Displays the type of update for the link on the symbol. To change the update status
of a link, click Automatic. To prevent updating the link, click Frozen. You can select Automatic
when you want the document to automatically reflect any changes to the symbol document. You
can select Frozen when you do not want the symbol in the current document to change at all.
Scale Factor — Specifies the scale factor that the symbol uses when you drag it into the active
document. The scale factor used is relative to the model units of the symbol. For example, if you
set the scale factor to 2 and the symbol has 1 cm square in model units, it displays 2 cm square
when you drag it into the active document.
Lock Scale — Specifies if you can scale the symbol after you place it in a document.
You can scale a symbol by clicking Scale on the Change toolbar or by dragging the
symbol handles.
Allow Rotation By Relationships — Allows a symbol to change its orientation on the drawing
sheet according to the applied relationships. If you clear the check box, the symbol does not
change its orientation regardless of changes to its relationships.
This check box is available only when the symbol is an open document. You can open the
symbol document (.sym) with the Open command on the File menu. When you set or clear this
check box and close the symbol document, the setting affects the behavior of the symbol when
it is dragged from the Catalog Explorer onto the drawing sheet.

The check box is clear by default. When the check box is clear, a symbol maintains its
orientation to the drawing sheet when you move the symbol or other elements that are related to
it. In the following example, the line and symbol share a dimensional relationship. The lower end
of the symbol is grounded in place with a lock relationship.
If you edit the dimensional value of the driving dimension between the line and symbol to modify
the position of the elements, the symbol does not change its orientation on the drawing sheet.
The driving dimension changes to a driven dimension that is not to scale, as indicated by the
underlined dimensional value.
When you set the Allow Rotation By Relationships check box, the symbol changes orientation
on the drawing sheet according to the applied relationships. In the example, when you edit the
dimensional value of the driving dimension to change the position of the elements, the symbol
changes orientation on the drawing sheet, maintaining the dimensional relationships.
Nested Display — Defines the behavior of nested symbols. The options are Public and Private.
When you open a document that contains nested symbols, the public option displays these
symbols, but the private option hides these symbols.
See Also
Set Document Properties (on page 112)

Sheet Setup Command (File Menu)

Defines the properties of the working sheet. You can display and modify the following
properties: the name, size, and scale used in the working sheet; and the properties of the
working sheet margin. You can also select the background sheet you want to use.
You can save settings only for the active working sheet. These settings can also be saved so
that they are used when you add a new working sheet to the document. To display a working
sheet, click View > Working Sheets.
You can use Tools > Customize to place the Sheet Setup button on a toolbar.
Sheet Setup Dialog Box

Defines the properties of the active drawing sheet.
See Also
Size and Scale Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box) (on page 135)
Background Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box) (on page 136)
Name Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box) (on page 136)
Size and Scale Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box)

Defines details for the drawing sheet size, scale, and print setup information.
Sheet size - Sets the size for the drawing sheet.
Same as print setup - Sets the drawing sheet size using the current print setup definition. For
example, if the printer is set up as 8 1/2 X 11, the drawing sheet size is set up as 8 1/2 X 11.
Standard - Defines the drawing sheet size from a list of standard ANSI and ISO paper sizes.
Custom - Defines the drawing sheet size according to the entered width and height values.
Drawing scale - Sets options for the scale of the drawing sheet.
Scale (1:1) - Sets the drawing scale to a 1:1 ratio. As a result, the representation of the objects
on the drawing sheet is the same size as the real- world object being described.
Select Scale - Sets the drawing scale to a standard ratio. The specified ratio defines the size of
the drawing in relation to the size of the real-world object. For a 2:1 ratio, the 2 represents the
size of the drawing and the 1 represents the size of the real-world object.
Custom - Defines a custom or scale ratio. The first value defines the distance on the drawing
sheet and the second value defines what this distance is equal to in the real world.
Paper units - Sets the paper units for the drawing sheet.
Units - Controls the display of numeric values in dialog boxes that define the size of non-scaled
objects. Some examples of non-scaled object values are text height and line width. This setting
does not affect dimension units.
Only value boxes use this option. For example, if you are working in feet and inches, you can
specify that you want to read and type values for text height in fractional inches. (1/8" instead of
0.00'-0.125")
When printing or plotting a drawing sheet, the non-scaled items appear on the printed
document with the exact size that you specify.

Precision - Sets the number of significant figures to display, or the accuracy of the unit readout
value. The precision setting does not change the numbers that you can type in the fields, only
the display of the numbers in the field. Values ending in 5 are rounded up to the next whole
number.
For example, if you set this control to .001 and you draw a line that is 2.1056 inches, then the
line length value is rounded. The length value appears as 2.106 inches. If you set this control to
0.01 and you type a line length value of 3.5 mm, the length value appears as 3.50 mm.
Background Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box)

Defines the color, margin settings, and background sheet display information.
Background sheet — Specifies the background sheet that you want to use for the working
sheet. If you have not created a background sheet, this box does not display any options. You
must first create a background sheet before you can select it from the list.
All graphics on the background sheet display on the working sheet. Changing the background
sheet updates the size and margin settings of the working sheet to the values defined by the
selected background sheet.
Show background — Displays the background sheet graphics on the selected working sheet.
Preview — Displays the range of the graphic to print on the printer paper.
Name Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box)

Defines the name of a drawing sheet. You can also change the name of a drawing sheet.
Sheet name — Specifies a name for the drawing sheet. You can also use this box to rename a
drawing sheet by selecting the sheet in the document before clicking Sheet Setup on the File
menu.
Print Command (File Menu)

Sends a copy of the active document to a specified plotter, printer, or file. Options are
available for defining the printing area, range, number of copies, and other printing
characteristics.
Before using this command, you must install and select a printer. For help on installing a printer,
see the Windows documentation.
Print Dialog Box

Controls the way a document prints.
Name — Specifies the printer that you want to use. You can select from a list of all the
configured printers available for printing.
Properties — Accesses the Printer Document Properties Dialog Box (on page 137).
Status — Displays the current status of the selected printer. This area is read-only.
Type — Displays the type of printer currently selected. This area is read-only.

Where — Displays the printer path or location for the currently selected printer. This area is
read-only.
Comment — Displays any comments you input during printer configuration. This area is
read-only.
Print to file — Prints the document to a file, instead of a printer. You specify the file's name on
the Print to file dialog box after you set the check box and click OK on the Print dialog box.
This saves a document to a file instead of routing it directly to a printer or plotter. Then, you can
print from a computer that does not have the application installed or print to a printer other than
the one you currently have installed.
Print Range — Displays options for selecting the print range.
All Sheets — Prints all drawing sheets in the active document.
Selected Sheets — Prints all the sheets that you selected as a composite document, as layers
all on one sheet of paper.
Sheets — Specifies the range of pages that you want to print. You can type the starting page
you want to print as the "From" value and the ending page you want to print as the "To" value.
In the Sheets box, type a range with a hyphen between the sheet numbers. For example, to
print sheets 3 through 7, type 3-7. This prints each sheet on a separate piece of paper.
Print Area — Accesses the Print Area dialog box. When you click this option and then click OK
on the dialog box, a set of crosshairs appears. You drag the crosshairs to define the area that
you want to print. Then, the Print Area dialog box automatically appears so that you can set
various options for printing the area that you selected.
Copies — Sets options for the number of copies you want to print.
Number Of Copies — Specifies the number of copies you want to print.
Collate — Organizes sheets when you print multiple copies.
Pure Black and White — Prints a black and white document.
Settings — Accesses the Settings dialog box.
See Also
Print to a File (on page 116)
Printer Document Properties Dialog Box

Sets properties for the current printer that you selected on the Print dialog box. The settings
available on this dialog box depend on the type of printer that you selected.
To get Help for various items on the dialog box, click the Question Mark in the upper
right corner of the dialog box and click the control that you want information about.
See Also
Print Area Dialog Box

Specifies the area that you want to print.
Scale — Controls the scale applied to the print area in a document.

Best Fit — Scales the selected drawing sheets or print area to fit the printer paper for the
configured device.
Manual Scale — Specifies the scale value to apply to the print range during printing. For
example, if the print range is a rectangle at 12 cm by 12 cm and you set a manual scale of 1:12,
then the printed range appears as 1 cm by 1 cm on the printer paper.
If you want a 1:1 drawing of the current sheet scale, you can set the paper length to 1 and the
design length to 1.
If you type values in the Paper Length and Design Length boxes, the red, blue, and black
boxes in the Preview area change to reflect the values.
Paper Length — Specifies the paper length for the document you want to print.
Design Length — Specifies a design length.
Origin — Adjusts the location of the effective print area on the printer paper.
Center — Positions the print area center to the center of the printer paper. If you do not set this
option, then the paper positions at bottom left to bottom left.
X origin — Sets a shift in the X direction from the origin.
Y origin — Sets a shift in the Y direction from the origin.
XY Range — Clears the previous defined print area and prompts you to define a new print area.
See Also
Settings Dialog Box

Specifies the print layout for the drawings to be printed. These settings apply to all drawings you
have selected to print. This dialog box opens when you click Settings on the Print dialog box.
Scale
Controls the scale applied to the print area in a document.

Best fit — Scales the selected drawing sheets or print area to fit the printer paper for the
configured device.
Manual scale — Specifies the scale value to apply to the print range during printing. For
example, if the print range is a rectangle at 12 cm by 12 cm and you set a manual scale of 1:12,
then the printed range appears to be 1 cm by 1 cm on the printer paper. If you want a 1:1
drawing of the current sheet scale, you can set the Paper length option to 1 and the Design
length option to 1.
Paper length — Specifies the paper length for the document you want to print with respect to
the Design length option.
Design length — Specifies a design length (size of the printed graphic) with respect to the
Paper length option.
Origin
Adjusts the origin of the graphic area, thereby changing the location of the effective print area on
the paper.
Center — Positions the print area center to the center of the printer paper. If you do not set this
option, then the paper positions at bottom left to bottom left.
X origin — Sets a shift in the x-direction from the origin.
Y origin — Sets a shift in the y-direction from the origin.
Preview
Displays dynamically how the graphic prints on the sheet as you change other options on the
dialog box.
For many of the options on this dialog box such as, Design length, Paper length, X, Y,
and so forth, when you change an option, the red, blue, and black boxes in the Preview area
change to reflect your new values. Therefore, you have a dynamic representation of how your
graphic fills the printed sheet.
Exit Command (File Menu)

Closes all open documents and exits the software. If you have made changes since the
document was last saved or if you have never saved a new document, you are prompted to
indicate if you want to save your changes. If you do not want to save your changes, click No. If
you want to save the changes, click Yes. If you do not want to close the document, click Cancel.
If you click Yes, the Save As dialog box is displayed so that you can give the document a name
and specify a directory and format to save it to.
Working Sheets Command (View Menu)

Displays all working sheets in a document. If a background sheet is attached to the working
sheet, the graphics on the background sheet are displayed on the working sheet. When you
attach a background sheet to a working sheet, the software automatically adjusts the size and
the margin of the working sheet to match the size and margin of the background sheet.

Drawing Basic Elements

An element is any line, circle, or other part of the drawing. The Draw toolbar on the left side of
the drawing sheet contains most of the buttons that you can use to draw any type of basic
geometric element—freeform shapes, lines, arcs, circles, and so forth.
You can place most basic elements with just a few clicks. For example, if you want to place a
line, you can click (Line/Arc Continuous) on the Draw toolbar. Then, click two points to
indicate where to start and finish the line. If you do not want to place another line, you can
right-click to end the operation.
Right-clicking ends most operations in the software.
You can also place the line by clicking (Line/Arc Continuous) and then clicking and
dragging the pointer. When you release the mouse, the line appears on the drawing sheet. With
this method, you drag the pointer as if it were a pen. You can draw most elements, such as
rectangles, circles, and arcs, with this method, sometimes called mouse-down drawing. The
mouse-down method is typically used to place most elements in conceptual sketching and
modification.
If you want to place a precise line, click (Line/Arc Continuous), type values into the ribbon
that appears, and then press ENTER. You can then click on the drawing sheet to place the line.
This method, sometimes called mouse-up drawing, is typically used for precision placement and
when you want to draw elements that are related to each other.
In some cases, you might want to click points on the drawing sheet and type values in the ribbon
to place an element. For example, you can click (Line/Arc Continuous) and then type 3.0 in
the Length box on the ribbon box and press ENTER to lock the length value.
When a line that is three inches long appears next to the pointer, you can click anywhere on the
drawing sheet to indicate where to place one end of the line. Then, you move the line around
and click again to set the line's orientation angle.

If you do not like the results of what you drew, you can click Undo on the Main toolbar. If you
want to repeat an action, click Redo on the Main toolbar.
See Also
Drawing FreeForm Shapes (on page 163)
Drawing Lines
Drawing Squares, Rectangles, and Polygons
Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 144)
Drawing Lines
If you want to place a line, you click Line/Arc Continuous on the Draw toolbar. Then, you
click a point on the drawing sheet to indicate where to start the line. You click a second point to
indicate where to end the line. If you do not want to place another line, right-click to end the
operation.
You can also place the line by clicking Line/Arc Continuous and then clicking and dragging
the pointer. When you release the mouse, the line appears on the drawing sheet.
If you want to place a precise line, you can click Line/Arc Continuous, type values into the
ribbon that appears, and then press ENTER. You then click on the drawing sheet to place the
line.
You can also use a combination of clicks and ribbon input to place the line. For example, you
can type a line length in the ribbon box to lock the length value and then set the line's orientation
angle graphically. You can set the color and line type by clicking a style in the Style list box.
See Also
Draw a Point (on page 142)
Draw a Line (on page 141)
Draw a Line with FreeSketch (on page 166)
Draw a Line
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous .
2. Click the point where you want the line to begin.
3. Click the point where you want the line to end. This action defines the length and rotation
angle of the line.
 Right-click to end the line.

 To draw a series of connected lines, click at the point where you want each line
segment to end, and then right- click.
If you close the shape, the command restarts so you begin drawing again.
 Instead of clicking to draw the end points, you can type values on the ribbon bar. You can
also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input.
 Instead of clicking several different points to draw a line, you can drag the pointer to draw a
line.
 You can press ESC to end a line or a line segment.
 You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a
line.
See Also
Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 156)
Draw a Point
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Point .
2. Click to place a point.
 Instead of clicking to place the point, you can type values in the coordinate boxes on the
ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon bar input. The coordinate
origin is located at the bottom left corner of the window.
point.
See Also
Drawing Line/Point Commands and Ribbons

This section contains topics about the commands and ribbons used to draw lines and create
points.
Line Command
Formats a new line as you place it.
Line Ribbon
Style — Sets the drawing style.
Line Color — Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the
Colors dialog box.

Line Type — Sets the drawing line type and style.
Line Width — Sets the line width.

Line — Switches the drawing mode from arc to line.
Arc — Switches the drawing mode from line to arc.
Length — Sets the length of a line. This box accepts only positive values.
Angle — Sets the angle of a line. This box accepts positive or negative values. A positive value
is counterclockwise from the X axis, and a negative value is clockwise from the X axis.
See Also
Draw Connected Lines and Arcs (on page 148)
Point Command
Draws a point. The point is displayed as a filled circle.
See Also
Point Ribbon (on page 143)
Point Ribbon
Colors dialog box.

X — Sets a value for the x coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option.
Y — Sets a value for the y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option.
See Also

Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses

If you want to draw a circle, you can click Circle by Center Point on the Draw toolbar.
Then, you click a point to define the center of the circle. To place the circle, you click a second
point to define the distance of the circle radius from the first point. You can use other commands
on the Draw toolbar to place arcs, ellipses, and other types of circles.
To place circles, click Circle by Center Point and while holding the mouse button down,
draw freehand. After you close the loop, the circle appears.
You can also place a precise circle by clicking Circle by Center Point and then typing
values into the ribbon. After you press ENTER, a circle appears around the pointer. You can
then place the defined circle by clicking the point you want on the drawing sheet.
See Also
Draw a Circle by Center Point

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Circle by Center Point .
2. Click the location where you want the center point.

3. Click to define the radius.
 Instead of clicking to define the radius, you can type values on the ribbon bar. You can also
use a combination of graphic and ribbon input.
 Instead of clicking several different points to draw a circle, you can draw a diagonal line and
the software automatically changes it to a circle.

circle.
See Also
Circle by Center Point Command (on page 147)
Draw a Circle by Defining Three Points

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Circle by 3 Points .
2. Click three points on the circumference of the circle.

 Instead of clicking several different points to draw a circle, you can draw a diagonal line and
 Instead of clicking to define the circumference of the circle, you can type values on the
ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon bar input.
circle.
See Also
Circle by 3 Points Command (on page 147)
Draw a Circle Tangent to One or Two Elements

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Tangent Circle .
2. Move the pointer along an element until the software recognizes a point on element
relationship or a key point.
3. Click to make the circle tangent.
4. Do one of the following to define the radius:
 Move the pointer until the circle is in the position that you want, and then click.
 Move the pointer until the software recognizes a tangent or key point relationship with
another element, and then click.
 Instead of clicking several different points to draw a circle, you can draw a diagonal line, and
 You can define the radius first to make a circle tangent to the first element, but not fixed in
one position on it.
 After you type a value in the Diameter or Radius box, move the pointer along the element
until the software recognizes a point on element relationship, and then click. The circle is
then displayed dynamically, and you can move it along the element freely until you make it
tangent to another element or key point.
circle.
See Also

Drawing Circles Commands and Ribbon

This section contains topics about the commands and ribbons used to draw circles.
Circle by Center Point Command

Draws a circle using a center point and radius.
See Also
Draw a Circle by Center Point (on page 144)
Circle by 3 Points Command

Draws a circle using three points that define the circumference.
See Also
Draw a Circle by Defining Three Points (on page 145)
Circle Ribbon
Sets options for placing circles.
Colors dialog box.

Diameter — Sets the diameter of the circle.
Radius — Sets the radius.
See Also
Circle by 3 Points Command (on page 147)
Circle by Center Point Command (on page 147)
Draw a Circle Tangent to One or Two Elements (on page 146)

Tangent Circle Command

Draws a circle tangent to one or two elements.
See Also
Draw a Circle Tangent to One or Two Elements (on page 146)
Draw Connected Lines and Arcs

2. This command starts in line mode by default. If you want to start by drawing an arc, press
SHIFT + A.
3. Click the location to begin the line or arc.
4. Click the location to end the line or arc. You can use intent zones to specify if you want to
draw a tangent or perpendicular arc.
5. If you are drawing an arc, click a point on the arc to define the radius.
After you draw an arc, the command switches back to line mode automatically. You
can switch back to arc mode if you want to draw another arc.
6. Continue drawing lines or arcs, pressing SHIFT + A to switch to arc mode and SHIFT + L to
switch to line mode.
7. Right-click to finish.
If you close the shape, the command restarts so you begin drawing again.
 Instead of pressing SHIFT + L or SHIFT + A to switch modes, you can use Line or Arc on
the ribbon.
 You can make the first line or arc tangent or perpendicular to an element. First, move the
pointer to the element to which you want to be tangent. Click when the software recognizes
a Point On the relationship. Then use the intent zones to indicate if you want the line to be
tangent or perpendicular.
 Instead of clicking locations on the drawing sheet, you can type values on the ribbon. You
can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input.
 Using the ribbon boxes to type values does not affect the settings of the Line or Arc modes.

See Also
Arc by Center Point Command (on page 154)
Arc by 3 Points Command (on page 154)
Draw a Curve
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Curve
 To draw an open curve, set the Curve Type box on the ribbon to Open.
 To draw a closed curve, set the Curve Type box on the ribbon to Closed.
3. Click three or more points on the drawing sheet. These points represent nodes on the curve.
You must place at least three points to draw a curve.
4. Right-click to end the curve.
 You can drag the pointer to draw the shape of a curve. Instead of clicking several different
points to draw a curve, you can draw a diagonal line and the software automatically changes
it to a curve.
 The nodes at the start point and end point of a curve are always smooth.
 You can use Insert Node on the shortcut menu to add nodes to a curve.
 You can use Delete Node on the shortcut menu to delete nodes from a curve.
curve.
See Also
Change the Curve Type (on page 152)
Draw a Curve with FreeForm (on page 164)

Draw an Arc by Center Point

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Arc by Center Point
2. Click the point where you want the center point.
3. Click where you want to begin and end the sweep of the arc.
You can change the arc direction by moving the pointer.
 Instead of clicking to define the radius, you can type a value on the ribbon bar. You can also
use a combination of graphic and ribbon input.
 Instead of clicking several different points to draw an arc, you can draw a diagonal line and
the software automatically changes it to an arc.
 You can use the boxes on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit an
arc.
See Also
Draw an Arc by Defining Three Points

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Arc by 3 Points .
2. Click the location to begin the sweep of the arc.
 Click the location that you want as midpoint of the arc, and then click the location that
you want to end the sweep of the arc.

 Click the location that you want to end the sweep of the arc, and then click the location
that you want as midpoint of the arc.
Use the intent zones at the first and second points to specify if the third point is
between the first two or beyond one of the first two.
 Instead of clicking to define the sweep and the midpoint, you can type values on the ribbon.
You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input.
 Instead of clicking several different points to draw an arc, you can draw a diagonal line and
the software automatically changes it to an arc.
 You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit an
arc.
See Also
Arc by 3 Points Command (on page 154)
Draw an Arc Tangent to Two Elements

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Tangent Arc .
2. Click an element to which you want the new arc to be tangent. You can click the end point of
a line or curved element, or any point on the element.
3. Move the pointer through one of the intent zones displayed at the position you just clicked.
If the command dynamics show an arc perpendicular to the existing element, move the
pointer back to the intent zones and exit through a different quadrant.
4. When the command dynamics show an arc that is tangent to the first element, move the
pointer to a position where the software recognizes the tangent relationship with another
element and then click.

 Instead of clicking to define the radius and sweep of the arc, you can type values on the
ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon bar input.
arc.
See Also
Change the Curve Type

1. Select the curve.
 To change an open curve to a closed curve, set the Curve Type box on the ribbon to
Closed.
 To change a closed curve to an open curve, select the node you want to open, and then
set the Curve Type box on the ribbon to Open.
If you do not select a node, the software opens the curve at the node that was automatically
activated when you selected the curve.
 You can use the arrows on the ribbon to select a node.

See Also
Draw a Curve (on page 149)
Insert a Node into a Curve

1. Locate the curve and right-click to display the shortcut menu.
2. On the shortcut menu, click Insert Node.
3. Position the pointer at the location to add a node.
4. Click to insert the node.

You can use Delete Node on the shortcut menu to delete nodes from a curve.

See Also
Change the Node Type

1. Select the curve.
2. Select the node you want to change.
3. On the ribbon, click the button for the node type you want to change the node to: Smooth,
Symmetric, or Cusp.

See Also
Delete a Node from a Curve

1. Locate the curve and right-click to display the shortcut menu.
2. On the shortcut menu, click Delete Node.
3. Select the node you want to delete.

See Also

Drawing Arcs Commands and Ribbons

This section contains topics about the commands and ribbons used to draw arcs.
Arc by Center Point Command

Draws an arc using three points. The first point defines the center of the arc and the next two
points define the sweep.
See Also
Draw an Arc by Center Point (on page 150)
Arc by 3 Points Command

Draws an arc using three points. The first point defines an end point. You can then either
define a point on the arc and then the end point, or the end point and then a point on the arc.
The end points are not tangent or perpendicular to other elements.
See Also
Draw an Arc by Defining Three Points (on page 150)
Arc Ribbon
Colors dialog box.

Sweep — Sets the sweep angle.
See Also
Draw an Arc Tangent to Two Elements (on page 151)
Draw an Arc by Center Point (on page 150)

Curve Command
Draws a smooth, open, or closed curve. A series of curves can have smooth, symmetric and
cusp nodes. The node at the start point and the node at the end point of a curve are always
smooth.
See Also
Curve Ribbon
Colors dialog box.
Open — Sets the curve type to Open.
Closed — Sets the curve type to Closed.

The following options appear on the Curve ribbon only when a curve or curve
element is selected.
Previous Node — Activates the previous node on the curve. This button is available only
when you have selected a curve to edit.
Next Node — Activates the next node on the curve. This button is available only when you
have selected a curve to edit.
Symmetric — Gives a curve the same curvature on each side of the selected node. This
button is available only when you have selected a curve to edit.

Smooth — Gives a curve a different curvature on each side of the selected node. The start
point and end point of a curve is always a smooth node. This button is available only when you
have selected a curve to edit.
Cusp — Makes a curve bend sharply at the selected node. This button is available only
when you have selected a curve to edit.
See Also
Line/Arc Continuous Command

Draws one line or a series of connected lines. When you draw a series of lines, the second
point of one line is the first point of the next line.
You can also draw a continuous series of lines and arcs that can be perpendicular or tangent to
each other. You can create an open or closed shape by drawing lines and arcs in any
combination. The last point of the line or arc is the first point of the next line or arc.
The Line/Arc Continuous command starts in line mode by default. If you want to start by
drawing an arc, press SHIFT + A. While drawing, you can toggle between the two modes by
pressing SHIFT + A for arc mode or pressing SHIFT + L for line mode.
See Also
Draw Connected Lines and Arcs (on page 148)

Tangent Arc Command

Draws an arc tangent or perpendicular to one or two elements. The first point defines one end
of the arc. If you place the first point on a key point of an element you want the arc to be tangent
or perpendicular to, then the second point defines the sweep.
If you place the first point in free space, then this command works like Arc by 3 Points. In this
case the first point defines an end point. You can then either define a point on the arc and then
the end point, or the end point and then a point on the arc.
While in dynamics for the second point, you can set the orientation of the arc by passing
the pointer through one of the four quadrants of the first point's intent zone.
See Also
Insert Node Command (Shortcut Menu)

Adds a node to a curve.
Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must locate the curve.
See Also
Delete Node Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 157)
Insert a Node into a Curve (on page 152)
Delete Node Command (Shortcut Menu)

Deletes a node from a curve.
Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must locate a curve.
For more information, see Curve Ribbon (on page 155).
See Also
Insert a Node into a Curve (on page 152)
Delete a Node from a Curve (on page 153)

Draw an Ellipse by Center Point

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Ellipse by Center .
2. Click the location for the center of the primary axis.
3. Click the location to end the primary axis. This action defines the length of the primary axis
and the rotation angle.
4. Click a location on one side of the primary axis. This action defines the secondary axis.
The primary axis can be shorter than the secondary axis.
 Instead of clicking to define the axes and rotation angle of the ellipse, you can type values
on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input.
 Instead of clicking several different points to draw an ellipse, you can draw a diagonal line
and the software automatically changes it to an ellipse.
ellipse.
See Also
Ellipse by Center Point Command (on page 159)
Draw an Ellipse by Defining Three Points

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Ellipse by 3 Points .
2. Click the location to begin the primary axis.
3. Click the location to end the primary axis. This action defines the length of the primary axis
and the rotation angle.
4. Click a location on one side of the primary axis. This action defines the secondary axis.

The primary axis can be shorter than the secondary axis.
 Instead of clicking to define the primary and secondary axes of an ellipse, you can type
values on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input.
 Instead of clicking several different points to draw an ellipse, you can draw a diagonal line,
and the software automatically changes it to an ellipse.
ellipse.
See Also
Ellipse by 3 Points Command (on page 159)
Draw Ellipses Commands and Ribbon

This section contains topics about the commands and ribbons used to draw ellipses.
Ellipse by Center Point Command

Draws an ellipse using the center point and two edge points. The center point and the next
point define half the length of the primary axis and the rotation angle. The last point defines the
secondary axis.
See Also
Draw an Ellipse by Center Point (on page 158)
Ellipse by 3 Points Command

Draws an ellipse using three edge points. The first two points define the length of the primary
axis and the rotation angle. The last point defines the secondary axis.
See Also
Draw an Ellipse by Defining Three Points (on page 158)
Ellipse Ribbon
Colors dialog box.

Primary — Sets the length of the primary axis. The ellipse orientation is based on the primary
axis.
Secondary — Sets the length of the secondary axis. The secondary axis is perpendicular to the
primary axis.
Angle — Sets the angle of the primary axis of the ellipse. Zero degrees is horizontal to the X
axis. The angle increases in the counterclockwise direction.
See Also
Ellipse by Center Point Command (on page 159)
Ellipse by 3 Points Command (on page 159)
Create (clone) a Symbol Using Elements of an Existing Symbol

1. In Catalog Manager open the drawing that you want to clone (copy) elements from.
2. Click the Select Tool , and select the elements of the symbol that you want to clone.
When selected the chosen elements change color.
3. Click Create Symbol and move the cursor onto the drawing sheet.
The Create Symbol command cannot be selected if no elements have been selected.
4. Click to place the origin point where you want it to be in your new symbol, the Save as
Symbol dialog box opens.
5. On the Save as Symbol dialog box, type a name for your new symbol and click Save.
Drawing Squares, Rectangles, and Polygons

To draw a rectangle or square, click Rectangle on the Draw toolbar. Then, click two
different points to define the shape. If you want to precisely define dimensions, you can type
values into the ribbon and press ENTER.

If you place dimensions on a rectangle or square, these are always driven dimensions. This
means that if you edit the value of the dimension, the object does not change. You need to edit
the width and height values on the ribbon to change the dimensions of the rectangle or square.
Also, you cannot ungroup a rectangle or square into individual lines.
If you want to place a rectangle or square that has driving dimensions, you need to select
Line/Arc Continuous on the Draw toolbar and place four separate lines in the shape of a
rectangle or square.
See Also
Draw a Rectangle or Square with FreeSketch (on page 168)
Draw a Rectangle or Square (on page 161)
Draw a Rectangle or Square

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Rectangle .
2. Click the location for one corner of the rectangle or square.
3. Click to define the rotation angle and the width of the rectangle or square.
 To draw a rectangle, click to define the height.
 To draw a square, hold the SHIFT key, and then click. The command automatically
makes the height equal to the width.
 Instead of clicking to draw the rectangle or square, you can type values in the Width,
Height, and Angle boxes on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and
ribbon bar input.

 Instead of clicking several different points to draw a rectangle, you can draw a diagonal line
and the software automatically changes it to a rectangle.
rectangle or square.
 If you place dimensions on a rectangle, they are always driven dimensions.
 You cannot ungroup a rectangle into individual lines.
See Also
Drawing Rectangle Command and Ribbon

This section contains topics about the commands and ribbons used to draw rectangles.
Rectangle Command
Draws a rectangle using three points. The first two points define the width and rotation angle
of the rectangle, and the third point defines the height. You can also draw a square with this
command.
See Also
Rectangle Ribbon (on page 162)
Rectangle Ribbon
Style - Sets the drawing style.
Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the
Colors dialog box.
Line Type - Sets the drawing line type and style.
Line Width - Sets the line width.

Width — Sets the width of the rectangle or square.
Height — Sets the height of the rectangle or square.

Angle - Sets the orientation angle of the element. Zero degrees is horizontal to the X-axis. The
angle increases in the counterclockwise direction.
See Also
Drawing FreeForm Shapes

As you draw, you can place precisely defined lines, arcs, and circles by clicking and typing
values in the ribbon. You can also use tools to quickly sketch a design and let the software
convert it into a precision drawing.
FreeSketch and FreeForm allow you to quickly place fluid lines and let the software
convert these into precision shapes. FreeSketch draws lines, arcs, circles, and rectangles,
and FreeForm draws curves (splines). These commands can be found under Curve .
You can begin sketching anywhere on the drawing sheet. You can draw in free space or use key
points or end points of elements as reference points.
How FreeSketch and FreeForm Work

As you drag the pointer, a rough sketch of your design appears. When you release the pointer,
the software recognizes the shapes in your sketch and turns the sketch into a precise drawing.
You can control the accuracy of the shape recognition using the ribbon options.
FreeSketch and FreeForm Options

FreeSketch Adjust controls how closely FreeSketch interprets mouse movements. When
Adjust On is set, the software interprets all lines as either horizontal or vertical, and all arcs as

tangent. The first figure shows how the software interprets a rough sketch when Adjust On is
set.
The next figure shows how the software interprets a rough sketch when Adjust Off is set.
FreeForm Smoothing controls how closely the software interprets mouse movements when
drawing curves. The first figure shows how FreeForm interprets a rough sketch when
Smoothing On is set.
The next figure shows how the software interprets a rough sketch when Smoothing Off is set.
See Also
Draw a Circle with FreeSketch (on page 167)
Draw an Arc with FreeSketch (on page 167)
Draw a Curve with FreeForm

1. On the Draw toolbar, click FreeForm .
2. Drag to draw a curve.
 Smooth allows the software to adjust the geometry that you draw.
 When Smooth is off, the software interprets the exact movements of your pointer.
 When Smooth is on, the software creates smooth, symmetric, or cusp curves.
 You can begin or end your drawing using the end point or key point of an element.

curve.
See Also
Draw with FreeSketch

1. On the Draw toolbar, click FreeSketch .
2. On the ribbon, set the element type buttons for the types of shapes you want to draw.
Drag to draw a shape and then release the mouse button.
1. FreeSketch interprets your sketch and places arcs,

lines, circles, and rectangles when you release the mouse button. You can go on to draw
more complex drawings by clicking FreeSketch.
 Adjust allows the software to adjust the geometry that you draw.
 When Adjust is off, the software interprets the exact movements of your pointer.
 When Adjust is on, the software interprets lines as horizontal or vertical and arcs as tangent
to the connected elements.
 The software recognizes relationships at the start points and end points of elements. If
Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.

 You can use End Point on the SmartSketch dialog box to begin or end your drawing using
the end point or key point of an element, and Point On to begin or end your drawing at any
point on an element.
 You can set any combination of element type buttons to specify if you want to draw lines,
arcs, circles, and rectangles or any combination.
 You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit
geometry that you have drawn with FreeSketch.
See Also
FreeSketch Command (on page 170)
Draw a Line with FreeSketch

2. On the ribbon, set the Line element type and clear the other element type buttons.
3. Drag to draw a line or a series of connected lines.
 When Adjust is on, the software interprets the lines as horizontal or vertical when you finish
drawing.
 The software recognizes relationships at the start point and end point of the line.
 When you set the Line and Arc element types, you can draw connected lines and arcs.
line.
See Also

Draw a Circle with FreeSketch

1. On the Draw toolbar, click FreeSketch
2. On the ribbon, set the Circle element type and clear the other element type buttons.
3. Drag to sketch the shape of the circle or the diameter of the circle.
 When Adjust is on, the software interprets your pointer movements as a circle.
circle.
See Also
Draw an Arc with FreeSketch

2. On the ribbon, set the Arc element type and clear the other element type buttons.
3. Drag to draw an arc.
 When Adjust is on, the software interprets arcs as tangent to the connected elements.
 The software recognizes relationships at the start point and end point of the arc.
 When you set the Line and Arc element types, you can draw connected lines and arcs.
arc.
See Also

Draw Connected Lines and Arcs with FreeSketch

2. On the ribbon, set the line and arc element types with Element Type, and clear the other
element types.
3. Drag to draw a line or arc. When you stop moving the pointer, do not release the mouse
button.
4. Drag to draw a series of line segments and arcs, continuing to hold the mouse button as you
draw each line and arc.
5. When you have finished, release the mouse button.
 Use Adjust to adjust the geometry you draw.

 When Adjust is on, the software interprets the lines as horizontal or vertical and the arcs as
tangent to the connected elements.

 The software recognizes relationships at the start point and end point of the line.
 You can use the boxes on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a line
or an arc.
See Also
Draw a Rectangle or Square with FreeSketch

If FreeSketch is not displayed, click the Curve fly-out menu and

select it from the list.
2. On the ribbon, set the rectangle Element Type and clear the other Element Type buttons.

3. Drag the pointer to sketch the diagonal of the rectangle.
 When Adjust is on, the software interprets the diagonal as a rectangle or square.
 You can use the buttons on the ribbon and shortcut menu to edit a rectangle or square.
See Also
FreeForm and FreeSketch Commands and Ribbons

This section contains topics about the FreeForm and FreeSketch commands and ribbons.
FreeForm Command
Draws freeform curves, or splines.
See Also
FreeForm Ribbon (on page 169)
FreeForm Ribbon
Colors dialog box.
Smoothing On — Draws cusp, smooth, and symmetric curves in the precision drawing by
recognizing these shapes in the rough sketch.

Smoothing Off — Draws elements that closely resemble the movements of your pointer,
without smoothing them into cusp, smooth, and symmetric curves.
See Also
FreeForm Command (on page 169)
FreeSketch Command
Draws lines, arcs, rectangles, and circles by converting a sketch into a precision drawing.
You can specify which of these elements you want to draw using the ribbon.
See Also
Draw a Circle with FreeSketch (on page 167)
Draw an Arc with FreeSketch (on page 167)
FreeSketch Ribbon
Colors dialog box.
Adjust On — Draws all lines recognized in the rough sketch as horizontal or vertical in the
precision drawing, and draws all arcs recognized in the rough sketch as tangent in the precision
drawing.
Adjust Off — Does not adjust the orientation of lines and arcs in your rough sketch.
Line — Draws lines in the precision drawing by recognizing them in the rough sketch.
Arc — Draws arcs in the precision drawing by recognizing them in the rough sketch.
Circle — Draws circles in the precision drawing by recognizing them in the rough sketch.
Rectangle — Draw rectangles in the precision drawing by recognizing them in the rough
sketch.
See Also

Mechanism Modeling
You can use mechanism modeling to check for clearances on moving parts. Mechanism
modeling is a set of elements that are related to each other so that one group of geometry
moves relative to another when the dimensions change. You can use any kind of elements for
mechanism modeling, but symbols are the easiest elements to use.
Symbols are easy to use because they act as one piece of geometry when you want to
reposition them. For example, if you draw four lines that form a rectangle, you might want to
connect the lines so that the rectangle has predictable behavior when rotated by a dimensional
change. To do this, you must connect every line. The length of each line, the connections of the
end points, and the angle between each line and its adjacent line must be defined as shown in
the picture.
If the same four lines were constructed and made into a symbol, the orientation and length of
each line would always remain constant regardless of the orientation of the symbol. No
relationships or dimensions for the geometry making up the symbol would be necessary as
shown in the picture. If you change the angle from 90 degrees to 45 degrees, the geometry
stays together with the symbol as a rigid body.
The easiest way to create a mechanism is to use rigid body symbols and constrain the symbols
to move like you want. Symbols can have two behaviors: rotating and non-rotating. The default
behavior, non-rotating, means that the symbol cannot be rotated. The other behavior, rotating,
allows rotation by relationships. This allows the symbol to rotate.
Example
The field pump mechanism serves as a good example of a kinematics animation. The
mechanism is made up of five symbols and only one dimension to control the mechanism
movement. If you select the dimension and change the value of the dimension from 12 degree
to 60 degrees, all the geometry moves together. The other symbols that are connected to each
other move to their proper position based on the angle applied and relationships to the symbols
and the behavior applied to each symbol.
Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements

The software provides several simple methods for utilizing existing elements. You can quickly
move or copy an existing element or group of elements onto a drawing sheet. Moving or copying
elements saves you time by eliminating the need to re-create information, as well as help you
maintain accurate graphic data throughout a project.
Selecting Elements
You can select individual or multiple elements using the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar. When
you click the Select Tool, the pointer changes to an arrow with a locate zone indicator at the
end. As you move the pointer, any element that the locate zone passes over is displayed in the
highlight color. When an element is highlighted you can click to select it.
You can select more than one element at a time by clicking the Select Tool and then holding
the SHIFT or CTRL key as you click the elements you want to select. Or, you can click the
Select Tool and then drag the mouse to fence elements.

You can also use a tool called QuickPick to select elements that overlap. To use it, hover the
Select Tool pointer over the elements. When an ellipsis displays you can left-click or right-click
to display the number of selectable elements. You can move the pointer over the numbers;
when the element that you want highlights, you can click on the corresponding number to select
it.
Moving Elements
The software provides several methods for moving elements. You can drag an element with the
Select Tool or specify precision points with Move on the Change toolbar. You can also use
PinPoint with the Select Tool to move an element a precise distance in X and Y relative to a
known position on your drawing.
Copying Elements
You can copy elements with one of many methods:
 You can select an object and click Copy on the Main toolbar. The selected item is placed on
the Clipboard. Then, when you click Paste on the Main toolbar, the item is placed on the
drawing sheet. The element will not change from its original form.
 You can copy one or more elements by clicking the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar. After
the pointer changes to show that the element can be copied, hold the CTRL key and drag
the copy to its new location.
Cutting and Deleting Elements

You can cut an element by clicking Cut on the Main toolbar. The element is placed on the
Clipboard. You can then use Paste to place the element in the current document or into other
documents.
If you do not Paste the element after cutting, it will be permanently removed from
the document.
You can permanently remove an element by selecting the element and pressing Delete on your
keyboard. You can also permanently remove an element by clicking Edit on the Main toolbar
and then selecting Delete.
See Also
Moving Elements (on page 178)
Copying and Pasting Elements (on page 181)
Cutting or Deleting Elements (on page 190)

Selecting Elements
To select an element, you must use Select Tool at the top of the Draw toolbar. You can select
lines, arcs, or annotations, such as dimensions or fills. You can also select element groups,
embedded or linked objects, symbols, or handles on elements that indicate relationships.
Selecting Single Elements

To select an element, you can click the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar.
When you click Select Tool, the pointer changes to an arrow with a locate zone indicator at the
end. As you move the pointer, any element that the locate zone passes over is displayed in the
highlight color. When an element is highlighted, you can click to select it.
When you select an individual element, the following things happen:

 The element changes to the selection color. You can change the selection color using
Options on the Tools menu.
 The element's handles are displayed. Handles are solid squares at significant positions on a
selected element, such as end points and center points. Handles allow you to directly modify
the element—drag a handle to change the element's shape. Although you can select more
than one element at a time, only one element can have handles at a time.
 The element's important properties are displayed on a ribbon.
 If the element is linked or embedded into the current document, selecting it allows you to
double-click it for editing.
When you select multiple elements or grouped elements, they change to the selection color.
Selecting Multiple Elements

You can select more than one element at a time by clicking the Select Tool and then holding
the SHIFT or CTRL key as you click the elements you want to select. Or, you can click the
Select Tool and then drag the mouse to fence elements.
You can use the ribbon to select whether you want only elements completely enclosed by the
fence to be selected or any element that is partly enclosed by the fence. Many manipulation
commands, like delete, move, copy, and rotate, act upon all elements in the selection set.
Selecting an Element That Overlaps Other Elements

If you want to select an element that overlaps other elements, and you cannot highlight the
element you want by moving the pointer over it, you can use a tool called QuickPick. To use it,
hover the pointer over the exact intersection of the elements. When the software displays an
ellipsis, or three small circles, by the pointer, you can left-click or right-click to display a small
toolbar that shows the number of selectable elements. You can move the pointer over the
numbers; and, when the element that you want highlights, you can click on the corresponding
number to select it.

Clearing Elements
To clear an element or a group of elements, you can click any point on the drawing sheet.
See Also
Move an Element with the Select Tool (on page 180)
Copy an Element with the Select Tool (on page 182)
Select an Element
1. On the Main toolbar, click Select Tool.
 To select one element, click it.
 To select more than one element hold the SHIFT or CTRL Key and click each element.
 To select more than one element at once, drag to fence the objects.
 To select one of several overlapping elements, use QuickPick.
 To select all elements, press CTRL + A or right-click in the Drawing sheet and click
Select All.
 When the Select Tool is active, selectable elements highlight as you pass the pointer over
them. When the element you want to select is highlighted, click to select it.
 You can use the ribbon commands to set element selection options.
 You can change the element highlight and selection colors with the Tools > Options
command.
Select a Graphical Element with QuickPick

QuickPick helps you to select elements that overlap each other.
1. Position the pointer over the element you want to select and pause the pointer there.
2. When the pointer changes to an ellipsis (three dots), click. The software displays the
QuickPick tool near the pointer, with a button for each selectable element.
3. Move the pointer over QuickPick without clicking to highlight the corresponding elements.

4. When the element you want to select is highlighted, click the corresponding button on the
QuickPick tool.
 When the Select Tool is active, selectable elements highlight as you pass the pointer over
them. When the element you want to select is highlighted, click to select it.
 You can use the ribbon commands to set element selection options.
 You can change the element highlight and selection colors with the Tools > Options
command.
Clear a Selection
Do one of the following:
 Click in free space.
 Right-click in free space.
 Select another element without holding the SHIFT or CTRL key.
 To clear the selection of one element and leave other elements selected, click the element
while holding the SHIFT key.
Undo Actions
 To undo the most recent action, on the Main toolbar, click Undo .
 To undo more than one action, click Undo List on the Main toolbar, and then select the
actions you want to undo.
You can do this action only if you have placed Undo List button on the Main toolbar. You
can place the button by selecting Tools > Customize > Edit, and then dragging it over to the
Main toolbar.
When operations are performed in the or in the Catalog Manager Drawing Console,
any actions in the Catalog Manager Undo buffer are removed. Consequently, any undo actions
must be performed manually.
See Also
Redo Actions (on page 176)

Redo Actions
 To reverse the most recent Undo action, click Redo on the Main toolbar. The Redo
command is not enabled until an Undo action has been performed.
 To reverse more than one Undo action, click Redo List , and then select the actions you
want to perform.
You can perform a redo list action only if you have placed Redo List on a menu or on
the Main toolbar. Select Tools > Customize > Edit, and then drag the button over to the
menu or Main toolbar.
See Also
Undo Actions (on page 175)
Selecting Elements Commands and Ribbon

This section contains topics about the commands and ribbons used to select elements.
Redo Command
Reverses the most recent Undo action performed.
See Also
Redo List Command

Lists the most recent Redo actions if multiple Undo operations have been performed.
To use Redo List, select Tools > Customize > Edit, and then place it on a menu or on the
Main toolbar.
See Also
Undo Actions (on page 175)
Select All Command

Selects all visible elements in a window.
In addition to clicking Edit > Select All, you can also access this command when you
position the pointer in the document and right-click.

Select Tool
Changes the pointer to the arrow-shaped selection pointer so that you can select, modify,
and manipulate elements. The circle at the end of the pointer arrow is the locate zone.
See Also
Select Tool Ribbon (on page 177)
Select Tool Ribbon

The default selection ribbon is displayed only when nothing is selected. After you select an
object, the selection ribbon is replaced with a ribbon bar for editing the selected object.
To find out the name of an option on the ribbon, pause the pointer over an option and read
the ToolTip.
Inside — Specifies that elements inside the fence are selected.
Overlapping — Specifies that elements overlapped by the fence are selected, as well as
elements inside the fence.
Top Down — Specifies that groups of elements are located as opposed to individual
elements in a group.
Bottom Up — Specifies that individual elements in a group are located as opposed to the
whole group.
Expand — Displays another ribbon depending on the items that you selected on the drawing
sheet. This button appears when you select ten or more items on the drawing sheet. When you
click it, another ribbon appears.
The options that appear depend on the types of elements that you selected. For example, if you
select eleven lines, then the Line ribbon appears. If you select several types of items, then only
the common properties for those types of elements appear on the Select Tool ribbon. For
example, if you select nine lines and a circle, then the ribbon displays the Style, Line Type,
Width, and Color options. For more information about the options that appear, see the Help
topic for the selected element's ribbon.
If the items that you selected have no common properties, then no options will appear if you
click Expand. For example, if you select a dimension and ten lines and then click Expand, a
ribbon does not appear.
See Also
Undo Command
Reverses an action. You can change the number of actions that can be undone using
Options. You then click the General tab on the Options dialog box.

Undo List Command (Edit Menu)

Reverses an action based on what you select on the list.
 You can change the number of actions that can be undone using Options.
 View manipulations are not included in the action list.
To use Undo List, select Tools > Customize > Edit, and then drag it over to a menu or
the Main toolbar.
See Also
Moving Elements
You can move elements on the drawing sheet with one of several methods:
 Dragging elements with the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar.
 Specifying precision points with Move/Copy on the Change toolbar.
 Moving elements in small increments with Nudge on the Change toolbar.
You can also click Scale and Rotate on the Change toolbar to move elements.
Using the Select Tool

To move an element, you must first select it with Select Tool on the Draw toolbar. You can
drag the selected element to move it without changing its shape.
The element's handles do not need to be displayed for you to move it. If they are displayed,
and you want to move the element and not modify it, position the pointer so it is not over a
handle.

You can move an element with precision if you use the relationship indicators.
When you modify a drawing, elements with maintained relationships automatically update to
honor the relationship. For example, if you move an element that shares a maintained parallel
relationship with another element, the other element moves as needed to remain parallel. If a
line and an arc share a maintained tangent relationship, they remain tangent when either is
modified.
Moving Elements by Specifying Precision Points

You can move a line that shares a tangent relationship with an arc if you select the line and click
Move on the Change toolbar. As you move the line, the line moves without maintaining the
relationship with the arc. You can then specify a 'from' point and a 'to' point by clicking on the
drawing sheet or by entering values in the ribbon. You can move any element by specifying
precision points with Move.
See Also
Move an Element (on page 179)
Move an Element
1. Select one or more elements.
2. On the Change toolbar, click Move .
3. If you want to copy the elements, click Copy on the ribbon.

4. Click to define the 'from' point.
5. Click to define the 'to' point. After the elements move, the relationships with other elements
are not maintained.

 You can click Move before you select elements to move.
 Using the Move command on the Change toolbar will break any relationships the element
may have. You must move an element with the Select Tool (on page 180) to maintain its
relationships.
 Instead of using Copy on the ribbon to copy elements, you can hold down the CTRL key
while you click to position the elements.
 You can use the ribbon boxes to specify the "to" point. The values are relative distances
along the x and y axes. You must click to specify to which quadrant you want to move or
copy the selection set.
 When you move or copy elements, the "to" point becomes the next "from" point.

 The software maintains relationships within the select set if they are still applicable after you
have moved or copied the elements.
 You can use other view manipulation commands, such as Zoom, Fit, and Pan, while you
are using Move.
 When you finish manipulating the view, the software returns you to Move at the point where
you left off.
See Also
Move an Element with the Select Tool

1. On the Main toolbar, click Select Tool .
2. Position the pointer over the element, but not over any of the element's handles.
3. Drag the element to its new position.
Move an element with precision

1. On the Main toolbar, click Select Tool .
2. Position the pointer over the element you want to move, at a location where the software
recognizes a key point.
3. Begin to drag the element.
4. Release the element when the software recognizes the key point of another element, or a
relationship between the element you are moving and another element.
If you want to move a selected element, make sure to position the pointer away from any
of the element's handles. Dragging a handle modifies the element instead of moving it.
See Also
Moving Elements (on page 178)
Move an Element Precisely

You can use PinPoint with the Select Tool to move an element a precise distance in X and Y
relative to a known position in your drawing.
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Select Tool .
2. On the Main toolbar, click PinPoint .

3. Click the location that you want for the PinPoint target point to be.
4. Using the Select tool, point to the element that you want to move. Relationship indicators
appear next to the pointer to indicate keypoints on the element.
5. When the relationship indicators identify the key point that you want, drag the element.
PinPoint displays the distance between the pointer and the reference point as you drag.
6. Release the mouse button when the element is where you want it.

See Also
Placing Elements in Precise Locations (on page 207)
Draw with PinPoint (on page 208)
Moving Elements Command and Ribbon

This section contains topics about the commands and ribbons used to move elements.
Move Command
Moves elements from one location to another. You can specify the locations by clicking on
the drawing sheet or by entering values in the ribbon. You can move one or more elements at a
time, and you can move element groups.
See Also
Move an Element Precisely (on page 180)
Move Ribbon (on page 181)
Move Ribbon
Specifies the "from" point and "to" point when you move objects or elements.
Copy — Copies the elements in the selection set.

Step Distance — Increments or decrements the value displayed in the ribbon boxes. For
example, typing a step value of 0.25 and moving the pointer away from the "from" point would
increment the distance from 0.25 to 0.5, 0.75, and so forth.
X — Sets a value for the x coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option.
Y — Sets a value for the y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option.
See Also
Move Command (on page 181)
Copying and Pasting Elements

You can copy any element, dimension, or object by selecting it and clicking Copy on the Main
toolbar. Copying places the selected item on the Clipboard. When you click Paste on the Main
toolbar, the item is placed on the drawing sheet.
You can also copy an element with the Select Tool. You click the Select Tool on the Draw
toolbar, select the element, and press CTRL as you drag the element across the drawing sheet.
You can also copy several selected elements in the same manner.
When you copy elements that have relationships, the relationships are copied and retained
when possible. For example, if you make a copy of two related lines, the relationship is also
copied. However, if you copy one of two lines that are related to each other, the relationship is
not copied.

See Also
Copy an Element (on page 182)
Paste an Element (on page 182)
Copy an Element
1. Select an element.
2. On the Main toolbar, click Copy .

You can also click CTRL + C to copy the selected element.
 After you copy an element and its relationships, they are placed on the Clipboard. You can
then use Paste to paste them into the current document, or into other documents.
 When you paste the element, it is pasted on top of the element you copied. To see the
pasted element, you must drag it.
See Also
Copy an Element with the Select Tool

3. Position the pointer over the element, but not over any of the element's handles. The pointer
changes to show that the element can now be copied.
4. Hold the CTRL key and drag the copy to its new location.
See Also
Paste an Element
You can place elements on the Clipboard with Copy or Cut, and then paste the elements into
the current document or another document.
1. Open the document in which you want to paste the contents of the Clipboard.
2. On the Main toolbar, click Paste .

You can also press CTRL + V to paste elements on the Clipboard into your document.
 The contents of the Clipboard remain unchanged until you use Copy or Cut again.

 You cannot run Paste if the Clipboard is empty.

 You can use Undo to reverse the results of Paste.
 If you are unable to see the symbol, element, fill, or document that you pasted into your
Catalog Manager drawing, click Fit on the Main toolbar
 Pasted text and elements remain selected after you use Paste.
See Also
Paste an Element with a Different Format

1. Cut or copy the element you want to paste.
2. Click Edit > Paste Special.
3. To embed the information, click Paste.
4. To link the information, click Paste Link.
5. In the As box, select the format that you want to use to paste the information.
6. To paste the information into the lower left corner of the current document, click OK.
 The contents of the Clipboard remain unchanged until you use Paste Special again.
 You cannot run Paste Special if the Clipboard is empty.
 If you select an element as the insertion point and that element cannot be replaced, the
Clipboard contents are not pasted at the insertion point.
 You can use Undo to reverse the results of Paste Special.
 You can use Redo to repeatedly paste the contents of the Clipboard at the insertion point.
 If the Clipboard contains data, and you have selected data in the document, the software
replaces the selected data with the contents of the Clipboard.
 Pasted text and elements remain selected after you use Paste Special.
See Also
Paste Special Command (on page 186)
Offset Ribbon
Select Chain — Selects a chain of continuous elements. If this option is not selected, Offset
selects only an individual element.
Step Distance — Sets the distance from the base element to the offset copy.
Cumulative Offset — Sets the total distance of the current offset graphic element from the
original graphic element.

The following graphic illustrates the difference between step distance (A) and cumulative offset
(B).
See Also
Offset Elements
You can select elements to be offset before you use Offset. Or you can select Offset before
you select the elements.
1. On the Change toolbar, click Offset .
2. Click the element or elements that you want to offset.
3. In the Step Distance box on the ribbon, type the distance that you want to offset the
selected elements.
4. Click to define the direction in which you want to offset the elements.
 If the Change toolbar is not displayed, click Change on the Main toolbar.
 To select a chain of connected elements, select Offset Chain.
See Also

Copying and Pasting Elements Commands, Ribbon, and Dialog

Box
In this section you will find topics that relate to the commands, ribbon and dialog box related to
copying and pasting elements.
Copy Command
Copies selected elements and their associated relationships to the Clipboard. When you use
this command, it replaces the previous contents of the Clipboard with the new contents.
When you copy more than one element at a time, all relationships shared among the elements
are also copied. However, when you copy an element that shares a relationship with an element
that you are not copying, the relationship is not copied.
See Also
Copy an Element (on page 182)
Offset Command
Draws an offset copy of an element or a set of contiguous elements. This command copies
elements while maintaining characteristics such as the angle of lines and the center point of arcs
and circles.
Offset copies the original element at a specified distance. Offsetting outside the perimeter of the
original element creates a larger element. Offsetting inside the perimeter of the original element
creates a smaller element.
Elements are transitioned as necessary during the offset operation.
See Also
Offset Ribbon (on page 183)

Paste Command
Inserts the Clipboard contents at the same coordinates the elements had in the source
document. The command is not available if the Clipboard is empty.
See Also
Paste an Element (on page 182)
Paste Special Command

Inserts the Clipboard contents into a document using a selected format. This command is
available only on the Edit menu.
See Also
Paste Special Dialog Box (on page 186)
Paste Special Dialog Box

Inserts the Clipboard contents into a document using a selected format.
See Also
Creating Patterns
Patterns are useful if you want to create several elements quickly that are the same without
using several commands. You can create patterns by selecting one or more elements and
making several copies of it with Rectangular Pattern or Circular Pattern on the toolbar.
To modify individual members of the pattern, you can select an individual member of the pattern
and change it the way you would any other element.
See Also
Draw a Circular Pattern (on page 187)
Draw a Rectangular Pattern (on page 187)

Draw a Rectangular Pattern

1. Select one or more elements to pattern.
2. On the Change toolbar, click Rectangular Pattern .

3. To define a rectangular area for the pattern, click Pattern Options on the ribbon.
4. On the Rectangular Pattern Options dialog box, select Fit to Rectangle.
Use the ribbon boxes and the Rectangular Pattern Options dialog box to define other
characteristics of the pattern, such as the number of pattern members and rows.
5. On the drawing sheet, click to identify one corner of the pattern and click to identify the
opposite corner of the pattern.
6. To finish creating the pattern, click Finish on the ribbon.
If you do not like the results of the pattern, you can use the Undo command.
See Also
Rectangular Pattern Command (on page 189)
Rectangular Pattern Ribbon (on page 189)
Draw a Circular Pattern

1. Select one or more elements to pattern.
2. On the Change toolbar, click Circular Pattern .

3. Click where you want the center of the circular pattern to be.
4. Use the ribbon boxes and the Circular Pattern Options dialog box to define other
characteristics of the pattern, such as the number of pattern members and rows.
5. To finish creating the pattern, click Finish on the ribbon.
If you do not like the results of the pattern, you can use the Undo command.

See Also
Circular Pattern Command (on page 188)
Creating Patterns (on page 186)
Creating Patterns Commands, Ribbons, and Dialog Boxes

This section contains topics about the commands and ribbons used to create patterns.
Circular Pattern Options Dialog Box

Pattern control — Specifies how the pattern is constructed.
 Incremental array — Draws a pattern with a set sweep angle between members.
 Fit to arc — Draws a pattern by evenly spacing members along an arc.
Rows — Controls how pattern rows are arranged.
Single row — Draws a single row of pattern members.
Multiple inward — Draws multiple rows, each one closer to the pattern center than the last.
Multiple outward — Draws multiple rows, each one farther away from the pattern center than
the last.
See Also
Circular Pattern Command

Arranges selected elements in a circular pattern on the drawing sheet.
See Also
Circular Pattern Ribbon

Options — Displays the Circular Pattern Options dialog box.
Count — Sets the number of copies in the pattern.
Rows — Sets the number of arc-shaped rows in the pattern. This option is available only when
Rows on the Circular Pattern Options dialog box is set to Multiple inward or Multiple
outward.
Angle — Sets the angle of the pattern. This box sets the sweep angle between pattern
members when Pattern control on the Circular Pattern Options dialog box is set to
Incremental array. This box also sets the total sweep angle when Pattern control is set to Fit
to arc.

Row spacing — Sets the distance between adjacent arc-shaped rows in the pattern, as
measured from the bottom of one row to the bottom of the next. The bottom is the side closest to
the center point of the circular pattern.
See Also
Rectangular Pattern Options Dialog Box

Pattern control — Specifies how the pattern is constructed.
 Incremental array — Draws a pattern with a set offset between members.
 Fit to rectangle — Draws a pattern by evenly spacing members along the x and y axes of
the pattern rectangle.
Stagger — Controls whether pattern members are arranged in a straight matrix, or whether
every other row or column is offset from its default position. Options are None, for a straight
matrix, Rows, to offset alternate pattern rows, and Columns, to offset alternate pattern columns.
Stagger — Sets the row or column stagger distance to the specified distance.
Stagger = 1/2 offset — Sets the row or column stagger distance to half the X Offset or Y Offset
value.
Include last column — Controls whether to include the last staggered column in the pattern or
to exclude the last column.
See Also
Rectangular Pattern Command

Copies selected elements in a rectangular pattern on the drawing sheet.
Rectangular Pattern Ribbon

Options — Displays the Rectangular Pattern Options dialog box.
X count — Sets the number of pattern members along the x axis of the pattern rectangle.
Y count — Sets the number of pattern members along the y axis of the pattern rectangle.
X offset — Sets the distance between adjacent rows in the pattern, measured along the x axis
of the pattern rectangle.
Y offset — Sets the distance between adjacent rows in the pattern, measured along the y axis
of the pattern rectangle.
Angle — Sets the rotation angle of the pattern rectangle.
Finish — Completes the pattern. When you click this button, the pattern is created on the
drawing sheet and you can select other elements.

See Also
Cutting or Deleting Elements

To delete elements, select the elements and click Cut on the main toolbar or press DELETE on
the keyboard. Clicking Cut allows you to paste the element in another location. Pressing
DELETE removes the element permanently.
Relationships that are no longer applicable after you delete an element are automatically
deleted. For example, if you delete one of a pair of parallel lines, the parallel relationship is
deleted from the remaining line.
See Also
Cut an Element (on page 190)
Cut an Element
2. On the Main toolbar, click Cut .

You can also press CTRL + X to cut the selected element.
 After you cut an element and its relationships from a document, they are placed on the
Clipboard. You can then use Paste to paste them into the current document, or into other
documents.
 When relationships exist between elements, cutting the elements from a document deletes
the relationships. If there is a relationship between a selected element and an unselected
element, you can do one of the following:
 Cut and paste only the selected element.
 Cut and paste both elements and their relationship.
 Cut and paste only the selected element and the relationship, then reconnect the
relationship to another element.

See Also
Delete an Element
 Click Edit > Delete.
 On the keyboard, press DELETE.
When you delete an element and its relationships, the relationships are not pasted to
the Clipboard and cannot be reinserted. However, you can restore an element and its
relationships by immediately using Undo.
See Also
Cutting or Deleting Elements Commands

This section contains topics relating to commands used when cutting or deleting elements.
Cut Command
Cuts selected elements from the document and pastes them to the Clipboard. The selected
elements replace the previous contents of the Clipboard.
See Also
Cut an Element (on page 190)
Delete Command
Deletes the selected element and any relationships and dimensions that have been placed
on it. You cannot reinsert or paste elements deleted with this command. However, you can
retrieve the data by immediately clicking Undo.
See Also
Delete an Element (on page 191)

Create (clone) a Symbol Using Elements of an Existing

Symbol
1. In Catalog Manager open the drawing that you want to clone (copy) elements from.
2. Click the Select Tool , and select the elements of the symbol that you want to clone.
When selected the chosen elements change color.
3. Click Create Symbol and move the cursor onto the drawing sheet.
The Create Symbol command cannot be selected if no elements have been selected.
4. Click to place the origin point where you want it to be in your new symbol, the Save as
Symbol dialog box opens.
5. On the Save as Symbol dialog box, type a name for your new symbol and click Save.
Create Symbol Command

Allows you to create a symbol. The command is available on the Draw toolbar.
This button is available only when you select elements.
Drawing with Relationships

As you move the pointer, the software automatically updates values in the ribbon, giving you
constant feedback on the size and position of the element you are drawing. As you draw, the
software shows a temporary, dynamic display of the element you are drawing by the
pointer––this feedback is called a relationship indicator. This temporary display shows the look
of the elements if you place the element at the current location.
The software gives you more information about the element that you are drawing by displaying
relationships between the temporary, dynamic element and the following items:
 Other elements in the drawing
 Horizontal and vertical orientations

 Origin of the element that you are drawing

When the software recognizes a relationship, it displays a relationship indicator at the pointer.
As you move the pointer, the software updates the indicator to show new relationships. If a
relationship indicator appears by the pointer when you click to draw the element, the software
applies that relationship to the element.
Relationship Relationship Indicator
End point
Midpoint
Intersection
Horizontal
Vertical
Point On Element
Perpendicular
Parallel
Tangent
Center
For example, if the horizontal relationship indicator appears when you click to place the second
end point of a line, then the line is exactly horizontal.
Relationships
You can set the types of relationships you want the software to recognize using SmartSketch
Settings on the Tools menu. The software can recognize one or two relationships at a time.
When the software recognizes two relationships, it displays both relationship indicators at the
pointer.
Locate Zone
You do not have to move the pointer to an exact position for the software to recognize a
relationship. The software recognizes relationships for any element within the locate zone of the

pointer. The circle around the pointer crosshair or at the end of the pointer arrow indicates the
locate zone. You can change the size of the locate zone with SmartSketch Settings on the
Tools menu.
Infinite Elements
The software recognizes the Point On Element relationship for lines and arcs as if these
elements were infinite. In the following example, the software recognizes a Point On Element
relationship when you position the pointer directly over an element and also when you move the
pointer off the element.
See Also
Draw with Relationships (on page 198)
Using Relationships as You Draw

You can use relationships to capture and remember your design intent as your sketch. You can
make your drawings associative by applying those relationships—or you can sketch designs that
do not use relationships.
How Relationships Affect a Drawing

You can move and change an element that does not use relationships in various ways without
affecting other parts of the design. For example, when no relationships exist between two lines,
you can move and change each line without affecting the other.
When you modify a part of a drawing that has a relationship to another part of the drawing, the
other part updates automatically. For example, if you apply a perpendicular relationship between
the two lines and move one line, the other line moves with it. The software remembers the
relationship between these two elements and always maintains the perpendicular relationship
between the lines. You can manipulate either of the two lines and the software will move or
modify the line automatically to maintain the relationship.
Applying and maintaining relationships in the design simplifies changes to the design later. In
the following drawing, all the relationships were automatically established as the design took
shape on the drawing sheet. If you want to change the design, you simply modify one segment
of it and all the relationships are maintained.
Relationship Relationship Handle
Colinear

Relationship Relationship Handle
Connect
Concentric
Equal
Horizontal/Vertical
Tangent
Symmetric
Parallel
Perpendicular
Lock
For example, the following four lines appear with relationship handles (A) turned off and with
relationship handles (B) displayed.
Applying Relationships to Existing Geometry

You can apply relationships to geometry after you place it with the buttons on the Change
toolbar. These buttons include parallel, tangent, connect, and so on. You can use relationships
created with these buttons if you set Maintain Relationships on the Change toolbar.
Removing Relationships
You can quit using all the relationships that you have applied to the drawing if you clear
Maintain Relationships. You can also remove individual relationships by selecting a
relationship handle and deleting it. Clearing Relationship Handles on the Tools menu hides
the handles, but the relationships are still maintained and used in the design.
When to Maintain Relationships

Maintaining relationships makes designing more productive and revisions much easier.
However, relationships can slow drawing and changes on large data sets. You should decide

whether to use relationships depending on the speed of your computer and the importance of
easy revision.
For conceptual sketching and diagrams, you might want to use relationships by setting Maintain
Relationships. This method allows you to quickly get your ideas on paper and revise them
easily using direct modification and driving dimensions. The kinds of projects in which you might
want to use relationships include mechanical concepts, architectural details, layouts, and
schematic diagrams.
When to Design Without Relationships

For more complex projects where you initially need to draw with precision, you should not use
relationships in the document. You can then draw with precision by using the PinPoint tool and
entering values on ribbons. You can still use relationships within symbols. The kinds of projects
in which you might want to draw without relationships include multiple-view drawings, floor
plans, maps, and detailed designs.
If you switch between using relationships and not using them while you draw, you can
receive confusing results.
See Also
Draw an Ellipse by Center Point (on page 158)
Draw a Horizontal Line (on page 203)
Draw a Line Connected to Another Line (on page 202)
Intent Zones
As you draw and modify elements, small quadrants called intent zones appear next to the
pointer. The software uses intent zones to interpret your intentions as you draw. Intent zones
allow you to draw and modify elements many ways using few commands. You do not need to
select a different command for every type of element.
How Intent Zones Work

When you click to begin drawing certain elements, the software divides the region around the
clicked position into intent zones. By moving the pointer into one of these intent zones on the
way to your next click location, you can tell the software what you want to do next.
The last intent zone you move the pointer into is the active zone. To change the active intent
zone, move the mouse pointer into the zone you want to use, and then move it to the position
where you want to click next.

Drawing Tangent or Perpendicular Arcs

You can use intent zones to change the result of Tangent Arc. To draw an arc tangent to a line,
first click a point on the line to place the first end point of the arc. Then move the pointer through
the tangent intent zone and click to place the second end point of the arc.
If you want to draw a perpendicular arc instead, you can move the pointer back into the intent
zone region and out through the perpendicular zone before clicking to place the second end
point of the arc. The arc is then perpendicular to the line.
You can also use intent zones to define the arc direction.
Drawing Arcs by Three Points

When you use Arc by 3 Points, intent zones allow you to input the three points in any order.
You can also use intent zones to change the arc direction.

Drawing Lines Tangent or Connected to Curved Elements

Using intent zones with Line/Arc Continuous, you can draw a line tangent to a circle or arc. Or
you can draw a line that is connected to the circle or arc, but not tangent to it.
See Also
Draw with Relationships

1. Set the SmartSketch options so that the software recognizes the relationships you want to
use. You can set the options with SmartSketch Settings on the Tools menu.
2. On the Draw toolbar, click a drawing command.
3. Move the pointer around on the drawing sheet to find relationships.
4. Click when the software recognizes a relationship you want to use for the element you are
drawing. When you click with a relationship indicator displayed at the pointer, the
relationship is established in the drawing.
If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles as you draw.
These relationships are maintained when you modify the drawing.
See Also
Case Where a Relationship Is Not Maintained (on page 204)
Connect Points While Drawing a Line (on page 205)
Establish More Than One Relationship (on page 206)
Display or Hide Relationship Handles

Click Tools > Relationship Handles to turn on and turn off the display of relationship handles.

If a checkmark appears next to Relationship Handles, the display is on.
You can also click Relationship Handles on the Change toolbar to toggle
relationship handles on and off.
See Also
Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 280)
Delete a Relationship
If the relationship handles are hidden, click Relationship Handles on the Change
toolbar to display them.
1. Select a relationship handle.
2. Press DELETE.
See Also
Maintain Relationships
Click Tools > Maintain Relationships.
When Maintain Relationships is set and you apply relationships to new or existing elements,
the software places relationship handles on the elements. Elements that share relationships are
associative; when you move an element, the other elements on the drawing sheet move
according to the relationships they have with the element that you moved.
See Also
Maintain Relationships Command (on page 200)
Suspend Relationships
1. Hold ALT. The software does not recognize any relationships while you hold this key.
2. Release ALT to re-activate the software's ability to recognize relationships.
See Also
SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 201)
Lock an Element or Key Point

1. On the Change toolbar, click Lock.
2. Click an element or key point to lock the element and prevent it from being modified.
See Also
Lock Command (on page 200)

Relationships Commands
This section contains topics about the commands and ribbons used to set and control
relationships.
Alignment Indicator Command

Displays dashed lines to show horizontal or vertical alignment while you draw or modify
elements. Alignment indicators work similarly to relationship indicators. If you click when a
horizontal or vertical indicator line is displayed, the element you are drawing or modifying will be
horizontally or vertically aligned with the element the indicator line leads to.
The Alignment Indicator command is also available on the Change toolbar.
See Also
Lock Command
Controls elements so they cannot be modified. When you use this button, you can lock the
length, angle, radius, or position of an element. You can also lock keypoints on elements, such
as endpoints of a line or the center of a circle, in their absolute positions.
See Also
Lock an Element or Key Point (on page 199)
Maintain Relationships Command

Places relationship handles as you draw. When this option is turned on, the software places
relationship handles for relationships that the software recognizes, and for relationships that you
apply using the commands on the Change toolbar.
You can also use Tools > Maintain Relationships to toggle this command on and off.
The Maintain Relationships command is also available on the Change toolbar.
See Also
Maintain Relationships
Relationship Handles Command

Displays any relationship handles on elements.
The Relationship Handles command is also available on the Change toolbar.

See Also
Delete a Relationship (on page 199)
Display or Hide Relationship Handles (on page 198)
SmartSketch Settings Command

Sets up what relationships are recognized by the software. The relationships selected on the
SmartSketch dialog box are recognized as you draw.
See Also
Case Where a Relationship Is Not Maintained (on page 204)
Establish More Than One Relationship (on page 206)
SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box (on page 201)
SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box

Customizes the operation of the software in recognizing and placing relationships. You can set
pointer behavior and specify which relationships are recognized as you draw.
Relationships Tab (SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box)

This tab allows you select the relationships that are recognized by the software as you draw. Set
the relationships you want to recognize, and clear the relationships you do not want to
recognize. Clear all relationships so that the software does not place relationship handles.
Cursor Tab (SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box)

Cursor Setup — Sets the sizes of the Locate Zone and Intent Zone around the pointer.
Locate Zone — Sets the size of the locate zone radius. The locate zone is a region around the
pointer.
The software recognizes relationships based on elements within the locate zone so that you do
not have to move the pointer to an exact position. For example, if part of an element is within the
locate zone, the software recognizes a Point On relationship. The size of the locate zone is
indicated by a circle around the center of the pointer crosshair. Values from 3 to 12 pixels are
valid.
Intent Zone — Sets the size of the intent zone radius. Intent zones allow drawing commands to
interpret your intentions as you draw. Values from 3 to 12 pixels are valid.
Preview — Shows the size of the locate zone and the symbol for the selected relationship.
The Preview option does not apply to changes made to intent zone values.

Sample Workflows
The topics in this section provide you with step-by-step workflows for using Catalog Manager
tools to perform a variety of common tasks.
Draw a Line Connected to Another Line

You can use relationships to connect an element you are drawing with an existing element. You
can apply a connect relationship as you draw the lines, or draw the line without a connect
relationship.
1. Click Tools > SmartSketch Settings.

2. On the Relationships tab, set End Point, and click OK.
4. Move the pointer to the end of a line in the application window. The software displays the
End Point relationship indicator at the pointer.
While the software displays the relationship indicator, click to place the first end point of
the new line. This end point is connected to the end point of the previous line.
5. Click where you want to place the second end point of the new line.
6. The new line and the previous line have connected end points.
 If Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu is set, the software places a connect
relationship handle at the point where the two lines connect.
 If you do not want to place a connect relationship, you can follow the same procedure
with Maintain Relationships cleared. The end points of the two lines will still be exactly
coincident when you draw them.

Draw a Line
2. Click where you want a new line to begin.
3. Move the pointer around on the drawing sheet. Notice that the line follows the movement of
the pointer. At the same time, the pointer recognizes any relationships it encounters, such
as a horizontal relationship. When the pointer finds a relationship, a relationship indicator
appears at the pointer.
4. Click to place the end point of the line according to the displayed relationships.
5. Continue clicking to draw additional line segments, or right-click to end the command.
Draw a Horizontal Line

You can use relationships to draw a line that is exactly horizontal. You can apply a horizontal
relationship as you draw the line, or draw the line without a horizontal relationship.
1. Click Tools > SmartSketch Settings.

2. On the Relationships tab, select Horizontal or Vertical, and then click OK.
4. Click where you want to place the first end point of the line, anywhere in the application
window.
5. Move the pointer around in the window. Notice that the dynamic line display always extends
from the end point you just placed to the current pointer position. You may also see
relationship indicators displayed at the pointer.

Relationship handles can be displayed or hidden with Relationship Handles on the

Tools menu.
6. Move the pointer to make the dynamic line approximately horizontal.
7. When the horizontal relationship indicator is displayed at the pointer, click to place the
second end point.
 If Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu is set, the software places a horizontal
relationship handle on the new line.
 If you do not want to place a horizontal relationship, you can follow the same procedure with
Maintain Relationships cleared. The line will still be exactly horizontal when you draw it.
Case Where a Relationship Is Not Maintained

Relationships cannot be maintained in certain cases, as in the following example.
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Arc by 3 Points .

2. Click where you want the sweep of the arc to begin.
3. Move the pointer to a position where the software recognizes a point on the element
relationship with a line on the drawing sheet.
4. When the Point On relationship indicator is displayed at the pointer, click to define the
second input point for the arc.
5. Move the pointer past the line and click. The position of this input point defines it as the end
of the sweep, making the point in the middle a key point that cannot have relationships. The
software recognizes this, and does not maintain the point on element relationship.

If the third input point for the arc had been between the first two points, then it would have
been interpreted as the arc midpoint, making the second input point one end of the arc sweep.
In this case, the point would have been constrainable, and the software would have maintained
the point on element relationship.
Connect Points While Drawing a Line

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous
2. Click where you want the line to begin.
3. Move the pointer to a position where the software recognizes the end point of a line on the
drawing sheet.
4. When the point on relationship indicator is displayed at the pointer, click to define the end of
the line.
Connect Points While Modifying a Line

1. Select the line you want to modify.

2. Position the Select Tool over the handle at the end of the line you want to modify. The
pointer changes to a plus (+) shape to indicate that you have located the handle.
3. Drag the handle to a position where the software recognizes the end point of another line on
the drawing sheet.
4. Release the mouse button to place the end point of the line you are modifying at the end
point of the stationary line.
Establish More Than One Relationship

On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous .
1. Click where you want the line to begin.
2. Move the pointer to recognize point on element and tangent relationships with a circle on the
drawing sheet.
3. While the point on element and tangent relationship indicators are displayed at the pointer,
click to define the end point of the line.

Drawing Precisely
Engineering and architectural diagrams and drawings require accurate measurements and
precise positioning of elements and symbols. The software provides a variety of positioning and
dimensioning tools that are easy to use but powerful enough for the most complex drawings.
Many types of drawings require a drawing scale that makes it possible to represent very large or
very small objects on a sheet of paper. You can set up your drawings with the drawing scale and
measurement units you need to create a wide range of drawings.
When you are positioning elements and symbols on a drawing sheet, speed and precision
count. You can easily align symbols with other symbols or with locations indicated by guides,
rulers, and grids. You can also position symbols at exact x-and y-coordinates in your drawing.
You can also display the dimensions of elements in your drawings. With the software's
measurement and dimensioning tools, you can calculate and display linear and angular
dimensions. When you resize an element that has attached dimensions, the dimensions update
automatically.
See Also
Placing Elements with a Grid (on page 211)
Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 213)
Placing Elements in Precise Locations

PinPoint is a tool that helps you draw and modify elements relative to known positions in a
drawing. You can place a target point and then the software dynamically displays the horizontal
and vertical distance between the pointer and the target point. You can use PinPoint with all
element drawing commands. You can run PinPoint from the Tools menu or the Main toolbar.
How PinPoint Works

PinPoint allows you to provide coordinate input to commands as you draw. The x and y
coordinates are relative to a target point that you can position anywhere in the window. You can
change the location of the target point at any time by clicking Reposition Target on the ribbon
and then clicking a new position in the window.
As you move the pointer around, PinPoint dynamically displays the horizontal and vertical
distance between the pointer position and the target point. Help lines show the PinPoint X- and
Y-axis and the PinPoint orientation.
Locking and Freeing Values

You can lock the x coordinate or the y coordinate using the X and Y boxes on the ribbon. When
one coordinate value is locked, you can position the other coordinate by clicking a position in the
window. Or you can set both values using the ribbon boxes. If you want to free the dynamics for
a locked value, you can clear the value box by double-clicking in the box and pressing
Backspace or Delete.

PinPoint Orientation
In its default orientation, PinPoint's x-axis is horizontal. You can re-orient the x-axis to any
angle by setting the angle on the PinPoint ribbon. The figure shows the PinPoint angle set to
20 degrees.
See Also
Re-Orient PinPoint (on page 209)
Reposition the PinPoint Target Point (on page 209)
Draw with PinPoint

2. Click where you want the target point to be and run any drawing command. As you move
the pointer, PinPoint displays the coordinates of the current mouse location in relation to
the target point. To provide precision input to the current command, click when the
coordinate display indicates that the pointer is in the correct position or type coordinate
values in the X and Y ribbon boxes.
You cannot place elements with PinPoint on the Main toolbar if you are using Grid
Snap.
 When the pointer reaches a distance from the target point that is a multiple of the Step
Value set on the ribbon, the related coordinate value and help line become bold.
 If you know the exact x and y distances from the target point that you want to use as
command input, you can type the values in the X and Y ribbon boxes.
 When the PinPoint ribbon is active, you can use your function keys to toggle on/off the
PinPoint command (F9), lock the X: box for data input (F10), or lock the Y: box for data input
(F11).
 You can type a known x or y value into the X or Y ribbon box to lock one axis position, then
graphically define the coordinate for the other axis.
 You can move the target point at any time. Click Reposition on the ribbon, and then click
where you want the target point to be.
 You can re-orient the PinPoint x axis. Type a positive value in the Angle box on the
PinPoint ribbon to rotate the axis counterclockwise, or a negative value to rotate the axis
clockwise.
See Also
Draw a Line with PinPoint (on page 262)

Move an Element Precisely

You can use PinPoint with the Select Tool to move an element a precise distance in X and Y
relative to a known position in your drawing.

3. Click the location that you want for the PinPoint target point to be.
4. Using the Select tool, point to the element that you want to move. Relationship indicators
appear next to the pointer to indicate keypoints on the element.
5. When the relationship indicators identify the key point that you want, drag the element.
PinPoint displays the distance between the pointer and the reference point as you drag.
6. Release the mouse button when the element is where you want it.
See Also
Reposition the PinPoint Target Point

 On the PinPoint ribbon, click Reposition Target . The target point is attached to the
pointer. Click where you want the target point to be.
 Press F12. The target point moves to the current pointer location.
See Also
Re-Orient PinPoint
The default PinPoint orientation is with the PinPoint x axis horizontal. To re-orient the PinPoint
x axis, type an angle in the ribbon Angle box. A positive value rotates the horizontal axis
counterclockwise. A negative value rotates the axis clockwise. The y axis is automatically
re-positioned to remain perpendicular to the x axis.
See Also
Precision Placement Commands and Ribbons

This section contains topics about the commands and ribbons used to place elements on a
drawing precisely.

Define PinPoint Origin Ribbon

When you click the Define PinPoint Origin button on the PinPoint ribbon bar, the Define
PinPoint Origin ribbon bar is displayed.
the ToolTip.
Save PinPoint Origin — Saves the currently displayed X and Y values for each sheet in the
document.
Target X — Locks the horizontal distance between the target point and the current pointer
location to the value you type.
Target Y — Locks the vertical distance between the target point and the current pointer location
to the value you type.
See Also
PinPoint Command
Helps you draw elements with precision by displaying coordinate data at the pointer. The
displayed coordinates are relative to a target position that you set and can reset at any time.
Using PinPoint, you can draw elements at known locations on the drawing sheet, draw
elements known distances apart, and so forth. You can use PinPoint with all drawing
commands.
You cannot place elements with PinPoint on the Main toolbar if you are using Grid
Snap.
See Also
PinPoint Ribbon
Display On/Off (F9) - Displays or hides the PinPoint help lines and distance values.
Reposition Target (F12) - Attaches the target point to the pointer so that you can reposition
the target point. Click where you want the target point to be.
Relative Tracking - When toggled on, PinPoint is in relative mode such that the PinPoint
target moves to the last point clicked during a drawing command.
Define PinPoint Origin - Activates the Define PinPoint Origin Ribbon (on page 210)
containing fields for X & Y values which define a document origin for PinPoint.

To save this origin, you must select the Save PinPoint Origin button on the Define
PinPoint Origin ribbon bar.
Reposition Target to Origin - Moves the PinPoint target to the X,Y position that was saved
using the Save PinPoint Origin button on the Define PinPoint Origin ribbon bar.
Angle - Specifies the angle of the PinPoint x help line relative to its default horizontal
orientation. Positive values rotate the horizontal line counterclockwise. Negative values rotate
the horizontal line clockwise.
Step - Specifies the PinPoint step value. The step value is an incremental distance along the
PinPoint coordinate axes. When the distance between the target position and the current
pointer location is an increment of the step value, the related coordinate value and help line
become bold.
See Also
Placing Elements with a Grid

The grid and its grid lines allow you to place elements in the document by aligning them with the
grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. You can use the grid if you want the elements
to line up at regular intervals in the document.
The grid is an invisible set of lines in the document. When you use the View > Grid Snap
command, elements always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. You
can view the grid by clicking View > Grid Display. The grid lines do not print.
You can change the display of the grid from static to dynamic by setting options on the View tab
of the Options dialog box. You can also adjust the brightness of the grid display using the View
> Grid Brightness command.
When you zoom in or out, the grid lines for a dynamic grid are generated dynamically. You can
set dynamic grid lines to appear at fine, medium, or coarse levels. The grid lines appear at
common major measurement increments. A dynamic grid displays index lines that intersect with
the darker, solid grid lines.
A static grid displays solid grid lines that do not move as you zoom in or out. You can set up the
increment settings on the View tab of the Options dialog box.
See Also
Grid Display Command (on page 212)
Grid Snap Command (on page 212)
Place Elements with a Grid

1. Click View > Grid Display.
This step is optional. You do not have to display the grid to align elements with it.

2. On the View menu, select Grid Snap.

3. Place the elements that you want with the grid.
 You cannot place elements using PinPoint on the Main toolbar if you are using Grid Snap.
 You can change the grid display by setting options on the View tab of the Options dialog
box.
 When you perform Step 3, a red crosshair will appear at the pointer showing where an
element's points are placed. Elements align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the
grid lines.
 Grid snap does not work while you identify elements that are aligned along grid lines. To
override this, press the ALT key while identifying these elements.
 Relationship and alignment indicators override the grid snap. You can suppress the
indicators by pressing ALT.
See Also
Placing Elements with a Grid Commands

This section contains topics about the commands and ribbons used to place elements within a
grid.
Grid Display Command

Displays a grid so that you can place elements with precision. The grid is not part of the
document and does not print.
 You can also access Grid Display by right-clicking. You can change the grid display from
static to dynamic by setting options on the View tab of the Tools Options dialog box.
 The Grid Display command is available on the Schematic toolbar.
See Also
Place Elements with a Grid (on page 211)
Grid Snap Command

Allows you to align elements with the grid. The grid is an invisible set of lines in the document
that helps you align elements. When you set Grid Snap, the software always aligns elements
with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. Grid lines do not print.

Relationship and alignment indicators override the grid snap. You can suppress the indicators
by holding down ALT.
 You can also access Grid Snap by right clicking in the Catalog Manager document and
displaying the shortcut menu.
 You can also use F3 to toggle on/off Grid Snap.
 You can change the grid display by setting options on the View tab of the Tools Options
dialog box.
 You cannot place elements using PinPoint on the Main toolbar if you are using Grid Snap.
 The Grid Snap command is also available on the Schematic toolbar.
See Also
Dimensioning Drawing Elements

Dimensions supply information about the size, location, and orientation of elements, such as the
length of a line, the distance between points, or the angle of a line. Dimensions are associated
with the elements they refer to, so you can make design changes easily.
You can use the commands on the Label toolbar to place the following types of dimensions:
(A) Linear dimensions

(B) Angular dimensions
(C) Diameter dimensions
(D) Radial dimensions
(E) Dimension groups
Dimension commands on the Label toolbar have a ribbon that sets options for placing the
dimension. When you select a dimension in the drawing, the same ribbon options appear. You
can use the options to change the selected dimension.
Placing Dimensions
To dimension elements, you can use a dimension command on the Label toolbar, such as
SmartDimension, and then select the elements you want to dimension.
As you place dimensions, the software shows a temporary, dynamic display of the dimension
you are placing. This temporary display shows what the new dimension will look like if you click
at the current pointer position. The dimension orientation changes depending on where you
move the pointer.
For example, when you click Distance Between on the Label toolbar and select an origin
element and an element to measure to, the dimension dynamically adjusts its orientation
depending on where you position your pointer.
Because you can dynamically control the orientation of a dimension during placement, you can
place dimensions quickly and efficiently without having to use several commands. Each of the
dimension commands uses placement dynamics that allow you to control how the dimension will
look before you place it.
Placing Dimensions with the Dimension Axis

The Axis command on the Label toolbar sets the orientation of the dimension axis on the
drawing sheet. You can use the new dimension axis, rather than the default axis of the drawing
sheet, while you are using Distance Between or Coordinate Dimension. You must set
Explicit on the Dimension ribbon to place dimensions that are perpendicular or parallel to new
dimension axis.

Dimensioning While You Draw

To dimension elements as you draw them, you can set Dimension Keyin Values
Automatically with Options on the Tools menu. Although placing dimensions as you draw is
convenient, it might be necessary to delete unneeded dimensions when you have finished your
design.
 Dimension Keyin Values Automatically is available on the General Tab (Options Dialog
Box).
 Dimensions placed with this option are only driven dimensions.
Using Dimensions to Drive Elements

You can place a dimension that controls the size or location of the element to which it refers.
This type of dimension is known as a driving dimension. If you use the ribbon to change the
dimensional value of a driving dimension, the element updates.
Dimensions that are not driving dimensions are called driven dimensions. The value of a driven
dimension is controlled by the element it refers to. If the element changes, the dimensional value
updates.
Because both driving and driven dimensions are associative to the element they refer to, you
can change the design more easily without having to delete and re-apply elements or
dimensions when you update the design.
If you want to create a driving dimension, you must first set Maintain Relationships on the
Tools menu. When you are placing dimensions, an option on the ribbon allows you to specify
whether a dimension is driving or driven. A driving dimension and a driven dimension are
distinguished by color. There are different colors for driving dimensions and driven dimensions
in a dimension style.

Not-to-Scale Dimensions
You can override the value of a driven dimension by editing its dimensional value. This makes
the dimension not-to-scale. For example, if you override the dimensional value that is 15
millimeters to be 30 millimeters, the actual size of the line that you see would still be 15
millimeters.
Formatting Dimensions
If you want two or more dimensions to look the same, you can select the dimensions and apply
a style with the ribbon. If you want to format dimensions so that they look unique, you can select
a dimension and edit its formats on the ribbon or with Properties on the Edit menu.
Using Expressions in Dimensions

There are many instances when the dimensions of individual features in a design are related.
For example, the bend radius used to manufacture a sheet metal part is usually a function of the
stock thickness. You can define and automate these types of design relationships with
expressions. You can select a dimension and then use the Variables command on the Tools
menu to enter a formula. When the formula is solved, the dimensional value changes to the
value that the formula calculates.
You might want to use dimensions with expressions for the following purposes:
 Drive a dimension by another dimension; Dimension A = Dimension B
 Drive a dimension by a formula; Dimension A = p * 3.5
 Drive a dimension by a formula and another dimension; Dimension A = p * Dimension B
Setting or Modifying Units of Measure

To set the units of measure for a dimension, you can use Properties on the Edit menu. To set
the units of measure for a document, you can click Properties on the File menu and then click
the Units tab.
See Also
Dimension Groups (on page 218)
Place a Dimension Between Two Elements or Key Points (on page 225)
Format a Dimension or Annotation (on page 343)
Types of Dimensions
A linear dimension measures the length of a line or the distance between two points or
elements. You can place linear dimensions with the Distance Between and SmartDimension
commands.

An angular dimension measures the angle of a line, the sweep angle of an arc, or the angle
between two or more lines or points. You can place angular dimensions with the Angle
Between and SmartDimension commands.
A radial dimension measures the radius of elements, such as arcs, circles, ellipses, or curves.
You can place a radial dimension with the SmartDimension command.
A diameter dimension measures the diameter of elements, such as circles and ellipses. You can
place a diameter dimension with the SmartDimension command.
The components of a dimension are as follows:
(A) Projection line (E) Break line
(B) Dimension line (F) Symbol
(C) Dimensional value (G) Connect line
(D) Terminator
See Also
Move a Dimension (on page 229)
Place a Linear, Angular, or Radial Dimension (on page 226)
Set the Dimension Type

Dimension types control how the dimension is displayed. You can set the dimension type before
or after you place a dimension.

 On the ribbon, click one of the options on the Dimension Type list on the palette to set the
dimension type.
In the following picture, you can click each palette option to see the type of dimension
and an example of what the dimension will look like.
See Also
Dimension Groups
You can place dimensions in dimension groups with several commands. This makes the
dimensions easier to manipulate on the drawing sheet. All members of a stacked or chained
dimension group share the same dimension axis.
 Stacked dimension group
 Chained dimension group
A coordinate dimension group is another type of dimension group. Coordinate dimensions

measure the position of key points or elements from a common origin. All the dimensions within
the group measure from a common origin. You should use coordinate dimensions when you
want to dimension elements in relation to a common origin or zero point.

When you are placing dimension groups with Distance Between or Angle Between, the pointer
position determines what type of dimension group will be placed. After you place the first
dimension in a group and click the second element you want to measure, if the pointer is below
the first dimension, then the dimension group will be a chained group.
If the pointer is above the first dimension, then the dimension group will be a stacked group.
You can place dimension groups with the following buttons on the Label toolbar:
 Distance Between
 Angle Between
 Symmetric Diameter
 Coordinate Dimension
See Also
Add a Dimension to a Dimension Group (on page 221)
Place a Dimension Group (on page 219)
Place a Dimension Group

1. On the Label toolbar, click one of the following buttons:
 Angle Between
 Symmetric Diameter
 Coordinate Dimension
2. Click an element that you want to measure.

3. Click to place the dimension.
4. Click another element that you want to measure.
5. Click to place the dimension in the dimension group.
 The first dimension that you place in a dimension group is the origin dimension.
 Coordinate Dimension places coordinate dimensions. Coordinate dimensions can only be
placed in a group. You can place coordinate dimensions in any order and on any side of the
elements that you want to dimension.
See Also
Coordinate Dimension Command (on page 233)

Add a Dimension to a Dimension Group
1. Click the element that the dimension measures.
2. Click a point for the dimension. This action adds the dimension to the dimension group.
 If you change a dimension group, the group updates automatically.

 If you delete a dimension from the middle of a chained dimension group, the group splits
into two groups.
 If you place a dimension group using Axis and then delete the first or middle dimension
from the group, this action deletes all the dimensions after the removed dimension.
See Also

Using Dimensions to Change Existing Elements

You can change dimensions on the drawing sheet to change existing elements. Driving
dimensions have relationships that allow you to maintain characteristics such as the size,
orientation, and position of elements. When you place a driving dimension on, or between
elements, you can change the element size by editing their dimensional values—you do not
have to delete or redraw elements at different sizes.
For example, dimensioning the radius of an arc shows its size. Editing the value of the radius
dimension changes the size of the arc.
To create dimensional relationships, select a dimension command and click the elements, and
key points you want to relate.
In order to generate driving dimensions you must set Maintain Relationships on the
Tools menu before creating your dimension.
See Also
Place a Driving Dimension

1. Click Tools > Maintain Relationships.
3. On the Label toolbar, click one of the following commands:
 SmartDimension
 Angle Between
The dimensions that you place will be driving dimensions by default.
 To change a driving dimension to a driven dimension, select a driving dimension and, on the
ribbon, click (Driving/Driven).
 To set the colors for driving and driven dimensions, select the dimension and on the shortcut
menu, click Properties. Then set the options you want on the Properties dialog box.
See Also
Not To Scale Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 241)


Change a Driven Dimension to a Driving Dimension
Return Dimension Text to the Actual Value of the Element (on page 223)
Change a Driven Dimension to a Driving Dimension

1. Click Tools > Maintain Relationships.
2. Select the driven dimension you want to change.
3. On the ribbon, click (Driving/Driven). The color of the dimension changes to indicate a
driving dimension.
 To place a driving dimension, you must click the Tools > Maintain Relationships
command, select an element, and then click a dimension command on the Dimension
toolbar; the dimension that you place by default is a driving dimension.
 To change a driving dimension to a driven dimension, select a driving dimension and click
(Driving/Driven).
 To set the colors for driving and driven dimensions, select the dimension and on the shortcut
menu, click Properties. Then set the options you want on the Properties dialog box.
See Also
Return Dimension Text to the Actual Value of the Element

When you override the value of a driven dimension by editing the dimensional value, the
resulting dimension is not-to-scale. For example, if you override the dimensional value of 15
millimeters to 30 millimeters, the actual size of the visible line remains 15 millimeters. Only the
dimension text is changed; the line remains unchanged.
To change the value of a dimension without changing the actual element:

1. Select a driven dimension.
A color that you set with Style on the Format menu indicates a driven dimension. You
can also set the color by selecting a dimension and clicking Properties on the Edit menu.

2. On the ribbon, delete the dimensional value from the Value box and type a new value.
 To restore the dimension value to the original value of the element select a dimension, right
mouse click and select Not to Scale on the shortcut menu.
 You can show dimensions that are not-to-scale by using Styles on the Format menu. This
option places a zigzag or straight line under the dimensional values that are not-to-scale.
 To return the dimensional value to the value of the element it actually measures, delete all
the characters from the Value box on the ribbon. You can also select a dimension and clear
Not to Scale on the shortcut menu.
See Also
Set a Dimension Axis

1. On the Label toolbar, click Axis.
2. Click an element to which you want the dimension axis to be parallel or perpendicular.
3. Choose distance between, then place a dimension. You can now place a dimension that
runs parallel or perpendicular to the dimension axis that you have defined.
4. To use the dimension axis that you set using Axis, click Distance Between or Coordinate
Dimension on the Label toolbar.

5. On the ribbon, set Explicit in the Dimension Axis box. After you define the dimension axis,
you can place dimensions that run parallel to or perpendicular to the dimension axis.
See Also
Place a Dimension Between Two Elements or Key Points

1. On the Label toolbar, click one of the following buttons:
 Angle Between
2. Click an element or key point to identify the origin element.
3. Click an element or key point to measure to.
4. Move the pointer where you want to place the dimension. The dimension dynamically
follows the movement of the pointer.
6. If you want to place another dimension, click another element or key point to select the next
measurement element.
The origin element for this dimension is the element that you selected in step 2.

7. Click to place the next dimension.
 After placing several dimensions, if you want to use a different origin element for additional
dimensions, right-click to start over.
 After you click the two elements that you want to place the dimension between, the
orientation of the dimension changes depending on where you move the pointer.
 Before you place a dimension between two elements or keypoints, you can use Axis to set
the orientation of the dimension axis on the drawing sheet. You can use the new dimension
axis, rather than the default axis of the drawing sheet, while you are using Distance
Between. After you define the dimension axis, you can place dimensions that run parallel to
or perpendicular to the dimension axis.
 If you place a manual linear dimension that is chained or stacked with an automatic linear
dimension, the manual dimension is immediately replaced with a standalone dimension that
is no longer attached to the automatic dimension. The new dimension is attached to a
newly-placed point object whose position coincides with the connect point location of the
automatic dimension projection line to which the manual dimension was originally attached.
Because the new dimension is no longer chained or stacked with the automatic dimension, it
does not move if the automatic dimension's position is modified.
See Also
Place a Linear, Angular, or Radial Dimension

You can place the following types of dimensions with SmartDimension:
 Linear dimension
 Angular dimension
 Radial dimension
 Diameter dimension
1. On the Label toolbar, click SmartDimension .

2. Click an element.
The command determines the type of dimension to place, depending on the type of
element you select, and displays the dimension dynamically so you can position it.
3. Position the dimension, and then click a point to place it.

 SmartDimension automatically determines the type of dimension to place based on the

element that you select, such as linear, radial, or angular. However, you can specify a
different dimension type. For example, if you click SmartDimension and then select a
circle, by default Diameter is the active dimension type on the Dimension ribbon; you then
place a diameter dimension. However, if you want to place a radial dimension instead, you
can click Radius on the ribbon and then place the dimension.
 To place a driving dimension, you must set Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu,
select an element, and then click a dimension command on the Label toolbar; the dimension
that you place is a driving dimension by default.
 You can change a dimension to driving or driven by selecting it and then clicking
Driving/Driven on the ribbon.
 To place a horizontal or vertical dimension between the end points of an angular line, you
must press SHIFT.
See Also
Dimension the Diameter of a Circle (on page 263)
Dimension the Length of a Line (on page 263)
Place a Symmetric Diameter Dimension

1. On the Label toolbar, click Symmetric Diameter.
2. Click an element or key point. This element or key point is the origin.
3. Click an element to measure or a key point to measure to.
4. Move the pointer where you want to place the dimension. The dimension dynamically
follows the movement of the pointer.

6. To place another dimension, click another element to measure or key point to measure to.
The origin element for this dimension is the first element or key point that you selected.
 To use a different origin element for additional dimensions, right-click to resume editing.
 After you click the two elements that you want to dimension between, the dimension
changes depending on where you move the pointer.
 Turn on Half on the ribbon, and the dimensions appear as half. Turn off Half on the ribbon,
and the dimensions appear as full.
See Also

Edit a Dimension Prefix

1. Select a dimension.
2. On the ribbon, click Prefix .

3. On the Dimension Prefix dialog box, type the characters that you want to appear as prefix,
superfix, suffix, and subfix information in the appropriate boxes.
While you type information in one of the boxes, you can also click a symbol at the top
of the dialog box to add symbols to the prefix, superfix, suffix, and subfix information.
4. Click Apply to change the dimension that you selected.
 You can also use the Dimension Prefix dialog box while you place a dimension.
 You can change the prefix or suffix gap by selecting a dimension. Then, you can click
Properties on the Edit menu. On the Spacing tab of the Dimension Properties dialog box,
change the prefix or suffix gap. You can also set the superfix or subfix gap on this tab.
See Also
Dimension Prefix Dialog Box (on page 233)
Move a Dimension
1. Click part of the dimension that you want to move.
2. Drag the dimension to a new location.
The previous procedure describes the general steps you can use to move a dimension. The
following descriptions explain how to move specific parts of a dimension.
To move the dimension line

 Click the dimension line and drag the dimension.

To move the dimension text

1. Click the dimension text. Drag the dimension to one of the following positions:
2. Drag the dimension to one of the following positions:

 Along the dimension line
 Outside of the dimension line
 Outside of the projection line

To move the terminator

 Click the terminator and drag it.
To move the projection line

 Click the projection line and drag it.
You can lengthen or shorten the projection line.
To move the leader break line

 For radial dimensions, you can move the break line of the leader line. Click the dimension
text. Then, drag the text while pressing SHIFT.
See Also
Drawing Element Dimensions Commands and Dialog Boxes

This section contains topics related to the commands and dialog boxes used when using
dimensions with your drawing elements.
Angle Between Command

Places a dimension that measures the angle between elements or key points. You can place
angular dimensions in stacked or chained dimension groups.

You can also add angular dimensions to existing dimension groups.
See Also
Axis Command
Sets a dimension axis for a drawing. A dimension axis allows you to place dimensions that
are perpendicular to or parallel to an element.
The default axis in a drawing is perpendicular or parallel to the horizontal axis of a drawing
sheet. Dimensions placed along the default axis look like this:
After you set a dimension axis with Axis, you can now place a dimension that runs parallel or
perpendicular to the dimension axis that you have defined. To use the axis that you have just
specified, you must set the type of dimension axis that you want to use on the dimension ribbon.
You do this by clicking Distance Between or Coordinate Dimension on the Label toolbar.
Then, you click Explicit in the Dimension Axis box on the ribbon so that you can use the
dimension axis that you set with Axis.
See Also

Coordinate Dimension Command

Places a dimension that measures the distance from a common origin to one or more key
points or elements. The coordinate dimensions that refer to the common origin are members of
a coordinate dimension group.
You can place coordinate dimensions in any order and on either side of the origin with respect to
the dimension axis. You can also add additional coordinate dimensions to existing coordinate
dimension groups.
See Also
Add a Dimension to a Dimension Group (on page 221)
Dimension Prefix Dialog Box

Adds prefix, suffix, superfix, and subfix text to a dimensional value. You can use this dialog box
while you place or edit a dimension.
(A) Superfix
(B) Prefix
(C) Value
(D) Suffix
(E) Subfix
Special Characters — Applies a font character to the dimension prefix. You can use the
buttons to apply font characters, such as a diameter, counterbore, depth, and initial length.
Superfix — Specifies superfix information.
Prefix — Specifies prefix information.
Suffix — Specifies suffix information.
Subfix — Specifies subfix information.
Apply — Applies the prefix to the dimension.
See Also
Edit a Dimension Prefix (on page 229)

Dimension Properties Dialog Box

Sets the properties of a dimension or dimension style. You can point to a dimension and
right-click to access this dialog box from Properties on the shortcut menu.
See Also
General Tab (on page 234)
Units Tab (on page 234)
Secondary Units Tab (on page 237)
Text Tab (on page 235)
Lines and Coordinate Tab (on page 236)
Spacing Tab (on page 237)
Terminator and Symbol Tab (on page 238)
General Tab
Sets general properties for dimensions.
Color - Sets colors for a driving, driven, or error dimension.
 Driving Dimension- Sets the color used for driving dimensions.
 Driven Dimension- Sets the color used for driven dimensions.
 Error Dimension - Sets the color for error dimensions. Error dimensions are driving or
driven dimensions that the software cannot recalculate correctly after parametric attributes
on driving dimensions are changed.
Scale Mode - Sets the scale mode to automatic or manual.
Automatic - Determines a correct dimensional value based on the scale set in the drawing
view.
Manual- Scales the dimensional value. The scale value determines the dimensional value. For
example, for a scale of 1:100mm, set the manual value to 0.01.
Manual mode only works with dimensions that are set to Driven.
Units Tab
Sets the primary units for dimensions.
Linear — Specifies the unit settings for a linear dimension.
Units — Sets the primary units for linear dimensions.
Unit Label — Sets the unit label. You can type up to 20 characters for a unit label.
Subunit Label — Sets the subunit label. You can type up to 20 characters for a subunit label.
Round-Off — Sets the round-off for the value. This control is sensitive to the unit setting
(decimal or fractional) and contains values appropriate for the unit. This control is also sensitive
to the dimension that you place and contains values appropriate for the dimension.

Maximum Subunits — Sets the maximum subunits value. You can type a value up to 255. This
value applies to feet and inches. For example, if you type 13, the dimension appears as 13
inches and not 1 foot and 1 inch.
Angular — Sets the units for an angular dimension.
Units — Sets the primary units for angular dimensions. Options are Degrees, Deg-Min-Sec, or
Radians.
(decimal or fractional) and contains values appropriate for the unit. This control is also sensitive
to the dimension that you place and contains values appropriate for the dimension.
Zeroes — Specifies if a zero is on the left or right of the decimal in a dimension.
Leading — Places a zero to the left of the decimal point if no numbers appear to the left.
Trailing — Places zeros to the right of the decimal point. The number of zeros placed is based
on the active setting for Round-Off. For example, if the dimensional value is .5, and the
round-off setting is .1234, the dimensional value appears as .5000.
Delimiter — Specifies the decimal delimiter for a dimension.
 Period — Sets a period as the decimal delimiter.
 Comma — Sets a comma as the decimal delimiter.
 Space — Sets a space as the decimal delimiter.
Text Tab
Sets the text options for dimensions.
Text - Sets text options for a dimension.
Font - Sets the font type for the dimension text.
Font Style - Specifies the font style to use for the text in a dimension.
Font Size - Sets the size for text in a dimension.
Orientation - Sets the orientation for the text on a dimension. For example, the dimension text
looks like the following picture when you select Vertical.
Position - Sets the position where text appears in relation to the base line. The base line is an
imaginary horizontal line directly under a line of text. For example, when you select Above, the
dimension text looks like the following picture.
Tolerance Text - Sets options for text in certain types of dimensions that have related
tolerances. You can set the dimension type on the dimension ribbon bar.

Size - Sets the size of the text for tolerance text. The value is a ratio of the dimension text size.
For example, if you type .5, the size of the tolerance text is half the size of the dimension text.
Limit Arrangement - Sets the text arrangement on limit dimensions.
Lines and Coordinate Tab

Dimension Lines — Sets options for dimension lines. A dimension line defines the
measurement of a part feature. Dimension lines consist of a solid line with arrows at both ends
and a dimension in the center.
Connect — Controls if the dimension line extends between both terminators when you place the
dimension text and terminators outside the projection lines.
Width — Sets the width of the dimension line.
Stack Pitch — Sets the distance between stacked dimensions. The value is a ratio of the
dimension font size.
Break Line — Sets the size of the break line for the linear, angular, or radial dimension. This
value is a ratio of the font size.
The dimension break line is separate from the leader and balloon break lines.
Coordinate — Sets options for coordinate dimensions.
Auto-Jog — Turns the jog control on or off on the Dimension ribbon. You can use this option
only when you place a coordinate dimension. If you set Auto-Jog and the distance between two
dimensions is less than the value set for Stack Pitch, then you can place the dimension with a
jog in the projection line.
Common Origin — Sets the symbol type for the common origin on coordinate dimensions. You
can set the symbol type to dot, circle, or none.
Text Position — Positions text in a coordinate dimension.
Stack Pitch — Sets the distance between stacked dimensions. The value is a ratio of the
dimension font size.
Projection Line — Sets options for the projection line of a dimension.
Display — Controls the display of projection lines on linear dimensions. You can set the display
to none (off), origin, measurement, or origin and measurement. You can use this option to hide
projection lines when they overlap and you are using a pen plotter.
Element Gap — Sets the distance that the projection line is set back from the element you want
to dimension. This value is a ratio of the dimension font size.
Extension — Sets the distance that the projection line extends beyond the dimension. This
value is a ratio of the dimension font size.
Angle — Sets the slant angle of the projection lines on dimensions. This option is useful when
you need to place a dimension on isometric drawings.
Center Mark — Places a center line automatically when you dimension a nonlinear element.
Extend Center Mark — Displays projection lines on center marks. Extend Center Mark only
works when the Center Mark option is selected as well.

Secondary Units Tab

Sets the secondary units for dimensions.
Linear — Specifies the unit settings for a linear dimension.
Units — Sets the secondary units in drawings with dual unit display. For example, the primary
unit can be inches, while the secondary unit can be millimeters. When you place the dimension,
it displays both units. The software derives the secondary unit by converting the primary unit.
Unit Label — Sets the secondary units label in drawings with dual unit display. You can type up
to 20 characters.
Subunit Label — Sets the secondary subunit label in drawings with dual unit display. You can
type up to 20 characters.
Round-Off — Sets the round-off value for secondary units in drawings with dual unit display.
Maximum Subunits — Sets the maximum subunits used for secondary subunits in drawings
with dual unit display.
Zeroes — Specifies if a zero appears on the left or right of the decimal in a dimension.
Leading — Places a zero to the left of the decimal point if no numbers appear to the left.
Trailing — Places zeros to the right of the decimal point. The number of zeros placed is based
on the active setting for Round-Off. For example, if the dimensional value is .5, and the
round-off setting is .1234, the dimensional value appears as .5000.
Dual Unit Display — Selecting/Activating this checkbox displays secondary units for
dimensions in drawings. For example, the primary unit can be inches, while the secondary unit
is millimeters. Both units display when you place the dimension. The software derives the
secondary unit by converting the primary unit.
Spacing Tab
Sets dimension spacing options. All options are a ratio of the dimension text value.
Text Clearance Gap — Sets the space between the text and the dimension line.
Dual Display Vertical Gap — Sets the space between the primary and secondary units when
dual unit display is active. You can set Dual Unit Display on the Secondary Units tab so that
dimensions display two units.
Line Spacing — Sets the amount of space between the superfix or subfix and the dimension
text.
Dimension Above Line Gap — Sets the space between the dimension text and the dimension
line.
Horizontal Tolerance Gap — Sets the space between the dimensional value and the tolerance
on dimensions.
Vertical Tolerance Gap — Sets the space between the upper and lower tolerance value on
dimensions.
Vertical Limits Gap — Sets the space between the upper and lower dimensional values on limit
dimensions.

Symbol Gap — Sets the space between the symbol and the dimension line. You can also set
the space between the symbol and the dimension text.
Prefix/Suffix Gap — Sets the amount of space between the prefix or suffix and the dimension
text.
Horizontal Box Gap — Sets the space between the dimension text and the horizontal edges of
the box on dimensions.
Vertical Box Gap — Sets the space between the dimension text and the vertical edges of the
box on dimensions.
Terminator and Symbol Tab

Sets terminator and symbol options for dimensions. A terminator is a graphic symbol, such as
an arrow or dot, placed at the end of a leader.
Terminator — Sets options for terminators.
Type — Sets the terminator type for all terminators. Examples of some of the terminator types
are provided below.
Arrow (Filled)
Arrow (Hollow)
Arrow (Open)
Back Slash
Blank
Circle
Dot

Slash
Size — Sets the size of the terminator. The value is a ratio of the dimension text size. For
example, if you set Font Size on the Text tab to be .2 cm and Size to be 2, the terminator is
twice the size of the dimension text.
Inside Limit — Controls the terminator position relative to a dimension's projection lines. The
Inside Limit is calculated as a constant times the dimension font size. For example, if the font
size is 0.125 inches and the Inside Limit is set to 3 (3 x font size), any dimension with a value
greater than or equal to 0.375 inches positions its terminators on the inside of the projection
lines. Any dimension with a value less than 0.375 inches positions its terminators on the outside
of the projection lines.
Display — Specifies which end of the terminator displays or if both ends display. You can set
the display to none (off), origin, measurement, or both origin and measurement. The following
picture shows the display when you select Origin and Measurement.
Freespace Type — Sets the terminator type for a dimension with a terminator placed in free
space.
Origin Type — Sets the terminator type used on the origin of a linear dimension.
This setting affects dimensions only at placement. You can change the terminator's
position after placement by dragging the terminator to the other side of the projection line.
In the example below, the inside limit value is 3, the font size is 0.1 in., and the dimension line is
.317 in. in length. Therefore:
Dimension value > 3 (inside limit) * .01 (font size)
The inside limit affects newly-placed dimensions only. The setting has no effect if the
dimension value is changed because of changes in the parent geometry.
Datum Type — Sets the terminator type for datum frames. If you select Normal, the datum
frame uses the active terminator type for dimensions. If you select Anchor, the datum frame
uses an anchor terminator.
Symbol — Sets options for symbols in dimensions.

Placement — Sets the placement position for the symbol on diameter and radial and linear
dimensions for an arc. You can place the symbol before or after the dimension. You can also
hide the symbol.
Not to Scale — Displays an underline, zigzag, or no indicator on driven dimensions with
overridden values. You can use the zigzag option only on linear dimensions. You can override a
driven dimension value by typing a new value in the Edit Value box on a dimension ribbon.
Suppress Diameter — Suppresses the diameter symbol on diameter dimensions.
Distance Between Command

Places a linear dimension that measures the distance between elements or key points. You
can place linear dimensions in stacked dimension groups.
You can place chained dimension groups.
You can also add linear dimensions to existing linear dimension groups.
See Also

Not To Scale Command (Shortcut Menu)

Returns a driven dimension to its actual value. You can use this command only on a
dimensional value that has been edited. Editing a dimensional value overrides the original value
and makes the dimension not-to-scale. For example, if you override the dimensional value that
is 15 millimeters to be 30 millimeters, the actual size of the line that you see would still be 15
millimeters.
Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must select a dimension.
See Also

SmartDimension Command
Places a dimension for the following:
 Length and angle of a line
 Radius and diameter of a circle
 Length, angle, radius, and diameter of an arc
 Radius of an ellipse or curve
See Also
Place a Linear, Angular, or Radial Dimension (on page 226)
Symmetric Command
Makes elements symmetric about an axis. The characteristics of the first element selected,
such as size and position, are maintained by the symmetric relationship.

See Also
Make Elements Symmetric About an Axis (on page 286)
Symmetric Diameter Command

Places a dimension that measures the distance between a center line and another element
or key point, multiplies the distance by two, and displays the value as a diameter. You can place
dimensions that measure the symmetric diameter of elements in a dimension group.
You can also add additional symmetric diameter dimensions to an existing dimension group.
See Also
Place a Symmetric Diameter Dimension (on page 227)
Setting Paper and Model Units

Each document in the software is a container of sheets, where each sheet is a virtual sheet of
paper that displays model information.
The software supports measurements in two different spaces: paper space and model space.
The paper space units represent physical measurements on the virtual sheet. The model space
units represent real-world measurements associated with the model.
Within the drawing environment, "model space" is synonymous with the term "world
space".
You can define the relationship between paper space and model space on the Sheet Setup
dialog box. The default relationship between the paper and model spaces is 1:1. In other words,
one unit of model space is equivalent to one unit of paper space. For example, if a text box with
a font size of 1 inch in paper space is compared to a vertical line 1 inch in length, the text box
and line appear on the paper to have the same height. However, if you change the drawing
scale to 1:2, the line appears half as tall on the sheet as the text. If you change the drawing
scale to 2:1, the line appears twice as tall on the sheet as the text. In either case, if you select
the line, the length readout remains at 1 inch.

In the current software, you can place only balloons, leaders, and dimensions in paper space.
These graphics annotate objects in the model space but appear in paper space. You can place
text boxes in either paper space or model space.
 If you insert an .igr or .sym document into the drawing sheet with Insert > Object, the
terminators, spaces, text, and styles appear in paper units relative to the source document.
The dimension lines and extension lines scale as though they are in real-world units. This
behavior can cause the dimensions and text to appear very large or small in the container
document. You can set or change the size for dimension text and annotations by clicking
Style on the Format menu. On the Style dialog box, you select the type of style you want to
set or modify (dimension or text), and then click New or Modify to set the font size for
dimension text or a text box. Changing the font size of dimension-text style or a text-box
style changes only the dimension text or annotations with the modified style applied to them.
 You can also set the font size for individual dimension text or annotations by overriding the
style that you applied. You do this by selecting the dimension or text box and editing its
properties with Properties on the shortcut menu or from the Edit menu.
 You can adjust how the model units fit within the printable sheet area by clicking Sheet
Setup on the File menu. On the Size and Scale tab, you can select a scale setting by
clicking an item on the Select Scale dropdown list. The value that you select causes the
model to resize within the printable area, but neither the paper unit information (dimensions
and annotations) nor model unit information is scaled.
See Also
Fit a Sketch Drawn in Real-World Units on the Drawing Sheet (on page 244)
Fit a Sketch Drawn in Real-World Units on the Drawing Sheet

2. On the Size and Scale tab of the Sheet Setup dialog box, select the sheet size that you
want. After you close the dialog box, the correct sheet size is displayed.
3. Draw the elements that you want using real-world units. Do not worry if the elements do not
fit on the sheet.
4. Click File > Sheet Setup to check the ratio of the sheet size to the overall drawing size.
5. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, on the Size and Scale tab, click Custom. You should use
the ratio of the drawing to the drawing sheet to determine the custom scale for the drawing
sheet. After you close the dialog box, the drawing scales to the scale that you selected. All
dimensions appear in real-world units.

Measuring Distances and Areas

You can also measure the length of a line or the diameter of a circle by selecting the element
and looking at the value on the ribbon. For more detailed work, the software provides
commands for measuring distances or areas in a drawing. Even when you are in the middle of a
task, you can measure distances or areas with these commands.
 Measure Distance measures the distance between points on elements and points in free
space.
 Measure Area measures the area inside one or more closed boundaries.
The distances are shown using the current units of measure for the document. To set the units
for measuring distances or areas, click File > Properties, and then set the units for the length,
area, or angle of a drawing on the Units tab.
This setting does not set units for dimensions. To set the active units for dimensions, click
Format > Style and set the units for a dimension style. Active units control the format for
dimensions when they are placed. For existing dimensions, you can click Edit > Properties and
set the units for dimensions that you have selected.
Bearing and Azimuth
You can orient your drawing in an environment with a specific bearing and azimuth. This tool is
useful for applications such as civil engineering.
Bearing and Azimuth is available only if you use the Tools > Custom Commands
command to place it on a toolbar or menu. On the Toolbars tab of the Custom Commands
dialog box, click Tools to access the command.
See Also
Measure an Area (on page 246)
Measure a Distance (on page 246)

Measure an Area
1. On the Label toolbar, click Measure Area .
2. Click inside a closed boundary to measure its area.
The area and perimeter measurements for the closed boundary appear next to the pointer.
The measured area appears as a gray fill.
As you click points, press SHIFT to display the total area and perimeter by the pointer.
 If you are measuring multiple areas and want to clear a measurement, click inside one of the
filled, closed boundaries that you have measured while pressing the SHIFT key.
 When you are drawing elements or modifying a drawing, you can measure an area with
Measure Area at any time.
 You can press TAB to toggle between the area and total area. You can also press CTRL +
C to copy the value to the Clipboard. You can then press CTRL + V to paste the value to a
text box or ribbon field.
See Also
Measuring Distances and Areas (on page 245)
Measure a Distance
1. On the toolbar, click Measure Distance .

2. Click in free space or click a key point. This identifies the point to measure from.
3. Click a point to measure to. The distance between the two points appears next to the
pointer.
4. Click another point to measure to. The distance between the last two points and the
distance between the first point and the last point appear next to the pointer.
 When you move the pointer over a key point, the distance between the current location of
the pointer and the last point you clicked appears, along with the delta values. The delta
values are the distances, as measured along the X and Y axes.
 When you click a third point, the cumulative distance between the first and last point that
you clicked appears next to the pointer.
 When you are in the middle of a task, you can use Measure Distance at any time.
 You can press TAB to move between the distance and total distance. You can also press
CTRL + C to copy the value to the Clipboard. You can then press CTRL + V to paste the
value to a text box or ribbon field.
See Also
Set the Unit of Measure

2. On the Properties dialog box, click the Units tab. You can set the units for the length, area,
or angle of a drawing.
This setting does not set units for dimensions. To set the active units for dimensions,
click Style on the Format menu and set the units for a dimension style. Active units control
the format for dimensions when they are placed. For existing dimensions, you can click
Properties on the Edit menu and set the units for dimensions that you have selected.
3. On the Units tab, set the options you want.

See Also
Measuring Distances and Areas Commands

This section contains topics related to the commands used for measuring distances and areas.
Measure Area Command

Displays the most recently selected area and perimeter of the closed boundary in the current
document units. When multiple closed boundaries are selected, the command displays the total
area and perimeter of all selected boundaries in the current document units. Press SHIFT while
clicking to add other closed boundaries to the current selection.
The Measure Area command is also available on the Dimension Toolbar.

See Also
Measure an Area (on page 246)
Measure Distance Command

Measures the distance between points in free space or between key points. When you are in
the middle of a task, you can measure distances using Measure Distance at any time.
When you move the pointer over a key point, the distance between the current location of the
pointer and the last point you clicked appears, along with the delta values. The delta values are
the distances, as measured along the x and y axes.

When you click a third point, the cumulative distance between the first and last point that you
clicked appears next to the pointer.
The Measure Distance command is also available on the Dimension Toolbar.

See Also
Measure a Distance (on page 246)
Using the Variable Table

You can use the Variable Table to define and edit functional relationships between the
dimensions of a design in a familiar spreadsheet format. The Variable Table is accessed with
Variables on the Tools menu. There are two types of variables: dimensions displayed in the
design and variables you create directly in the Variable Table. Dimension variables directly
control elements of a design. The variable you assign must be set equal to a value or
mathematical expression; for example, PI = 3.14159.
You can use variables to do the following:
 Drive a dimension with another dimension; Dimension A = Dimension B
 Define a constant; pi=3.14
 Drive a dimension with a formula; Dimension A = pi * 3.5
 Drive a dimension with a formula and another dimension; Dimension A = pi * Dimension B
 Drive a dimension with a formula that includes a function; Dimension A = Dimension B + cos
(Dimension C)
 Drive a dimension with a value from a spreadsheet, such as a Microsoft Excel document, by
copying the value from the spreadsheet into the Variable Table. Besides Excel, you can use
any other spreadsheet software that can link or embed objects.
Accessing the Variable Table

After you select Variables on the Tools menu, a table appears with the following columns:
Type, Name, Value, and Formula. Each row of the table displays a variable.

Entering Data into the Variable Table

When you open the Variable Table in the document, all the dimensional values for the
dimensions on the drawing sheet appear in the columns. The name that appears in the Name
column is automatically generated by the software. You can change the name to something
more logical if you want.
Restricting the Display of Variables

You can restrict the display of variables in the table using Filter on the Variable Table window:
 You can display only the variables for dimensions that the software created.
 You can also display variables that are associated with elements in the current document or
the active window.
 You can also display a set of elements that you have selected in the document.
Creating Expressions
The system provides a set of standard mathematical functions. The functions can be typed in
with the proper syntax or you can use the Function Wizard to select and define the function.
The Function Wizard is convenient when you forget the proper syntax for a math function. You
start the Function Wizard by clicking Fx in the Variable Table. The function is written in the
Formula column of the selected row.
Examples
Suppose you draw a sheet metal bracket and you want to build a relationship between the bend
radius and stock thickness. You can use a formula in the Variable Table to build and manage
this relationship. The following example illustrates how the Variable Table would look if you built
a relationship that changes the bend radius when the stock thickness changes.
Type Name Value Formula
Variable Stock_thickness .25
Dimension Bend_radius .375 1.5 * stock_thickness
Here are some more examples of how you might set up the Variable Table:
Type Name Value Formula
Variable c 2.0 kg
Variable d 10.0 rad @c:\bearing.xls!sheet1!R6C3
Variable e 20 mm @c:\bearing.xls!sheet1R!6C3
Argument Conventions
The following argument conventions are used in the Variable Table:
 In the syntax line, required arguments are bold and optional arguments are not.

 Argument names should follow the rules for Visual Basic.

 In the text where functions and arguments are defined, required and optional arguments are
not bold. Use the format in the syntax line to determine whether an argument is required or
optional.
See Also
Create a Variable with a Link to a Spreadsheet (on page 253)
Create a Variable with a Value or Expression (on page 251)
Create a Variable Using a Function or Subroutine (on page 255)
Edit an Existing Variable (on page 252)
Create a Variable with a Value or Expression

2. In the Variable Table, in the Unit Type list, select the unit type for the variables value. The
default type is Distance, which means that any expression created will be for a distance.
For example, if you want to create a variable to control an angular dimension, you must
select Angular.
To store a value without units, select Scalar from the list.
4. Type a name for the variable that you want to create. Press ENTER.
5. In the same row, in the Formula column, do one of the following:
 Type the value that you want for the variable.
 Type a simple expression for the variable. A simple expression consists of using basic
mathematical operators to set up an equation using values and other variables. For
example, if variables Var1 and Var2 already exist, you can type the following formulas
when creating a new variable:
Var1 * Var2
Var1 / 3.0
(Var2 + 5.0) * Var1
Var2 ^ 2
References to existing variables in a formula are case-sensitive. For example, if you
create the variable Var1, you cannot reference it using var1.
6. Click Enter to create the variable.
See Also
Open Source Command (on page 259)
Paste Link Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 260)
Filter Command (Variable Table Shortcut Menu) (on page 257)

Edit an Existing Variable

1. In the document, select the dimensions that you want to appear in the Variable Table.
3. The Variable Table automatically displays the dimensions that are selected in the
document. To see other dimensions and variables, click Filter on the Variable Table
window.
4. On the Filter dialog box, set the following options to specify which variables or dimensions
are displayed in the Variable Table. For example, to see all the dimensions and variables in
the Variable Table, set the following options:
 In the Type box, select Dimensions and User Variables.
 In the Named By box, select Both.
 In the Graphics In box, select File. When you click OK, the settings are saved, so the
next time you use Filter, the last settings are used. A convenient method of limiting the
number of variables and dimensions displayed is to name the ones you use frequently.
Then, on the Filter dialog box, in the Named By box, click Users to display the named
variables and dimensions.
5. After a variable is displayed in the Variable Table, you can change any of its attributes,
except its type and the unit type. On the Variable Table, in the Value column of a variable,
type a new value to change the variable.
6. In the Formula column, click the cell and use one of several methods to create a new
formula.
 To access Filters on the shortcut menu, put the mouse pointer in the white area of the
Variable Table and right- click.
 The default filter is set to Last selected window; consequently, only the variables that are
associated with elements in the active window display. To display all the variables that are
associated with the elements in the current document, set the filter to File.
See Also

Create a Variable with a Link to a Spreadsheet

You can use Microsoft Excel to link a variable to a spreadsheet. Besides Excel, you can use
other spreadsheet software that can link or embed objects. Before you can link a variable to a
spreadsheet, you must first create the variables you want in the design document. Click Related
Topics for more information about how to create a variable.
1. In another application, such as Excel, open the document that contains the spreadsheet you
want to link to. The spreadsheet should contain the appropriate values for dimensional
relationships.
You can edit this link by clicking the Edit > Links command.
2. Open the design document that you want to link to and click Tools > Variables. Arrange the
windows of the spreadsheet document and the Variable Table in the design document so
that you can see the appropriate cells in both documents.
3. In the spreadsheet, select the cell that you want to link to. It can be a single cell or two
adjacent cells, where the first cell contains the value and the second cell contains the units.
4. Copy the selected cells. For example, if you are using Excel, click Edit > Copy.
5. In the Variable Table, in the Formula column, click the cell of the variable that you want to
link the spreadsheet to.
6. On the shortcut menu, click Paste Link.
 To access the shortcut menu, put the mouse pointer in the white area of the Variable
Table and right-click.
 Press ENTER to accept the value you pasted. When you edit the value in the
spreadsheet, the variable in the Variable Table updates as well. For example, when
you link the dimensions in the design document to an Excel spreadsheet, you can
change the dimensions of the design by editing the corresponding values in the Excel
spreadsheet. The design document automatically updates.
You can edit the links with Edit Links command on the shortcut menu.
See Also

Format a Column
2. Drag the appropriate grid lines to adjust the column width.
See Also
Variable Table Dialog Box (on page 260)
Alphabetical List of Functions

The following functions are available in the Variable Table. They are referred to as math and
trig functions.
ABS Returns the absolute value of a number
ATN Returns the arctangent of a number
COS Returns the cosine of a number
EXP Returns e raised to the power of a given number
FIX Returns the integer portion of a number.
INT Rounds a number down to the nearest integer
LOG Returns the natural algorithm of a number
RND Rounds a number to a specified number of digits
SGN Returns an integer indicating the sign of a number
SIN Returns the sine of the given angle
SQR Returns the square root of number.
TAN Returns the tangent of an angle
The following functions are also available in the Variable Table.
User, Visual Basic Relates variables through a user function,

usually defined with Visual Basic.
See Also
Format a Column (on page 254)
Insert a Function into a Formula (on page 256)

Create a Variable Using a Function or Subroutine

2. In the Variable Table, in the Unit Type list, select the unit type. This is the unit type for the
variables value. The default type is Distance.
5. In the same row, in the Formula column, click a cell.
6. Click Function Wizard.
7. Click the function that you want in the Function Wizard dialog box.
8. Enter the appropriate values in the dialog box. The Function Wizard dialog box displays the
available functions and appropriate input. For example, if the variables Var1 and Var2
already exist, some valid formulas using functions are as follows:
Sqr(Var1) * Sin(Var2)
Sqr( Var1^2 + Var2^2 )
 You can write external functions and subroutines in BASIC and use them as variable
formulas. You can write these functions in Visual Basic, or any text editor, and save them in
a .BAS file. The Function Wizard steps you through the process of selecting the BASIC
module, the specific function, and the necessary input and output.
 If you type a function and you cannot remember the argument list, press CTRL + A after you
have typed the equal sign, function name, and opening parenthesis. This activates the
Function Wizard with the function already selected for you.
 You can also type expressions with functions directly in the cell in the Formula column.
See Also

Insert a Function into a Formula

2. In the Variable Table, click the function cell in which you want to insert the formula.
4. Click the function category and the function name.
5. Click Next.
The Function Wizard dialog box displays the arguments for the function.
6. Type the values for the arguments.
7. Click Finish to insert the completed function into your formula.
You can type values, references, names, formulas, and other functions into the boxes on
the Function Wizard dialog box. These entries must produce valid values for the argument. If
an argument is required, the word "required" appears in the display area on the Function
Wizard Step 2 of 2 dialog box.
See Also
Edit a Formula Containing a Function (on page 256)
Edit a Formula Containing a Function

2. In the Variable Table, click a cell that contains a formula that has a function.
3. Select a function that you want to replace.
4. Click Function Wizard. The Function Wizard dialog box displays the function you
selected.
5. Type a new function to replace the existing function.
6. Click Next.
7. Click Finish to replace the function in the formula.
See Also
Variable Table Dialog Box (on page 260)

Variables Commands and Dialog Boxes

This section contains topics on the commands and dialog boxes related to using the variable
table.
Filter Command (Variable Table Shortcut Menu)

Restricts the display in the Variable Table to variables that you select on the Filter dialog box.
The default filter is set to Last selected window; consequently, only the variables that are
associated with elements in the active window display. To display all the variables that are
associated with the elements in the current document, set the filter to File.
To select this command from the shortcut menu, click Tools > Variables, and then pause
the mouse pointer in the Variable Table window.
See Also
Filter Dialog Box (on page 257)
Filter Dialog Box

Controls which variables should appear in the Variable Table.
Type — Specifies the type of variables that are displayed in the Variable Table. If you click
Dimension, then only dimension variables are displayed in the Variable Table; these variables
directly control elements of a design. If you click User Variables, then only logical variables that
you created are displayed. This variable type cannot directly control a design. A user variable
must be set equal to a value or mathematical expression; for example, PI = 3.14159. Variables
can control dimensional relationships by setting the dimensional relationship equal to the
variable.
Named by — Controls the view in the Variable Table so that only named variables are
displayed.
User — Displays only variables that you have named.
System — Displays only variables, usually the dimensions, that the software has created.
Both — Displays all variables that are named.
Graphics in — Displays variables that are associated with elements in the current document,
active window, or group of elements that you have selected. The default filter is set to Last
selected window.
Last selected window — Displays variables that are associated with elements in the active
window.
Select set — Displays variables that are associated with elements in a group that you have
selected in the document.
File — Displays variables that are associated with elements in the current document.

See Also
Function Wizard Step 1 of 2 Dialog Box

Selects the function you want to enter.
Function Category — Selects subsets of all available functions. If you click the All in the
Function Category box, all the available functions appear. If you select any other category, only
those functions that belong to that category appear.
Custom functions that you define are included either under their assigned categories or in the
category you have defined if no other categories are assigned. See the Alphabetical List of
Functions (on page 254).
Function Name — Lists all built-in and custom functions that are available in the selected
category. Also lists built-in and custom macro functions if a macro sheet is active. The display
area describes the selected function.
Next — Moves to the next dialog box of the Function Wizard. You should click Next after
selecting the function you want to insert into the Formula Bar or the selected cell. After you
finish typing values into the appropriate fields, the Function Wizard Step 2 of 2 dialog box is
displayed. This dialog box appears first if you are entering a math and trig function.
If you select a function that you defined using Visual Basic, a dialog box appears first that
allows you to open the document that contains the function. After you open the document, the
Function Wizard Step 2 of 2 dialog box displays.
Finish — Inserts the function into the Formula Bar. If you do not type an argument, the
software inserts the argument names as placeholders in the formula.
Cancel — Closes the Function Wizard dialog box without entering anything into the Formula
Bar or into the selected cell.
See Also
Edit a Formula Containing a Function (on page 256)

Function Wizard Step 2 of 2 Dialog Box

Enters values, references, names, formulas, and other functions into the fields. The dialog box
changes according to the function you select in the Function Wizard Step 1 of 2 dialog box.
Your entries must produce valid values for the arguments. If an argument is required for the
function to be entered successfully, the word "required" appears in brackets in the display area.
FuncName — Displays the name of the function.
FnSummary — Displays a summary of the function.
Number — Displays the number of the function.
First Argument — Displays the argument of the variable. In the Function Wizard Step 1 of 2
dialog box, if the selected variable is a subroutine that you defined, more than one box appears
on the Function Wizard Step 2 of 2 dialog box. The check box to the right of the field indicates
whether the variable is an input or output argument.
Back — Moves from the current Function Wizard dialog box to the preceding one.
Finish — Enters the completed function in the Variable Table.
See Also
Function Wizard Step 1 of 2 Dialog Box (on page 258)
Alphabetical List of Functions (on page 254)
Open Source Command

Opens a spreadsheet in the Variable Table that has been linked to it with Paste Link.
 Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must click the Tools >
Variables command.
 To access the Open Source command, right-click the Formula box in the Variable Table.
On the shortcut menu, click Edit Links. Select a link, and then click Open Source.
See Also

Paste Link Command (Shortcut Menu)

Links data in a document to a cell in the Variable Table.
Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must select Variables on
the Tools menu.
See Also
Variables Command
Accesses the Variable Table, which operates much like a software spreadsheet. The
Variable Table allows you to define and manipulate drawing variables and their values, as well
as establish functional relationships between the design variables. For example, you can use
the Variable Table to create expressions for dimensional values. You can restrict the display of
variables in the table using Filter on the Variable Table window to display only the variables for
dimensions that the software created, display variables that are associated with elements in the
current document or the active window, or display a set of elements that you have selected in
the document.
You can use Tools > Customize to place the Variables button on a toolbar.
Variable Table Dialog Box

Displays, defines, and manipulates design variables and functional relationships between the
variables. This table operates much like a software spreadsheet. The design variables can be
dimensions in the document or variables defined with the Variable Table. The table consists of
the following columns: Type, Name, Value, Formula. Each row of the table displays a variable.
Unit Type — Specifies the unit of measure for the variable entered in the Variable Table. The
box is located in the top left corner of the Variable Table. The default type is distance which
means that any expression created will be a distance parameter. For example, if you want to
create a variable to control an angular dimension, you should change the unit type to angular.
Then, the variable created will be an angular type, which can be used to control an angular
dimensional relationship.
Enter — Accepts the edits you have made in the cell.
Cancel — Clears the contents of the cell and returns the cell to its previous value.
Filter — Access the Filter Dialog Box (on page 257) so that you can restrict the display of
variables in the Variable Table window.
Function Wizard — Accesses the Function Wizard Step 1 of 2 Dialog Box (on page 258).
Help — Activates online Help for the Variable Table dialog box.

The following items describe the columns in the Variable Table:

Type — Displays the variable type, generally the type of a dimension, such as DIM, VAR,
SCALAR, and so forth. DIM refers to a dimensional relationship. VAR refers to a variable that
you have created. This option is read-only.
Name — Names the variable. By default, the software places the name of a dimension in this
column. These names can be renamed to a more logical one, if you want. You must always
name variables that you define when you create them. A variable must be named if you want to
refer to it in the Formula column of another row. You can change the name by editing the Name
cell and then selecting Check at the top of the Variable Table.
Variable names should meet the following requirements:
 They must begin with a letter.
 They must contain only letters, numbers, and the underscore character; you cannot use
punctuation characters and spaces.
 They must be 40 characters or fewer.
Value — Displays the current value of the variable. A variable always has a value. You cannot
edit the value of a variable that has formula. You can edit driving dimensions with the Variable
Table.
Formula — Displays the function or relation that defines the value of the variable. You can enter
a mathematical expression in a cell in this column to calculate the value for a corresponding
dimension. If the Formula cell is empty, then the variable value is independent of other
variables.
When using variable names within a formula, the names are case sensitive. For example, the
names var1 and Var1 reference two different variables.
If a value is defined by a formula, the formula appears in the Formula cell. You can enter an
algebraic expression in the formula cell to define the value of the variable. The single line
expression must be in standard Visual Basic syntax. The formula can include any available
function. The resulting value of the formula is shown in the Value column of the variable.
The software provides a set of standard mathematical functions. You can also select Visual
Basic functions that you wrote and saved. The functions can be typed in with the proper syntax
or you can use the Function Wizard to select and define the inputs to the function. If the
function does not contain proper syntax, the software displays a message indicating that there is
an error in the formula.

Sample Workflows
Draw a Line with PinPoint

You can use PinPoint to draw a line starting at a specific x and y distance from a known
position in your drawing.
2. Click where you want the target point to be.
3. Change the step value in the PinPoint Ribbon if it is not already set to a value that is
appropriate for the operation.
5. Move the pointer around on the drawing sheet. PinPoint displays at the pointer its current x
and y positions in relation to the target point.
6. Click when the pointer is positioned where you want the line to begin.
7. Click where you want the second point of the line to be, or type the length and/or angle on
the Line/Arc Continuous ribbon and then click to draw the line.
8. If you are finished with the PinPoint command, click PinPoint on the Main toolbar to
dismiss the command.
See Also
Measure the Length of a Line

Even when you are in the middle of a task, you can measure distances using Measure
Distance. For example, consider the following workflow.
1. On the Draw toolbar, select Line/Arc Continuous and draw a line.
2. Click Tools > Measure Distance and measure a distance.

You do not need to exit Line/Arc Continuous before measuring a distance.
3. Right-click to exit Measure Distance. Line/Arc Continuous is still active—you can pick up
where you left off and continue using Line/Arc Continuous.

Dimension the Length of a Line

2. Click a line. SmartDimension dynamically displays a linear dimension.
3. Position the dimension, and then click to place it.
Dimension the Diameter of a Circle

2. Click a circle. SmartDimension dynamically displays a diameter dimension.
3. Position the dimension, and then click to place it.
Using Variables to Calculate Dimensional Values

You can use the Variable Table to create expressions that change dimensions in the drawing
when you change the expressions.
1. Open a drawing document.
2. Click Tools > Variables. The Variable Table displays.
3. On the Variable Table window, click Filter and define which variables you want to
display in the Variable Table. For example, in the Filter dialog box, if you select
Dimensions in Type and then select Last selected window, this displays all the
dimensions that appear in the active window.
The default filter is set to Last selected window, meaning that only the variables that
are associated with elements in the active window will display. To display all the variables
that are associated with the elements in the current document, set the filter to File.

4. In the Variable Table, click the Formula cell that displays the dimension that you want to
edit and type an arithmetic expression to calculate the value of the dimension: V681/2.
When you type an entry in the cell, the entry also appears in the Formula Bar.
5. On the Formula Bar, click Enter or press ENTER to calculate the result of the expression.
In this example, when V681 is modified, V680 is automatically updated to reflect the
relationship.
Create a Variable Using a Function or Subroutine

2. In the Variable Table, in the Unit Type list, select the unit type. This is the unit type for the
variables value. The default type is Distance.
5. In the same row, in the Formula column, click a cell.
7. Click the function that you want in the Function Wizard dialog box.
8. Enter the appropriate values in the dialog box. The Function Wizard dialog box displays the
available functions and appropriate input. For example, if the variables Var1 and Var2
already exist, some valid formulas using functions are as follows:
Sqr(Var1) * Sin(Var2)
Sqr( Var1^2 + Var2^2 )
 You can write external functions and subroutines in BASIC and use them as variable
formulas. You can write these functions in Visual Basic, or any text editor, and save them in
a .BAS file. The Function Wizard steps you through the process of selecting the BASIC
module, the specific function, and the necessary input and output.
 If you type a function and you cannot remember the argument list, press CTRL + A after you
have typed the equal sign, function name, and opening parenthesis. This activates the
Function Wizard with the function already selected for you.
 You can also type expressions with functions directly in the cell in the Formula column.

See Also
Linking Variables to a Spreadsheet

Before you can link a variable to a spreadsheet, you must first create the variables you want in
the design document. You can link to a spreadsheet created in Microsoft Excel or other
spreadsheet software that can link or embed objects.
1. In the current document, create a rectangle and dimensions as shown.
Use Line/Arc Continuous on the Draw ribbon to create and dimension the
rectangle as specified in the previous illustration.
2. Click Tools > Variables to display the dimensions you defined.
 Although the values that appear in the Name column are automatically generated by the
software, you can edit the names.
 By default, the Variable Table filter is set to Last selected window, meaning that only
the variables that are associated with elements in the active window will display. To
display all the variables that are associated with the elements in the current document,
set the filter to File.
3. In Excel, create and save a document that contains the spreadsheet you want to link to. The
spreadsheet should contain the appropriate values for dimensional relationships as follows:
4. Arrange the windows of the Excel document and the Catalog Manager document so that
you can see the appropriate cells in both documents.
5. In the Excel document, select the cell that you want to link to.
6. Click Edit > Copy to copy the selected cells.

7. Click the Catalog Manager document so that it becomes the active document.
8. In the Variable Table, in the Formula column, click the cell of the variable that you want to
link the spreadsheet to.
9. On the shortcut menu, click Paste Link.
 To access the shortcut menu, put the mouse pointer in the white area of the Variable
Table and right-click.
 Click Enter to accept the value you pasted.
 Repeat the previous steps as needed for the other values. The resulting Variable Table
should update as follows:
When you edit the value in the Excel document, the variable in the Variable Table updates as
well. When you link the dimensions in the Catalog Manager document to the Excel document,
you can change the dimensions of the Catalog Manager document by editing the corresponding
values in the Excel document. The Catalog Manager document automatically updates.
Transforming Elements
Using the software tools, you can easily change the shape, size, angle, or relationship of an
existing element. The toolbars listed below contain most of the buttons that you can use to
transform an element.
The Draw Toolbar

Element handles can be used to quickly transform elements. For example, you can change an
arc by clicking the element with the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar and dragging the element's
handles. The selected arc is transformed to a straight line by dragging the mid-point handle. The
selected arc is transformed to a circle by dragging an end point handle.
The Draw toolbar also provides options for extending or trimming elements. You can click
Extend to Next to extend an element, or you can click Trim or Trim Corner to trim an element.
You can also add fillets or chamfers by clicking Fillet or Chamfer on the Draw toolbar.
The Change Toolbar

Elements can be mirrored by clicking Mirror on the Change toolbar. The software mirrors one
or more selected elements about a line or axis that you define. You can also mirror and copy
elements.
You can rotate an element a precise angle about a specified point by using Rotate on the
Change toolbar. You can use the Rotate ribbon to change the Step Angle, Rotation Angle,
and Position Angle values.

You can use the Change toolbar to scale elements. Scalable elements include framed
elements, such as text boxes. After clicking Scale on the Change toolbar, you can use the
Scale ribbon to increase the Scale Factor value.
You cannot use the Scale option to scale or scale and copy elements in a drawing
view because a scale factor has already been applied to the drawing view.
You can also use the Change toolbar to transform elements. For example, selecting Equal and
clicking two elements will make the elements equal in size. The software will only allow you to
select elements that are valid input for a specific command. For example, if you use the
Concentric button, only circles, arcs, or ellipses can be selected.
When you apply a relationship between elements, the elements are modified to reflect
the relationship. If Maintain Relationships is set when you use the commands on the Change
toolbar to add relationships to your drawing, the added relationships will be maintained.
See Also
Changing the Shape of an Element (on page 267)
Extending or Trimming Elements (on page 273)
Changing the Shape of an Element

You can change the size, position, or orientation of an element with your pointer. When you
select an element with the Select Tool, its handles are displayed at key positions.
You can change the shape of a selected element by dragging one of its handles. The first figure
shows the effect of dragging an end point handle. The second figure shows the effect of
dragging the mid-point handle.
See Also
Modify an Element with the Select Tool (on page 268)

Modify an Element with the Select Tool

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Select Tool.
3. Position the pointer over one of the element's handles. The pointer changes to show that the
element can now be modified.
4. Drag the element handle to reposition it. You can use relationships to position the handle
precisely.
 To retain the angle or aspect ratio of the element you are modifying, hold the SHIFT key
while you drag the element's handle.
 To suspend the effect of relationship handles so that you can modify the element more
freely, hold the ALT key while you drag the handle. The software maintains relationships as
appropriate for the modified element.
Rotating Elements
Using Rotate on the Change toolbar, you can rotate one or more elements a precise angle
about a specified point.
You can first select the element and then click Rotate, or you can click the button and then the
element.
As you click to define the reference points for the rotation, the software dynamically displays a
reference axis for the rotation. If you want to define a precise location for the rotation, you can
type values in the ribbon. You can type increments in the Step Angle box if you want to
dynamically view the results of the rotation. For example, if the box is set to 30.0, the rotation is
displayed in 30 degree increments. The default setting is 0 degrees so that the rotation is fully
dynamic.
The Rotation Angle box on the ribbon displays the angle of change between the old and new
positions with a positive value. The Position Angle box displays an absolute angle of the new
position of the rotation. You can type values in both of these boxes and preview the results. You
then click to complete the rotation of the element.
By default, a copy is made of the element when you rotate it. If you do not want a copy, you
should clear Copy on the ribbon.
See Also
Rotate an Element (on page 269)

Rotate an Element
2. On the Change toolbar, click Rotate .

3. If you want to copy the rotated elements, click Copy on the ribbon.
4. Click where you want the center of rotation to be. The software dynamically displays a
reference axis for the rotation.
5. Click to define the other end of the reference axis. The software dynamically displays the
rotation axis and elements being rotated. The location and position of the reference axis
defines the rotation 'from' point.
6. Position the elements where you want them and then click to define the rotation 'to' point.
 To rotate by increments, type a value in the Step Angle box on the ribbon.
 You can click Rotate before you select elements to rotate.
 You can use relationship indicators to define the rotation 'from' and 'to' points.
 Instead of using Copy on the ribbon to copy the rotated elements, you can hold CTRL while
you click to define the 'to' point.
 Relationships between elements within the selection set are maintained if the relationships
still apply after the elements have been rotated.
using Rotate.
When you finish manipulating the view, the software returns you to Rotate at the point where
you left off.
See Also
Mirroring Elements
To mirror an element, you can click Mirror on the Change toolbar. The software mirrors one or
more selected elements about a line or axis that you define. You can mirror with or without
making a copy.

See Also
Mirror an Element (on page 270)
Mirror an Element
You can mirror elements by defining a mirror axis or by using a linear element as a mirror axis.
You can also mirror and copy elements.
To mirror about an existing mirror axis or linear element

2. On the Change toolbar, click Mirror .

3. If you want to copy the mirrored elements, click Copy on the ribbon.
4. Locate a mirror axis. The mirrored elements are displayed dynamically on the other side of
the axis.
If you locate a linear element, the element can be part of the selection set.
5. Position the pointer so that the mirrored elements are where you want them, and then click.
To mirror about a mirror axis that you define

3. If you want to copy the mirrored elements, click Copy on the ribbon.
4. Define one end of the mirror axis by click in free space or by clicking a key point. The
software displays the mirror axis and mirrored elements dynamically.
5. Move the pointer until the mirror axis and the mirrored elements are in position where you
want them to be, and then click.
 If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places a symmetric relationship when you
mirror and copy elements. The mirror axis is used as the symmetry axis.
 Relationships within the selection set are copied to the mirrored elements if they are still
applicable.
 You can click Mirror before you select elements to mirror.

 Instead of using Copy on the ribbon to mirror and copy, you can hold CTRL while you click
to position the elements.
 Instead of positioning the mirror axis dynamically, you can use the Position Angle box on
the ribbon.
 You can use relationship indicators to define a mirror axis.
using Mirror.
See Also
Scaling Elements
Scale on the Change toolbar reduces or enlarges selected elements by a scale factor that you
define. The scale factor is the same along the x and y axes. Scalable elements include framed
elements, such as text boxes. You cannot use Scale to scale or scale and copy elements in a
drawing view because a scale factor has already been applied to the drawing view.
Relationships within the selection set are maintained if the relationships are still applicable after
the elements have been scaled. If not, the relationships are deleted.
To define the new scale, you can click points on the drawing sheet or you can type a value in
the Scale Factor box on the ribbon. You can also use the Step box on the ribbon to make the
Scale Factor increase or decrease incrementally as you move the mouse.
See Also
Scale an Element (on page 271)
Scale an Element with Its Handles (on page 272)
Scale Command (on page 292)
Scale an Element
2. On the Change toolbar, click Scale .

3. If you want to copy the scaled elements, click Copy on the ribbon.
4. Click where you want the scale origin to be. The software displays a crosshair at the scale
origin, and dynamically displays a line between the scale origin and the pointer.

5. Move the pointer until the elements are the size you want and then click.
 Relationships within the selection set are maintained if the relationships are still applicable
after the elements have been scaled.
 You can click Scale before you select elements to scale.
 Instead of clicking to define the new scale, you can use the Scale Factor box on the ribbon.
 Instead of using Copy on the ribbon to scale and copy, you can hold CTRL while you click
to define the new scale.
 You can use relationship indicators with this command.
 You can use the Step box on the ribbon to make the Scale Factor increase or decrease
incrementally as you move the mouse.
 You can use the Reference box on the ribbon to change how the command dynamics
correspond to the Scale Factor.
 To change the overall size of the graphics with respect to the paper size, use Sheet Setup
on the File menu.
Scale an Element with Its Handles

You can use handles to scale framed elements such as text boxes, symbols, and linked or
embedded objects.
2. Position the pointer over one of its handles.
3. Drag the handle to scale the element or object.

Scale an Inserted Object Back to Its Original Model Size

When you insert an AutoCAD or MicroStation document into a drawing sheet using Object on
the Insert menu, the object is automatically scaled to fit the print area of the drawing sheet. The
print area size changes depending on the selected working sheet. In some cases, you might
want to work in model space and not paper space.
1. Click Insert > Object to insert an AutoCAD or MicroStation object.
2. Highlight the inserted object with the Select tool.
3. On the shortcut menu, click Properties.
4. On the Info tab of the Properties dialog box, click Scale (1:1). After you close the dialog
box, the inserted object changes back to the original model size.
 If an inserted object was scaled before bringing it into the drawing sheet, you might need to
adjust the scale on the Properties dialog box to get the results you want.
 After inserting an AutoCAD or MicroStation document, if you have not performed any other
actions, you can click Undo on the Edit menu to change the object back to the original
model size.
Extending or Trimming Elements

You can trim, extend or split/segment elements with buttons on the Draw toolbar. You can also
add fillets or chamfers by clicking Fillet or Chamfer on the Draw toolbar.
Relationships are added or removed as necessary when you trim or extend an element. For
example, if you trim part of a circle and more than one arc remains, concentric and equal
relationships are applied between the remaining arcs.

You can also draw a chamfer on two different elements with Chamfer on the Draw toolbar. The
elements must be linear, but do not have to intersect. The elements cannot be parallel to each
other.
When two lines intersect, you can draw a chamfer simply by clicking the corner and then moving
the pointer in the distance that you want. A final click on the drawing sheet places the chamfer
(B).
To place a fillet, you can click Fillet on the Draw toolbar and then select the elements you want
to modify. As with any command, you can use a combination of clicks and ribbon input.
See Also
Chamfer Command (on page 286)
Extend an Element
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Extend to Next .
 To extend one element at a time, click each element near the end you want to extend.

 To extend more than one element at the same time, drag the pointer over the elements
near the end you want to extend. When you release the mouse button, all the elements
are extended.
 Before you select an element to extend, you can view the possible results. When you move
the pointer over elements, the software displays the extension that will be drawn if you click.
 If an element does not extend in the direction you want it to, move your pointer closer to the
end of the element you want to extend.
See Also
Trim an Element
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Trim .
 To trim one element at a time, click each element you want to trim.
 To trim more than one element at the same time, drag the pointer over the elements.
When you release the mouse button, all the elements are trimmed.
 Before you click an element to trim, you can use QuickPick to see which portion of the
element will be trimmed. When you move the pointer over the elements, QuickPick
highlights the portion of the element that will be trimmed if you click.
 If you trim an element that does not intersect any other elements, the command trims the
entire element, effectively deleting the element.

See Also
Draw a Chamfer
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Chamfer .
2. On the ribbon, type a distance value in the Setback A box. The first linear element will be
set back this distance from the corner.
 To define the setback distance for the second linear element, type a value in the
Setback B box on the ribbon.
 To define the chamfer angle, type a value in the Angle box on the ribbon.
4. Click the linear element to which you want to apply the Setback A value.
5. Click the linear element to which you want to apply the Setback B value or the chamfer
angle value.
The lines that you select do not need to intersect, but they cannot be parallel.

6. Click to draw the chamfer.
 You can draw a chamfer only between linear elements.
 When two lines intersect, you can draw a chamfer simply by clicking the corner and then
moving the pointer in the distance that you want. A final click on the drawing sheet places
the chamfer.
 You can draw a chamfer with equal chamfer angles. Click the two linear elements you want
to use. When the chamfer is displayed dynamically, move the pointer until the setback
distance you want to use is displayed, and then click.
 You can switch the setback values for the linear elements. After you click the linear
elements you want to use, move the mouse pointer to one side or the other of the temporary
line display, and then click.
 When the elements you want to use cross each other, you can draw the chamfer in any of
the quadrants. The software trims the remaining elements at the end points of the chamfer.

 You can easily draw more than one 45 degree chamfer with the same setback distance. On
the ribbon, type a value in the Setback A or Setback B box. The value in the setback box is
active until you change it, so you can click one corner after another to draw equivalent
chamfers.
 You can draw a chamfer by dragging the pointer over the two elements that you want to
draw the chamfer between. When you use this method, the setback distance and angle
boxes on the ribbon are not active.
See Also
Chamfer Command (on page 286)
Draw a Fillet
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Fillet .
2. On the ribbon, type a radius in the Radius box.
3. Click one of the elements that you want to draw the fillet between. You can draw a fillet
between arcs, lines, circles, ellipses, and curves.
4. Click the other element.

5. Click to draw the fillet.
 You can draw a fillet without typing a radius. Click the two elements you want to use. Then
move the pointer to a position that defines the radius, and click.
 When the elements you want to use cross each other, you can draw a fillet at any of the
quadrants. The software trims the remaining elements at the end points of the fillet.
 You can draw a fillet at a corner with one click. On the ribbon, type a value in the Radius
box. Position the pointer over a corner, then click.
 The value in the Radius box is active until you change it, so you can click one corner after
another to draw fillets with the same radius.
 You can draw a fillet by dragging the pointer over the two elements that you want to draw
the fillet between. When you use this method, the Radius box on the ribbon is not active.
See Also

Draw a Corner by Trimming and Extending Elements

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Trim Corner .
 Click each element you want to trim or extend.
 Drag the pointer over one or more elements, and then release the mouse button. The
parts of the element over which you dragged the mouse remain—other parts are
trimmed or extended as necessary.
You can draw only one corner at a time by dragging the pointer.
See Also
Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements

You can apply relationships as you draw and place elements by using the relationship indicators
that appear by the pointer. You can also apply relationships to elements that you have already
placed on the drawing sheet.
Applying Relationships to Existing Elements

To apply relationships to elements that you have already placed on the drawing sheet, click a
button on the Change toolbar and then select the elements you want to relate. When you apply
a relationship between elements, the elements are modified to reflect the relationship. If
Maintain Relationships is set when you use the commands on the Change toolbar to add
relationships to your drawing, the added relationships will be maintained.
For example, selecting Equal and clicking two circles makes the two circles equal in size.

If a line and arc are not tangential, applying a tangent relationship modifies one or both elements
to make them tangent.
When you use commands on the Change toolbar, the software allows you to select only
elements that are valid input for that command. For example, when you use Concentric, the
command allows you to select only circles, arcs, and ellipses.
Perhaps you begin designing with a few key design parameters. You would usually draw known
elements in relation to one another and then draw additional elements to fill in the blanks.
As you draw and add elements to the drawing, the relationships are maintained and additional
relationships are applied.
Modifying Elements That Share Relationships

If two elements share a relationship, the relationship is maintained when you modify either one
of the elements. For example, if you move a circle that has a tangent relationship with a line, the
line also moves. The elements remain tangent.

If you move a circle that does not have a tangent relationship with a line, the line does not move.
Other elements that share relationships maintain them in the following ways:
If a line and an arc share a tangent relationship, they remain tangent when either is modified.
If a line and arc share a connect relationship, they remain connected when either is modified.
If two lines are horizontal, they remain horizontal even if you change the position and length of
one of the lines.
Deleting Relationships
You can delete a relationship as you would delete any other element. You select a relationship
handle, and then click Delete. Relationships are automatically deleted when their deletion is
necessary to allow a modification to occur. For example, if you rotate an element that has a
horizontal relationship applied to it, the relationship is automatically deleted.
If you want to change an element by adding or removing a relationship, and the element does
not change the way you expect, it may be controlled by a driving dimension. You can toggle the
dimension from driving to driven, and then make the change.
See Also
Make Elements Concentric (on page 283)
Make Elements or Key Points Horizontal or Vertical (on page 285)
Make Elements Collinear (on page 285)
Make Elements Perpendicular (on page 284)
Make Elements Tangential (on page 284)

Make Elements Concentric

1. On the Change toolbar, click Concentric .
2. Click an arc or circle.
3. Click another arc or circle. One element moves to make the two elements concentric.
The order in which you select the elements might determine which element moves to a
new location.
See Also
Concentric Command (on page 287)
Make Elements Parallel

1. On the Change toolbar, click Parallel .
2. Click a line.
3. Click another line. One line moves to make the two lines parallel.
new location.
See Also
Parallel Command (on page 289)

Make Elements Perpendicular

1. On the Change toolbar, click Perpendicular .
2. Click a line.
3. Click a line, arc, or circle. One line moves to make the two elements perpendicular.
new location.
See Also
Perpendicular Command (on page 290)
Make Elements Tangential

You can make two elements tangential.
To make elements tangential where their end points meet

1. On the Change toolbar, click Tangent .
2. Click at a point where two end points meet. The elements are adjusted to make the two
elements tangential.
To make elements tangential that are not connected at an end point

1. On the Change toolbar, click Tangent.
3. Click another element.
One element moves to make the two elements tangential.
new location.
See Also

Make Elements Equal

1. On the Change toolbar, click Equal .
3. Click another element. The elements become equal.
 You can make the following elements equal: two lines, two arcs, two circles, and an arc and
a circle.
 You cannot make a line equal to an arc or circle.
See Also
Equal Command (on page 288)
Make Elements or Key Points Horizontal or Vertical

1. On the Change toolbar, click Horizontal/Vertical .
 To make a line horizontal or vertical, click the line.
 To make two key points horizontal or vertical, click a key point, and then click another
key point.
The current orientation of the line determines how it is positioned after you select it. For
example, if a line is closer to a horizontal orientation than a vertical orientation, the line becomes
horizontal.
See Also
Horizontal/Vertical Command (on page 289)
Make Elements Collinear

1. On the Change toolbar, click Collinear .
2. Click a line, and then click another line. One line moves to become collinear with the other.
new location.
See Also
Collinear Command (on page 287)

Make Elements Symmetric About an Axis

1. On the Change toolbar, click Symmetric .
2. Click a line that you want to use as a symmetry axis.
4. Click another element. The two elements become symmetrical about the axis.
new location.
See Also
Transforming Elements Commands and Ribbons

This section contains topics about the commands and ribbons used to perform various actions
when transforming elements.
Chamfer Command
Draws a chamfer, or bevel, between two linear elements. You can control the chamfer angle
and the setback distances for both elements.
See Also
Draw a Chamfer (on page 276)
Chamfer Ribbon
Colors dialog box.

Angle — Measures the angle between the chamfer and the first linear element.
Setback A — Specifies the distance from the corner to the beginning of the chamfer on the first
linear element you select.

Setback B — Specifies the distance from the corner to the beginning of the chamfer on the
second linear element you select.
See Also
Draw a Chamfer (on page 276)
Collinear Command
Makes two lines collinear.
See Also
Concentric Command
Makes an arc or circle concentric with another arc or circle.
See Also
Make Elements Concentric (on page 283)
Connect Command
Connects two elements or key points at one point. This command also connects a key point
on an element to a position that you select on another element.
See Also

Equal Command
Makes elements or dimension values equal. You can make the length of lines, the radius of
arcs and circles, and the values of dimensions equal.
See Also
Make Elements Equal (on page 285)
Extend to Next Command

Extends one or more open elements until they intersect with the nearest element in the
active window. The extension direction is determined by the position where you select the
element to extend. For example, if you select a horizontal line to the right of its midpoint, the line
extends to the right.
If there is no possible intersection between the element you want to extend and any other
element in the view, the command does not extend the element.
See Also
Extend an Element (on page 274)
Fillet Command
Draws a fillet between two elements. The elements can be arcs, lines, circles, ellipses, or
curves.
See Also
Draw a Fillet (on page 278)
Fillet Ribbon
Colors Dialog Box.

Radius — Specifies the radius between the two elements you want to use to create the fillet.
Trim — Removes the corner of the object where the fillet is created.
No Trim — Leaves the corner of the object when creating a fillet.

See Also
Draw a Fillet (on page 278)
Horizontal/Vertical Command
Makes a line horizontal or vertical, or horizontally or vertically aligns two key points.
See Also
Make Elements or Key Points Horizontal or Vertical (on page 285)
Mirror Command
Mirrors one or more selected elements about a line or axis that you define. You can mirror
without copying, or mirror and copy.
See Also
Mirror Ribbon
Copy — Mirrors and copies the elements in the selection set.
Position Angle — Sets the angle of the mirror axis. The origin of the angle measurement is the
point you clicked for the beginning of the mirror axis. Setting the position angle to 0 extends the
axis horizontally to the right of the screen, 90 extends the axis vertically to the top, 180 extends
the axis horizontally to the left, and 270 extends the axis vertically to the bottom.
See Also
Parallel Command
Makes two lines parallel.
See Also
Make Elements Parallel (on page 283)

Perpendicular Command
Makes two elements perpendicular. You can make two lines, a line and an arc, or a line and
a circle perpendicular.
See Also
Make Elements Perpendicular (on page 284)
Rotate Command
Rotates one or more elements a precise distance or angle about a specified point.
See Also
Rotate Ribbon
Copy — Creates a copy of the element that you are rotating. If you do not want a copy of the
rotated element, then clear this option.
Step Angle — Specifies the rotation step angle. The step angle specifies the increments, in
degrees, that an element rotates from a temporary axis. The temporary axis is the line between
the element's center of rotation (A) and the point that you rotate the element from (B).
You can specify increments in the Step Angle box if you want to dynamically view the results of
the rotation. For example, if the box is set to 30.0, the rotation is displayed in 30 degree
increments. The default setting is 0 degrees so that the rotation is fully dynamic.

Rotation Angle — Defines the rotation angle. The rotation angle is the angle between the point
that you rotate from and the point that you rotate to. In the following picture, the center of
rotation (A) is shown with the point that you rotate the element from (B).
The rotation angle (C) is the angle of change between the old and new positions of the rotated
element. The value is always positive.
Position Angle — Displays the angle between the horizontal axis through the center of rotation
(A) and the point that you rotate from (B). Then, if you rotate the element, the position angle (C)
changes to become the angle between the horizontal axis and the point that you rotate to. The
position angle is always a positive value that is measured counter-clockwise from the axis.
See Also

Scale Command
Reduces or enlarges selected elements by a scale factor that you define. The scale factor is
the same along the X and Y axis. Scalable elements include framed elements, such as text
boxes. You can use Scale to scale, or to simultaneously scale and copy.
See Also
Scale Ribbon (on page 292)
Scaling Elements (on page 271)
Scale Ribbon
Copy — Scales and copies the elements in the selection set.
Step — Specifies the step value for the Scale Factor. The step value causes the Scale Factor
to be decreased or increased in increments as you move the pointer toward or away from the
scale origin. For example, if you set the step value to 0.25, the scale increases in increments of
0.25 as you move the pointer away from the scale origin.
Scale Factor — Specifies how much the software reduces or enlarges the element. A scale
factor between zero and one reduces; a scale factor greater than one enlarges.
Reference — Specifies how long the dynamic line from the scale origin to the pointer has to be
in order to achieve a Scale Factor of 1.
For example, if you set Reference to 1, for every inch you move the pointer away from the scale
origin, the scale factor increases by one. If you set Reference to 2, for every two inches you
move the pointer away from the scale origin, the scale factor increases by one.
Symmetric Command
Makes elements symmetric about an axis. The characteristics of the first element selected,
such as size and position, are maintained by the symmetric relationship.
See Also
Tangent Command
Makes two elements tangential. You can make two circles or arcs tangential. You can also
make a circle, or an arc, and a line tangential.
See Also
Make Elements Tangential (on page 284)

Trim Command
Trims open and closed elements to the closest intersection in both directions.
See Also
Arranging Elements
You can arrange elements so that they can be more easily manipulated on a drawing sheet.
Several features for arranging elements are provided in the software.
The Group command on the Change toolbar allows you to group elements that reside in the
same document and drawing sheet together. The elements can then be modified as a unit. You
can ungroup elements by clicking Ungroup on the Change toolbar.
You can also use Layers on the Main toolbar to arrange elements. Each time you draw an
element it is assigned to the active layer. You can use Layers to see which layer is active or to
change the active layer.
The Display Manager on the Tools menu allows you to control the way elements appear on
sheets or layers by changing settings such as, line type or color.
Elements that overlap are displayed in the order they are drawn. A newly created element is
placed in front of all other elements because it has the highest display priority. An element's
display priority can easily be changed. You can pull an element up one position, push it down
one position, send it to the back, or bring it to the front by selecting the appropriate command on
the Change toolbar.
See Also
Grouping Elements (on page 293)
Element Display Priority (on page 295)
Grouping Elements
A group is a set of elements that you have selected. The set behaves like any other select set.
Grouping elements allows you to work with them as a unit. For example, you could place the
holes and center lines of a bolt hole pattern into a group. This would allow you to move, copy, or
delete the entire pattern at once, as if it were a single element.
The following list describes some of the properties of groups:
 An element can be a member of only one group.
 Grouped elements must reside in the same document and be on the same drawing sheet.
 Any locatable element can be grouped.
 Any combination of elements, such as lines, text, circles, and so forth, can be grouped.
You can use Group to nest two or more entire groups within a larger group, or you can nest
individual elements and groups within a larger group.

After elements are grouped, you can use Ungroup to ungroup all of the elements at the same
time. You can also use Ungroup and QuickPick to remove one or more elements from a group.
Selecting Groups and Members of Groups

The options on the Select Tool ribbon allow you to select an entire group or individual members
of a group. If you set the bottom-up option, you can select individual members. If you select the
top down option, you can select all the members.
You can also use QuickPick to select one or more group members or an entire group.
Performing Tasks on Groups

After you select a group, you can use a command or ribbon option on all of its members. For
example, when you move, copy, or delete a group, all of its members are moved, copied, or
deleted. You can move or apply relationships to a member of a group and the changes do not
affect the position of the other members of the group.
When you copy an entire group, all of its members are copied, including nested groups. The
software creates a new group that contains all of the members of the original group. When you
copy one member of a group, only that member is copied.
If you use QuickPick to select a member of a group, you can perform tasks on the member
individually, without affecting other members.
See Also
Group or Ungroup Elements (on page 294)
Group or Ungroup Elements

Grouping elements allows you to work with them as a unit. The elements must reside in the
same document and drawing sheet.
To group elements
1. Select two or more elements.
You cannot select an element that is already a member of a group.
2. On the Change toolbar, click Group .
To ungroup elements
1. Select a group.
2. On the Change toolbar, click Ungroup .

To remove one element from a group

1. Use QuickPick to select the element you want to remove from the group.
2. On the Change toolbar, click Ungroup .
 You can nest groups by selecting two or more groups. You can then ungroup the entire
group or any of its members.
 You can select a group and other elements and use Group to group them.
 You can perform tasks on all members of a group by selecting the group and then selecting
the command or ribbon option you want to use.
 You can use QuickPick to select and edit one or more members of a group.
 You can use the bottom-up selection method instead of QuickPick, to select individual
group members. Set Bottom Up on the Select tool ribbon.
 You can use the Properties dialog box to find out if an element is part of a group. Select the
element and then, on the shortcut menu, click Properties.
 In Catalog Manager, you cannot save a symbol with grouped elements; therefore you must
ungroup all grouped elements before saving the symbol.
See Also
Group Properties Dialog Box (on page 305)
Element Display Priority

When 2-D elements overlap, their display priority determines which is in front. The first element
you draw is displayed behind all other elements—it has the lowest display priority. A newly
created element is displayed in front of all other elements—it has the highest display priority.
For example, if you draw a circle, then an ellipse, and then a rectangle, the circle is displayed in
back. The ellipse is displayed between the circle and the rectangle, and the rectangle is
displayed in front.
Changing the Element Display Priority

You can change an element's display priority by pulling it up one position, pushing it down one
position, sending it to the back, or bringing it to the front. One click on the striped box changes
the display priority.

You can change the display priority of a group the same way. The display priority of elements
within the group does not change.
See Also
Pull an Element Up in the Display Order (on page 297)
Push an Element Down in the Display Order (on page 297)
Bring an Element to the Front of the Display Order

2. On the Change toolbar, click Bring to Front.
 When you select a single element, the element moves to the front of the display.
 When you bring more than one element or an element group to the front of the display
order, the elements retain their display order within the selection set or group.
See Also
Send an Element to the Back of the Display Order

2. On the Change toolbar, click Send to Back .
 When you select a single element, the element moves to the back of the display.
 When you send more than one element or an element group to the back of the display
See Also
Bring an Element to the Front of the Display Order (on page 296)

Pull an Element Up in the Display Order

2. On the Change toolbar, click Pull Up .

When you pull more than one element or an element group up one position in the display
See Also
Push an Element Down in the Display Order

2. On the Change toolbar, click Push Down .

When you push more than one element or an element group down one position in the
display order, the elements retain their display order within the selection set or group.
See Also
Using Layers to Arrange Elements

Layers and display settings can help you group elements so that you can manipulate them more
easily on a drawing sheet. Layers and display settings also make it easier to keep track of
different types of elements. Each drawing sheet in a document can contain several layers.
When you draw an element, it is assigned to the active layer. To see which layer is active, or to
change the active layer, you can use Layers on the Main toolbar.
Controlling the Display of Elements and Objects

After assigning an element or object to a layer, you can set display criteria to control the way
items appear in a window by using Display Manager on the Tools menu. With this command,
you can set display criteria for any sheet and its associated layers in the current document. The
display settings can include the color or line type and line width of elements or objects.
If two windows are open for the same document, the display settings that you select with
the Display Manager dialog box affect every window view of the drawing sheet.
Displaying Layers
To view elements on specific layers, you can turn on one or more layers by selecting Layers.
When you turn layers off, you cannot see the elements assigned to the layers on the drawing

sheet. For example, you can assign lines to one layer and closed elements to another layer.
Then, if you turn off the layer for closed elements and turn on the layer for lines, you see only
lines on the drawing sheet.
You can still see relationships between elements that are assigned to different layers on a
drawing sheet. For example, suppose a line and a circle are tangent and they are assigned to
different layers. If the line's layer is displayed and the circle's layer is hidden, you can still see
the tangent relationship handle on the line. If the line's layer is hidden as well, the tangent
relationship handle is hidden.
With Display Manager on the Tools menu, you can control the way elements appear on sheets
or layers by changing settings, such as the line type or color. You can also create custom colors
for the display.
Layers and Layer Groups

While layers provide a way to control the display of elements on a drawing sheet, layer groups
give you another way to control the display of elements on drawing sheets. You can use Layer
Groups on the Tools menu to define layer groups.
Creating New Layers

You can create new layers using Layer Groups, or by typing a new layer name on the ribbon.
You cannot give the same name to two layers on the same drawing sheet.
Assigning Elements to Layers

Although you can assign an element to only one layer, you can change the layer to which an
element is assigned. You can find out which layer an element is assigned to by selecting it and
using Properties on the Edit menu.
See Also
Display Manager Command (on page 302)
Layers Command (on page 308)

Control the Display of Elements in a Window (on page 299)

Create a Layer (on page 300)
Change the Layer of an Element (on page 300)
Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Group (on page 308)
Control the Display of Elements in a Window

1. Click Tools > Display Manager.
2. On the Sheets tab, set the options you want to use for displaying elements in a window. The
color, line type, and width settings are applied to all the elements on the sheet.
To set the display for a specific layer on a sheet, select the sheet on the Sheets tab.
The layers that are in that sheet are displayed on the Layers tab. You can specify display
settings for each layer in a sheet by clicking the Layers tab and setting the options you
want.
If you want to quickly display or hide layers for the current drawing sheet, you can click
Layers on the Tools menu. Then, on the Layers ribbon, you can click Layer Status to display
or hide layers.
See Also
Display Manager Dialog Box (on page 302)
Create a Color for Displaying Sheets or Layers

When you use Display Manager to control the way elements or objects appear in window, you
can create custom colors for the display of sheets or layers.
1. Click Tools > Display Manager.
2. On the Display Manager dialog box, click the row of the layer or sheet you want to change
the color of.
3. Click the cell in the Color column.
4. At the bottom of the palette, click More.
5. On the Colors dialog box, click Define Custom Colors and set the options you want to
create a new color.
6. Click Add to Custom Colors.
7. On the Custom Color Name dialog box, type the name that you want for the color you
created. This name appears on the palette that you access when you click a cell in the
Color column.
See Also
Colors Dialog Box (on page 302)
Custom Color Name Dialog Box (on page 359)

Create a Layer
1. On the Main toolbar, click Layers .
2. On the Layers ribbon, type the name of the new layer in the Layer box and press ENTER.
 You can also create a layer using Layer Groups on the Tools menu. On the Groups dialog
box, you type the name of a new layer in the Layers box and press ENTER. The name of
the new layer is displayed at the bottom of the Layers table.
 You cannot give the same name to two layers on the same drawing sheet.
 You can create as many layers on a drawing sheet as you need.
See Also
Layer Groups Command (on page 306)
Display or Hide Layers

 On the Main toolbar, click Layers .
 Click Tools > Layers.
2. On the Layers ribbon, click the Layer Status icon. The Layer Display dialog box displays
all layers available for the current drawing sheet. The layers that appear in gray text are
hidden or turned off. The layer that appears in red text is the active layer.
3. Click a layer name to display or hide the layer on the drawing sheet.
4. Click Apply.
If you want to display or hide layers for drawing sheets other than the current sheet, you
can use Display Manager on the Tools menu. On the Display Manager dialog box, Sheets
tab, click the sheet you want. Then, on the Layers tab, in the Layers column, click the layers
you want to display or hide. These settings override the settings on the Layer Display dialog
box.
See Also
Change the Layer of an Element

An element can be assigned to only one layer.
1. Select the elements whose layer you want to change.
2. Click Tools > Layers.
3. On the Layer ribbon, click Change Layer.

4. On the Change Layer dialog box, in the Change all to list, click the layer to change the
elements to.
You can also change the layer of an element by selecting the element and clicking
Properties on the Edit menu.
See Also
Change the Active Layer

1. On the Main toolbar, click Layers .
2. On the Layers ribbon, type or select the name of another layer in the Layer box.
If you type the name of a layer that does not exist, a new layer is created.
See Also
Arranging Elements Commands, Ribbons, and Dialog Boxes

This section contains topics about the commands and ribbons used to arrange drawing
elements on a drawing.
Bring to Front Command

Moves one or more selected elements or element groups to the front of the display order.
See Also
Bring an Element to the Front of the Display Order (on page 296)
Change Layer Dialog Box

This option is available only when one or more elements are selected.
Current Layers — Lists the layers for all the selected elements.
Change all to — Lists all the layers for the active sheet. Selecting a layer from the list changes
the layer for all the elements in the selection set.
See Also
Change the Active Layer (on page 301)

Colors Dialog Box

Creates colors that you define by mixing a combination of hue, saturation, and luminosity values
or red, green, and blue values. After you click Define Custom Colors, the easiest way to
experiment with different colors is to drag the pointer around on the color matrix.
After you create a color and close the dialog box, the Custom Color Name dialog box appears,
allowing you to save the custom color with a name.
To change the settings for a custom color, you can click a custom color box and then specify a
different color. To define a new custom color, click an empty custom color box, specify a new
color, and then click Add to Custom Colors.
See Also
Display Manager Dialog Box (on page 302)
Create a Fill Color (on page 358)
Display Manager Command

Specifies the way elements or objects appear in a window for all drawing sheets and their
associated layers in the document.
You can quickly set display options (Layers on/off) for the current drawing sheet on the
Layer Display dialog box. You can access the Layer Display dialog box using Layers on the
Tools menu.
Display Manager Dialog Box

Specifies the way elements or objects appear in a window for all drawing sheets and their
associated layers in the document.
You can set display options (Layers on/off) for the current drawing sheet on the Layer
Display dialog box. You can access the Layer Display dialog box using Layers on the Tools
menu.
See Also
Sheets Tab (Display Manager Dialog Box) (on page 303)
Layers Tab (Display Manager Dialog Box) (on page 304)

Sheets Tab (Display Manager Dialog Box)

Controls the way elements or objects appear on a drawing sheet.
Row Button — Specifies at what level you want to display or hide items. When you click a
button to the left of a row, an arrow appears by that row. Clicking this button selects the drawing
sheet or linked/embedded object so that you can modify its display. Any options you set on the
Layers tab of the Display Manager dialog box are applied to the sheet or object that you
selected.
Sheets — Displays a list of sheets and linked/embedded objects in the current document. An
arrow appears by the current active drawing sheet. You can control the display of each sheet or
object by setting the options you want in the Color, Line Type, or Width columns. The Display
and Lock options can only be set from the Layers tab.
Display — Controls the layers listed on the Layers tab. If you set the box next to a layer, the
elements on that layer are displayed in the active document.
 A check appears in each box when you first access the Layers tab.
 You can set the box next to each layer to display all the elements.
 On the Layers tab, you cannot turn the active layer off.
Lock — Locks or unlocks layers in a view to control whether the software can locate elements
on a layer. If a layer is locked, you can still see the elements on the screen, but you cannot
locate them or perform actions on them. You cannot lock the active layer.
 If the lock beside a layer appears locked, you cannot locate elements on the layer in the
active document or drawing sheet.
 If the lock beside a layer appears unlocked, the elements on the layer can be located.
Color — Overrides a color for all elements on a drawing sheet or in a linked/embedded object.
You can select a color from the list. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors
dialog box.
Line Type — Overrides a line type for all elements on a drawing sheet or in a linked/embedded
object.
Width — Overrides a line width for all elements on a drawing sheet or in a linked/embedded
object.
OK — Saves the changes and closes the Display Manager dialog box.
Cancel — Ignores any changes and closes the Display Manager dialog box.
Apply — Applies the current display settings without closing the Display Manager dialog box.
Clear — Removes all overrides from the selected row. You must select a row before you can
click this button. You can clear settings from only one row at a time.
Help - Activates the Online Help for the Display Manager dialog box.

Layers Tab (Display Manager Dialog Box)

Controls the way layers and layer groups appear in a window.
Row Button - Indicates the layer being modified. The active layer cannot be modified and is
indicated by a solid filled check box in the display column.
Layers - Controls the display using layers and layers groups. The Layers column displays an
alphabetical list of layers and layer groups for the active drawing sheet.
Layer groups appear first in the list followed by individual layers. You can control the display of
each layer by setting the options you want in the Display, Lock, Color, Type, or Width
columns.
Display - Displays the elements listed on the Layers tab. If you set the box next to the element,
the element is displayed in the active document (if its layer is displayed).
A check appears in each box when you first access the Layers tab.
 You can set the box next to each element to display all the elements.
 On the Layers tab, you cannot turn the active layer off.
Lock - Locks or unlocks elements and layers in a view to control whether the software can
locate them. If an element or layer is locked, you can still see it on the screen, but you cannot
locate it or perform actions on it. You cannot lock the active layer.
If the lock beside a sheet or layer appears locked, you cannot locate the element or layer in the
active document or drawing sheet.
If the lock beside a sheet or layer appears unlocked, the element or layer is not locked and you
can locate it.
Color - Overrides the color for a layer or layer group or applies another color to an element. You
can select a color from the list. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors
dialog box.
Line Type - Overrides a line type for a drawing sheet or embedded object and sets another line
style for an element or linked object.
Width - Selects another line width for layer or layer group.
OK - Saves the changes and closes the Display Manager dialog box.
Cancel - Ignores any changes and closes the Display Manager dialog box.
Apply - Applies the current display settings.
Clear - Removes all overrides from the selected row. You must select a row before you can click
this button. You can clear settings from only one row at a time.
Help - Activates the Online Help for the Display Manager dialog box.

Group Command
Binds elements so that you can locate, select, and manipulate them as a unit. Grouped
elements are usually related, such as the holes and center lines of a bolt hole pattern. When you
select a group, the Group ribbon is displayed so you can edit the entire group or any of its
members. The command is only active when one of the following conditions is met:
 An element or set of elements is selected
 More than one group is selected
 A group and another element are selected
See Also
Group Properties Dialog Box

Displays the properties of the selected group.
See Also
Info Tab (Group Properties Dialog Box) (on page 305)
User Tab (Group Properties Dialog Box) (on page 306)
Info Tab (Group Properties Dialog Box)

Type — Displays the type of the selected element. You can't edit any of these.
Sheet — Displays the name of the drawing sheet the element is on. You cannot edit the name
of the drawing sheet.
Name — Displays the name of the group. The software names the group when you create it.
Number of Items — Displays the number of elements in the group. This label updates
automatically when you add elements to or delete elements from the group.
Is Nested Within Another Group — Shows whether the group is nested within another group.
This label updates automatically when you nest a group using Group, or ungroup a group using
Ungroup.
Contains Nested Groups — Displays whether or not the selected group contains nested
groups.
Closed — The Preview Box shows whether the members of the group are primitive elements,
such as lines, arcs, and curves; whether the end points of these elements are connected; and
whether the members of the group form a closed region.
This box updates automatically when you add elements to or delete elements from the group.
End-Point Connected — The Preview Box shows whether the members of the group are
primitive elements, such as lines, arcs, and curves, and whether the end points of these

elements are connected. This label updates automatically when you add elements to or delete
elements from the group.
User Tab (Group Properties Dialog Box)

Attribute Set — Names a group of attributes. You can type a name in the box and press TAB.
Save — Places the attribute set on the element that you selected.
Remove — Removes the attribute set from the element that you selected.
Attributes — Sets the name, type, and value of the attribute set. You can type a name in the
box and press TAB.
Name — Sets the name of a unique attribute in the attribute set.
Type — Sets the type for the attribute, such as double, text, number, money, or date.
Value — Sets the value for the attribute. The value that you can type is based on the value in
the Type box.
Add — Adds an attribute to the attribute set. After you click Add, the attribute appears in the
table.
Delete — Removes an attribute from the attribute set. You can select an attribute by clicking a
row in the table.
Preview — Displays the group you selected on the Drawing sheet.
Group Ribbon
Style — Sets the style for all of the elements in a group.
Color — Sets the color for all of the elements in a group.
Line Type — Sets the line types and styles for all of the elements in a group.
Width — Sets the line width for all of the elements in a group.
See Also
Layer Groups Command

Creates, modifies, or deletes layers and layer groups. You can only work with layers on the
current working sheet. This command is available only on the Tools menu.

Layer Groups Dialog Box

Creates, modifies, or deletes layers and layer groups. You can only work with layers for the
active sheet in the active window. You cannot delete the active layer or a layer that has
elements placed on it.
Layers — Displays a list of all the layers on the current drawing sheet so that you can create
new layers. You can type the name of a layer in the Layers box to create a new layer. You can
also add or remove layers in a layer group with the Layers table. When you select a group in
the Groups table, the check boxes in the Grouped column of the Layers table indicate the
status of the layers. If the check box is set, the layer is a member of the group that you selected
in the Groups table. If the check box is cleared, the layer is not a member of the group.
Groups — Displays all layer groups for the current sheet. You can define a new group by typing
a name in the Groups box. You can select a group from the Groups table to display the layers
in the group in the Groups table. To select a group, you must click the button on the left side of
the row for a group. You can use the Description column to add a description to the layer
group. Typing a name of an existing layer group makes that group active. You can then add or
remove layers in a group.
Create a Layer Group

1. Click Tools > Layer Groups.
2. On the Layer Groups dialog box, in the Groups box, type the name of the new group and
press ENTER.
3. In the Layers table, in the Grouped column, click each box to include the layers in the
group.
 In the Grouped column, if the check box beside the layer name already has a check mark,
the layer is a member of the current layer group.
 You cannot give the same name to two layers on the same drawing sheet.
See Also
Layer Groups Dialog Box (on page 307)
Modify Layers in a Layer Group

2. On the Layer Groups dialog box, in the Groups table, select the group you want to change
by clicking the button on the left side of the row. In the Layers table, if the check box by the
layer name is set, the layer is in the layer group.
3. In the Layers table, set or clear the check box of each layer to add or remove it from the
layer group.
See Also

Delete a Layer Group

2. On the Layer Groups dialog box, in the Groups table, click on the layer group you want to
delete.
3. Press DELETE.
See Also
Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Group

2. On the Groups dialog box, click a group in the Groups table.
You should click directly on the Group name to change it. The name then highlights
and a blinking pointer appears, allowing you to type the new name.
 To change the name of a group, type the new name and press ENTER.
 To change the name of a layer, click the name of the layer you want to change in the
Layers table. Then, type a new name and press ENTER.
See Also
Layers Command
Displays or hides layers. This command also sets the active layer and changes the layer of
an element.
You can set display criteria for all the sheets and their associated layers in the current
document with Display Manager on the Tools menu.
See Also
Layers Ribbon (on page 309)

Layers Ribbon
Layer — Displays the active layer on the drawing sheet. You can change the active layer by
selecting from a list of all the layers on the active sheet. Typing a new layer name creates a new
layer.
Change Layer — Accesses the Change Layer dialog box so that you can change the layer
of elements. This option is available only when you have selected a set of elements on the
drawing.
Layer Status — Accesses the Layer Display dialog box. This dialog box has a Layer list
that you can use to display or hide layers on the drawing sheet.
See Also
Layer Display Dialog Box

Sets display criteria for the layers in the current drawing sheet.
You can set display criteria for all the sheets in the current document with Display
Manager on the Tools menu.
Active Layer Only — Displays the active layer. If this option is set and the active layer changes,
then the new active layer is displayed and the previous active layer is hidden.
Layers — Displays a list of layers on the active drawing sheet. Bold, black text shows that the
layer is displayed on the drawing sheet. Plain, gray text shows the layer is hidden. Bold, red text
preceded by a bullet shows that the layer is active.
Occupied Only — Lists only layers containing elements. Empty layers do not appear on the list.
Groups — Displays or hides the layer groups list on the dialog box. When you click this button,
the dialog box displays a list of all layer groups for the active drawing sheet. You can select a
group from the list to display or hide these layers on the drawing sheet.
On — Displays the layers in the selected layer group.
Off — Hides the layers in the selected layer group.
Apply — Applies the current display settings to all windows. The dialog remains displayed.
Close — Applies the current display settings to all windows and closes the dialog.
See Also
Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Group (on page 308)

Pull Up Command
Moves one or more selected elements or element groups up one position in the display
order.
If more than one element overlaps the selected elements, the selected elements do not move all
the way to the front. To quickly move elements to the front, click Bring to Front.
See Also
Pull an Element Up in the Display Order (on page 297)
Push Down Command

Moves one or more selected elements or element groups down one position in the display
order.
If the selected elements overlap more than one other element, the selected elements do not
move all the way to the back. To quickly move elements to the back, click Send to Back.
See Also
Push an Element Down in the Display Order (on page 297)
Send to Back Command

Moves one or more selected elements or element groups to the back of the display order.
See Also
Ungroup Command
Removes elements from groups that were defined using Group. You can remove individual
elements from a group. This command is active only if a group that can be ungrouped is
selected on the Drawing Sheet.
See Also

Placing Annotations
Annotations are additional pieces of information, such as labels, notes, comments and so forth,
that you can add to a symbol or drawing.
You place an annotation on your symbol by creating a text box using the Text Box button
on the Draw or Label toolbar.
You can also use the Balloon button on the Label toolbar to add annotations.
Annotations with Leaders

When you create a balloon, you can place it with a leader by setting options on the ribbon. The
leader can point to another element or be placed in free space. Annotations with leaders have
the following components:
(A) Leader line

(B) Break line
(C) Graphic end
(D) Annotation
You can manipulate the annotation by selecting the leader and moving parts of it. You can
control the display of a leader break line and the graphic end and insert or delete vertices on a
leader.
Adding Leaders
You can add a leader to an annotation using Leader button on the Label toolbar. All leaders
have two ends — the notation end and the graphic end. The notation end, or the end that
describes something, is often attached to a text box or the annotation itself; the graphic end is
the end near the object being described and frequently has a terminator arrow or free-space dot

on it. An annotation can have more than one leader. The graphic end of the annotation can point
to an element or be placed in free space. The notation end of a new leader must connect to an
annotation or the leader on an annotation.
You can create a callout by placing a text box and adding a leader.
Annotations and Associations

Annotations can be associative or non-associative. An associative annotation moves when its
associated element moves. Text boxes differ from the other annotations in that they are always
non-associative.
If you attach the terminator of a leader to an element, the annotation moves with the element.
If you point the graphic end of a leader to free space, the annotation is not associative to any
element in the drawing. To make an annotation associative, you can select the graphic end of
the leader and drag it to an element.

Formatting Annotations
You can format an annotation in several ways, using the format and styling tools found on the
different ribbon bars that appear when you select Text Box, Leader, or Balloon.
 You can apply dimension styles to balloons, but not text boxes.
 You can apply text styles to text boxes.
 If you want to format an existing balloon, you must click the balloon leader to select the
balloon. Then, you can change the formats of the balloon.
 If you want annotations to look unique, you can select an annotation and edit its properties
by selecting Edit > Properties.
Place a Text Box

1. On the Draw or Label toolbar, click .
2. Click and drag, to position the text box.
 A cursor appears at the text start position, when you begin to type the border of the text box
is displayed.
 Text is wrapped automatically.
 Press the ENTER key to create a new line.
Move a Text Box

 Click on the text box you want to move, and drag to its new position.
 You can also use the text box handles to drag and reposition.
 Dragging on the solid handles, resizes the text box.
Delete Text in a Text Box

1. Double-click on the text box.
2. Select the text you want to delete.
3. Press DELETE on the keyboard.
Apply a Border to a Text Box

1. Select the text box to which you want to apply the border.
 Click Edit > Properties.
 Right-click, and on the shortcut menu, click Properties.

3. On the Text Box Properties dialog box, select the Border and Fill tab and set the options
for the border.
Edit a Text Box

1. Select the text box that you want to edit.
2. Double-click the box.
3. Point to the location to edit the text and type the text that you want.
Resize a Text Box

1. Click a text box to display its handles.
2. Drag a handle until the text box is the size you want.
You cannot drag hollow handles.
Place a Balloon
1. On the Label toolbar, click Balloon .
2. On the ribbon, set the options you want. In the Balloon Text box, type the text that you want
to appear in the balloon.
3. To place a balloon with a leader, click where you want to place the graphic end of the
leader. The graphic end can be on an element or a point in free space.
Click where you want to place the notation end of the leader.
To place a balloon without a leader, clear Leader and click the element to which to
attach the balloon. You can also click a point in free space.
See Also

Insert a Font Character into a Text Box

In addition to regular keyboard characters, you can insert into a text box, any number of special
characters from the Character Map dialog box.
1. On the Label toolbar, click and then place the text box in the required position.
2. Click .
3. On the Character Map dialog box, from the font list select the required font name.
4. Click the character you want to insert.
5. Click Select.
 Repeat this process to add more characters, remember to click Select after each
choice.
6. Click Copy, this transfers the selected characters to the clipboard.
7. Click inside the text box where you want to paste the selected characters.
 Click Edit > Paste.
 Right-click, and on the shortcut menu, click Paste.
 On the keyboard, press CTRL + V.
Add a Leader
1. On the Dimensions toolbar, click Leader .

2. Click a text box, callout, or another leader to place the notation end of the leader.
3. Click any element to place the graphic end of the leader, or click in free space.

 You can place either end of a leader first.

 After you place one end of the leader, the command only allows you to select an element
that is valid for placing the other end of the leader. For example, if you add the notation end
of the leader to a text box, the command then allows you to select only elements that are
valid for placing the graphic end of a leader. You could select a circle, but not another text
box.
 If you want to add a leader to a balloon, you can set an option on the Balloon ribbon. To
select an existing balloon, you must click the leader of the balloon.
See Also
Insert a Vertex in a Leader

1. Select a leader to display its handles. As you move the pointer over the leader, the pointer
changes to show whether you are on a leader or a handle.
2. Position the pointer over the leader where you want to insert a vertex.
3. Hold the ALT key and click.

4. Drag the handle to position the new vertex.
You cannot insert a vertex on the horizontal break line of a leader.

See Also
Delete a Vertex from a Leader

1. Select the leader that has the vertex you want to delete. This displays its handles. As you
move the pointer over the leader, the pointer changes to show whether you are on a leader
or a handle.
2. Position the pointer over the vertex you want to delete.

3. Hold the ALT key and click the handle on the vertex.
See Also
Move an Annotation
1. Select an annotation to display its handles. As you move the pointer over the parts of the
annotation, the pointer changes to show whether you are on a part of the annotation or a
handle.
2. Click a handle and drag the leader or annotation to its new location.
The previous procedure describes the general steps you can use to move an annotation.
The following descriptions explain how to move specific parts of an annotation.

To move a terminator
1. When a terminator is connected to an element, drag the terminator handle to a new location
along the element. If you drag the handle off the end of an open element, such as a line, an
extension line automatically appears. The annotation and break line do not move.
2. When a terminator is connected to an element, disconnect the terminator by holding the ALT
key while you drag the terminator handle. The terminator type automatically changes to the
active setting for a terminator in free space.
3. To reconnect a terminator to an element, drag the terminator handle to an element. The

terminator type automatically changes to the active setting for a terminator connected to an
element.
To move a leader line

1. Click a leader line and then drag the break line of a leader. The break line and annotation
move and the leader line changes in length, but not orientation.
2. If a leader was placed with the Leader command, you can move the leader away from the
annotation and attach it to another annotation or element. Click the leader line and then drag
the handle to the annotation or leader that you want to connect to.

To move a handle
Click a leader line and do one of the following:
1. Drag the handle closest to the annotation to move the annotation.
2. Drag the handle on a break line to move the leader line and annotation.
3. Drag a vertex handle to a new location.
Annotations Commands, Ribbons, and Dialog Boxes

This section contains topics about the commands and ribbons used to create and display
annotations.

Balloon Command
Places a balloon containing text. You can use balloons to refer to an element or a point in
free space. You can set options for controlling the size and shape of the balloon, text
presentation, and leader display.
See Also
Place a Balloon (on page 314)
Balloon Properties Dialog Box

Sets the properties of a balloon.
See Also
General Tab (Balloon Properties Dialog Box) (on page 321)
Text and Leader Tab (Balloon Properties Dialog Box) (on page 321)
General Tab (Balloon Properties Dialog Box)

Balloon Text — Enters text in the balloon.
Balloon Height — Specifies the height of the balloon. The value you enter is a ratio of the font
size defined in the dimension style. The actual height of the balloon is the value you enter
multiplied by the dimension font size.
Balloon Shape — Specifies which balloon shape you want from the list of available shapes.
Number Of Sides — Sets the number of sides of an n-sided balloon shape. You must click ? in
the Shape list to use this option. You can then type the value you want.
See Also
Balloon Properties Dialog Box (on page 321)
Text and Leader Tab (Balloon Properties Dialog Box)

Text - Specifies how the text appears in a balloon annotation.
Font - Specifies the font to use for the text in the balloon annotation.
Font Style - Specifies the font style to use, such as bold or italic, for the text in the balloon
annotation.

Font Size - Displays the text size. You can type a size in the box.
Leader and projection line

Specifies how the leader and projection line are displayed.
Break Line - Displays a horizontal break line where the leader line meets the annotation text.
Enter a value to specify the size of the break line. For example, when Break Line is set to 1, the
break line looks like the following picture.
Element Gap - Sets the distance that the projection line is set back from the element to which
the leader is attached. This value is a ratio of the font size. This option is disabled for balloons.
Extension - Sets the distance that the leader line extends beyond the dimension. This value is a
ratio of the font size. This option is disabled for balloons.
Color and Width

Color - Sets the color of an annotation.
Width - Sets the line width of all lines in an annotation.
Type - Specifies the line type.
Terminator
Type - Sets the terminator type. Click different parts of the following picture to find out which
terminator type you want to use.

Length - Sets the length of the terminator. This value is a ratio of the font size. For example, in
the following picture, the length is set to three times the size of the font.
See Also
Balloon Properties Dialog Box (on page 321)
Leader Properties Dialog Box (on page 324)
Balloon Ribbon
Determines the size and shape of the balloon and the text within the balloon.
Dimension Style — Lists and applies the available styles.
Leader — Displays the leader line.
Break Line — Displays a horizontal break line at the notation end of a leader.
Height — Specifies the height of the balloon. The value you enter is a ratio of the font size
defined in the dimension style. The actual height of the balloon is the value you enter multiplied
by the dimension font size.
Text — Specifies the text you want inside the balloon.
Shape — Specifies which balloon shape you want from the list of available shapes.
Sides — Specifies the number of sides for the balloon. This option only appears when you
select an N-sided shape in the Shapes box on the ribbon.
See Also
Place a Balloon (on page 314)
Character Map Command

Inserts a character into a text box using a different font. You can also insert special
characters that do not have corresponding keys on the keyboard. You can use this command
when you type or edit text in a text box.
 If you are running Windows 95 or a higher version and this command is not available, you
must install the Character Map accessory. You can add it by clicking the Control Panel icon
and then the Add/Remove Programs icon. While adding the software, you can find the
Character Map software in the Accessories category. For detailed instructions on how to add
the Character Map accessory, see the Windows 95 on-line Help for Add/Remove Programs.
 To place the Character Map button on a toolbar, click Tools > Customize to open the
Customize dialog box. On the Toolbars tab, select Tools from the Categories list. Click
and drag Character Map to an existing toolbar.

See Also
Unicode Character Map Dialog Box (on page 331)
Leader Command
Adds a leader to an annotation or to another leader. All leaders have two ends — the
notation end and the graphic end. The notation end is the end that describes something and is
often attached to a text box or annotation; the graphic end is the end near the object being
described and frequently has a terminator arrow or free-space dot on it. You can place either
end of the leader first.
You can attach the notation end of a leader to one of the following:
 Text box
 Balloon
 Another leader on a dimension or annotation
You can place the graphic end of a leader in one of the following ways:
 Attach it to an element.
 Place it in free space.
See Also
Add a Leader (on page 315)
Leader Properties Dialog Box

Edits the properties of an element to which you have added a leader using Add Leader.
See Also

Leader Ribbon
Dimension Style — Lists and applies the available styles.
Break Line — Displays a horizontal break line at the notation end of a leader.
Automatic Shape Connection Behavior — Specifies automatic, shape-changing

connection point behavior for the notation (end) reference. If the option is selected, the notation
end of the leader uses information from the notation object in combination with the current
leader position to determine the attachment point and break line direction. If the option is not
selected, the notation end of the leader attaches to the point on the notation object that was
selected when the leader was created, and the break line direction will not automatically break
away from the notation object.
Break Line Along — If the option is selected, the break line displays at an angle along the
notation object according to information provided by the object. For example, if a text box is at
an angle, the break line displays parallel to the text box at the same angle. If the option is not
selected, the break line remains in a horizontal position regardless of the angle of the notation
object.
Notation Object Attachment Lock — Locks the notation end of the leader to the notation
object so that any drag/modify operations on the leader will not detach it from the object.
Graphic Object Attachment Lock — Locks the graphic end of the leader to the graphic
object so that any drag/modify operations on the leader will not detach it from the object.
See Also
Text Box Command

Places a text box in a document.
You can find this command on the Label toolbar.
Text Box Properties Dialog Box

Formats the font, paragraph, borders, or shading of a text box.
See Also
Format a Text Box (on page 343)
Info Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box) (on page 326)
Border and Fill Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box) (on page 329)
User Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box) (on page 330)

Info Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box)

Sheet — Shows the drawing sheet for an element.
Layer — Shows the layer on which an element appears in a drawing sheet.
Origin — Specifies the coordinates, or location, of a text box along the x and y axes.
All metrics on the text box are either in paper units or world units except origin. Origin is
always in world units.
Width — Sets the width of the text box to either At Least (at least the value you specify), Auto
(the text drives the width), or Exactly (exactly at the value you specify) in the At: field.
Height — Sets the height of the text box to either At Least (at least the value you specify), Auto
(the text drives the height), or Exactly (exactly at the value you specify) in the At: field.
Angle — Sets the angle of the text box.
The text box always rotates about the origin.
Text Orientation — Sets the orientation of the text either horizontally or vertically.
Units Space — Sets the text box units to either paper units or to world units.
Paper units represent units on an actual sheet of paper. Paper units are set in inches. Other
units are also available.
World units indicate real world distances, but can be scaled down to fit a sheet of paper.
Within the drawing environment, "world units" is synonymous with the term "model units"
found in other CAD packages.
Justification — Specifies the placement relationship between the origin and the shape (text
box) according to the horizontal and vertical components.
The inside text area is an area that the margins of the text box define. That is, margins are
inside the outside edges of the text box.
The following graphic illustrates top (1), right (2), bottom (3) and left (4) margins around the text
box for horizontal justification (A) and vertical justification (B).
The maximum cap height of the first formatted text line of each line defines the text area capline,
even if the line has been clipped out of the text box.
The line baseline is a font metric that describes an imaginary line for location of characters. The
largest descender for any font on the line defines the baseline. Therefore, the largest descender

of the fonts used on the last line defines the text area baseline, even if the line is clipped out of
the text box.
The following graphic illustrates text cap area (a) and text baseline (b) for horizontal justification
(A) and vertical justification (B).
You must define horizontal and vertical components together. These components apply to both
single-line and multi-line text. For multi-line text, the cap height of the first line is used for the
capline of the text, and the descender of the last line is used for the baseline of the text.
Horizontal — Specifies horizontal placement at six options based on shape (text box), text
area, and the text within the text box at left, center, and right positions.
Vertical — Specifies vertical placement at 10 options based on shape (text box), text area, and
the text within the text box.
 Text Baseline — Specifies the text area baseline.
 Text Top — Specifies the top of the text area, which begins at the bottom of the top margin.
 Text Capline — Specifies the text area capline.
 Text Half Ascender — Specifies half the distance from the text area baseline to the top of
the text area.
 Text Half Cap — Specifies the distance half way between the text area capline and
baseline.
 Text Center — Specifies the center of the text area.
 Text Bottom — Specifies the bottom of the text area.
 Shape Top — Specifies the top edge of the shape.
 Shape Center — Specifies center of the shape.
 Shape Bottom — Specifies the bottom of the shape.
Text Alignment — Specifies the placement of formatted text within the shape (text box).
You must define horizontal and vertical components together.
Horizontal — Specifies how each paragraph is aligned within the block of formatted text:
 Left — Places the edge of the first line of text at the left of the text area.
 Center — Places the formatted text in the center of the text area.
 Right — Places the formatted text in the right of the text area.

If Text Orientation is horizontal, you modify all the paragraph alignment properties for all
paragraphs within the text box. (These properties appear in the Text Alignment area of the Info
tab.)
If Text Orientation is vertical, you modify the shape alignment properties. (These properties
appear in the Text Alignment area of the Info tab.)
Vertical — Places the block of formatted text at Top, Center, Bottom, or Justify area of the
text box:
 Top — Places the edge of the first line of text at the top of the text area.
 Center — Places the formatted text in the center of the text area.
 Bottom — Places the formatted text in the bottom of the text area.
 Justify — Places the first line of the first paragraph at the top of the text area.
 If Text Orientation is horizontal, you modify the shape alignment properties. (These
properties appear in the Text Alignment area of the Info tab.)
 If Text Orientation is vertical, you modify all the paragraph alignment properties for all
paragraphs within the text box. (These properties appear in the Text Alignment area of the
Info tab.)
Margins - Sets the distance between the edge of the shape and the edge of the text area.
Margins are in the same units as the text box.
 Top — Sets the distance between the top edge of the shape and the top edge of the text
area.
 Bottom — Sets the distance between the bottom edge of the shape and the bottom edge of
the text area.
 Left — Sets the distance between the left edge of the shape and the left edge of the text
area.
 Right — Sets the distance between the right edge of the shape and the right edge of the
text area.
Paragraph Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box)

Text style — Displays the style for a text box.
Font — Lists and applies the available fonts.
Font size — Applies a text size.
Font style — Lists the available font styles.
Underline — Underlines text.
Language — Lists and applies a language for text in a text box. If you use text characters from
more than one language in a text box, the option you specify in this box determines the way the
lines wrap in the paragraph.
Units space — Sets the paragraph to paper units or to world units. You can change this control
only when you are creating new styles from the Format Styles or Format Text Box dialog
boxes. When you view this control from the Properties dialog box, it is read-only. You can

change the control from the Info tab because all paragraphs contained within a text box must
exist in the same units.
Within the drawing environment, "world units" is synonymous with the term "model units"
found in other CAD packages.
Font size type — Specify the method for measuring font size: Ascender, Cap, or Tile.
Text color - Sets the color of the text.
Alignment - Sets the alignment of the text.
Line spacing - Sets the line spacing of the text:
 Single sets the line spacing for each line to display the largest font in the line.
 1.5 sets the line space for the line to one-and-a-half that of single lines.
 Double sets the line spacing for the line to twice that of single lines.
Paragraph spacing — Specifies the amount of space before and after paragraphs. No spacing
exists before the first paragraph and or after the last paragraph.
Before — Adds space before a paragraph. This value is set in the current working units, not in
points.
After — Adds space after a paragraph. This value is set in the current working units, not in
points. You can set the units using Units on the Format menu.
Border and Fill Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box)

Border — Specifies the appearance of a border around a text box.
Show border — Displays the outline of the text box.
Border type — Sets the shape of the border around a text box. You can choose from a
selection of common geometric shapes.
Line style — Sets the line style for the text box.
Border color — Sets the color of the border.
Line width — Specifies the width of the border in paper or world units of the text box.
Paragraph separators — Places a horizontal line between each paragraph in a text box. This
option is only available if Show Border is selected.
A paragraph is defined by a carriage return within the text body. Using the carriage return as the
sole means to create a new line of text will result in a text object with many lines as shown in the
following illustration:
As an alternative for controlling auto returns within the text body, you can restrain the width of
the box during placement or through the Text Box Properties dialog box.
Shadow — Places a shadow around the borders of text in a text box.

Shadow offset — Specifies a distance to offset the shadow in paper or world units of the text
box.
Fill color — Displays the color of a solid fill on an element boundary. This value overrides the
style of the fill. Transparent is the default. When you set the fill color to transparent, no fill is
visible on the boundary. You can also apply a fill color option with a fill pattern. Filled elements
always cover other elements when they overlap. A fill color always appears behind the fill
pattern when you apply both to the same boundary.
User Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box)

Attribute Set — Names a group of attributes. You can type a name in the box and press TAB.
Attributes — Sets the name, type, and value of the attribute set. You can type a name in the
box and press TAB.
Value — Sets the value for the attribute. The value that you can enter is based on the type that
you selected in the Type box.
table.
row in the table.
See Also
Text Box Ribbon

Formats a text box.
the ToolTip.
Style — Lists and applies the available styles.
Font — Lists and applies the available fonts.
Font Size — Applies a text size.
Text Color — Sets the color of the font.
Bold — Makes text bold.
Italic — Italicizes text.
Underline — Underlines text.

Paragraph Alignment — Positions the paragraph to the left, center, or right of the text area
edges in edit mode.
You can also align the paragraph after you select text.
Border — Displays three options for setting borders. These options allow you to display no
border, display a border, or display a border with a shadow.
More — Displays more options on the ribbon.

Height — Sets the height of the text box.
Width — Sets the width of the text box.
 If you select text in the text box, Height and Width are not available because the text is
driving the dimension.
 If you select a text box and Height is not available, the text is driving Height with Auto
Save. The same is true for Width.
 If you place a text box with a single point, both Height and Width are not available. If you
drag a text box, Width is not available.
Angle — Sets the angle of the text box.
Horizontal Text Orientation — Specifies that the text is oriented horizontally on or in the
document.
Vertical Text Orientation — Specifies that the text is oriented vertically on or in the
document.
See Also
Resize a Text Box (on page 314)
Unicode Character Map Dialog Box

Selects special characters for inserting into a text box. For additional information about using
Character Map, click the Help button in the Character Map dialog box.
Font — Lists the available fonts.
Help — Opens the online documentation for using Character Map effectively and efficiently.
Characters to copy — Displays selected characters to copy to the Clipboard.
Select — Copies selected characters to the Characters to copy box.
Copy — Copies the selected characters from the Characters to copy box to the Clipboard.
Advanced view — Lets you display groups of characters to help in refining a search of a
character's Unicode value. When you check the Advanced view check box, the Character Map
dialog box displays additional options.
Character set — Specifies the character set you want to search. If a character set is not
available, choose a different font from the Fonts list.

Go to Unicode — Allows you to type the four-digit Unicode value for the character you are
looking for. This option is only enabled if you have selected Unicode in the Character set list.
Group by — Specifies the group you want to use for your search. If you select Unicode
Subrange, a list of category characters is displayed.
Search for — Allows you to type all or part of the name of the character for which you are
searching.
Search — Executes the search based on the criteria you have defined.
See Also
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors

You can use color and style formats to make your drawing a more powerful communication tool,
or simply to make it more aesthetically appealing. The software provides several different
methods for formatting one or more geometric elements, such as lines, arcs, and circles. You
can also format dimensions, annotations, and.
Styles
To make elements that are the same type look alike, you can use styles to apply several formats
at once. Styles are a collection of formats that are saved under a name. Styles allow you to save
several formats so you can use them again and again. Using styles guarantees consistency in a
drawing.
To make an element look unique, you can select it and then format it directly. Formatting a few
elements at a time takes more time than applying styles, but gives you greater flexibility.
The software provides fills that you can apply to closed boundaries. A fill floods a closed
boundary with a solid color or pattern.
Besides fills, the software provides line types such as continuous, dash, chain, continuous
chain, double chain, dot, and end gap. New line types can be created through Visual Basic
Automation.
Properties and Parameters

You can edit the properties of an element, symbol, or object by selecting it and then changing
properties on the ribbon. You can also Select the Element, right click, and select Properties on
the shortcut menu.
A property is a unique characteristic of an element, object, symbol, or document. You can
display document properties in the Windows Explorer or by clicking Properties on the File
menu or Edit menu. Properties for elements or objects can be classified by three different types,
as defined on the Properties dialog box:
 Size properties, as specified on the Info tab affect physical characteristics of the element,
such as the length.
 Style properties, as specified on the Format tab, affect the format of the element.
 User-defined properties, as created on the User tab. User-defined properties are usually in
the form of a text notation, such as cost, manufacturer, and so forth. You can change

user-defined properties, but these changes have no effect on the appearance of the element
or object.
For example, a valve symbol's style properties can include color, line style, and width. Other
user-defined properties stored with the symbol can include the manufacturer, cost, or material.
See Also
Applying Unique Formats (on page 341)
Applying Colors and Patterns to Closed Boundaries (on page 354)
Applying Formats with Styles (on page 333)
Format a Geometric Element (on page 342)
Applying Formats with Styles

If you want elements that are the same type to look alike, you should use styles, a collection of
formats that can be applied to the following items:
 Geometric elements
 Dimensions
 Annotations
 Fills
Using styles ensures consistency. If you place or draw one or more elements, the formats in the
style are applied directly to the elements. You do not have to spend time formatting as you draw.
You can apply the formats in each style again and again.
The software provides styles that you can apply to elements so that they conform to an
engineering standard, such as ISO or ANSI.
Managing Styles
Using the Format > Style command, you can create several styles so that elements in a
drawing appear the way you want. You can use or modify the styles delivered with the software,
or you can set up new ones that conform to your unique requirements. One or more styles can
be stored in a template so that you can use them in other drawings.
The software divides styles into types, such as text, dimension, line, and fill. A style type
contains one or more styles. You can create styles for each style type. When you create a new
document based on a template, the template is copied. The copy includes any styles that are in
the template. Fonts are never copied into a document. If you want someone to view the fonts,
and that person's system does not have the same fonts installed, you should give that person
the fonts along with the document.
Including Styles from Other Documents in a Template

If you want to make styles from other documents available in the current document, you can
reference the styles with style resource documents. You can reference a style resource
document to the active template or document by clicking Resources on the Styles dialog box.
The Style Resources dialog box allows you to add style resource documents to the current
template or document. Style resource documents can be any .igr document or .RSC line style
file that contains styles native to that document.

If you create a document based on a template, any style resource documents attached to the
template are attached to the new document as well. When you reference a style resource
document from the current document or template, the styles in the resource document are
added to the Style dropdown list on the active document's ribbon. When you apply a style to an
element on the drawing sheet, the style is copied from the style resource document to the
current document. The fonts are added to the dropdown list on the ribbon as well, but are not
copied into the current document.
Applying Styles
The style type determines what type of item to which you can apply a style. A text style can be
applied to text within a text box. A line style can be applied to any geometric element such as a
line, arc, circle, or ellipse. A dimension style can be applied to a dimension or balloon.
When you place dimensions or annotations, or draw elements, the formats from their default
styles are applied automatically. For example, if you click SmartDimension on the Dimension
toolbar, the ANSI style appears on the ribbon. Each dimension that you place receives the
ANSI style. To apply a different style, you can change the style name on the ribbon before or
after you draw or place an element.
Applying Styles to More Than One Element

Selecting more than one element and then applying the same style to them removes any
previous formats—the elements now all have the same formats from the style that you applied.
To do this, you must select elements that are in the same style type, such as text, dimension, fill,
or line. For example, you cannot apply a line style to a dimension.
To preserve the data integrity of your custom styles files from one software version
to the next, Intergraph PPM recommends after installing the latest version of the software that
you open all your custom styles files and save them to the new file format.
See Also
Applying Unique Formats (on page 341)
Apply a Style
1. Select the element you want to format.
2. Click Format > Style.
3. On the Style dialog box, in the Styles list, click the style you want to apply.
4. Click Apply.
If you have formatted an element with Properties, or by setting options on the active
ribbon, these formats are removed when you apply a style.
See Also
Reapply Style Dialog Box (on page 341)
Apply a Style to a Group of Elements (on page 335)

Apply a Style to a Group of Elements

1. Select two or more elements.
3. On the Style dialog box, in the Style Type box, click the style type that you want.
If you have selected several elements from different style types, the Style Type box is
blank.
4. In the Style box, click the style that you want to apply to the elements.
5. Click Apply to change all the elements that you selected.
If you select different types of elements, you can apply a style only to the elements that
are in the style type that you selected on the Style dialog box. For example, if you select
several lines and dimensions on a drawing, you can apply a line style only to the lines. You
cannot apply a line style to the dimensions.
See Also
Rename a Style
2. On the Style dialog box, in the Style Types field, click the style type you want.
3. In the Style box, click the style you want to rename.
4. Click Modify.
5. In the Name box, type the new name for the style.
6. Click OK.
7. Close the dialog box.
See Also
Delete a Style
3. In the Style box, click the style you want to delete.
4. Click Delete.
5. Confirm that you want to delete the style.
See Also

Create a Style with the Style Command

3. Click New to open a dialog box based upon the style type you clicked.
4. On the Name tab, in the Name box, type a name for the new style.
5. To base the style on an existing style, click a style from the list in the Based On field.
6. Click the other tabs on the dialog box and set the options you want to apply to the new style.
See Also
New Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 340)
New Line Style Dialog Box (on page 339)
New Text Box Style Dialog Box (on page 340)
Change the Formats of a Style

3. In the Style box, click the style you want to change.
4. Click Modify to open a dialog box based upon the style type you clicked.
5. To base the style on an existing style, click a style from the list in the Based On field.
6. Click the other tabs on the dialog box and set the options you want to modify.
After you close the dialog box, the software updates all elements formatted with the modified
style throughout the document.
 If an element has a style, you can override the style by editing the element's properties with
the Properties command on the Edit menu.
 You can remove style overrides by re-applying a style.
 You can modify one or more styles using Style on the Format menu.
See Also
Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 340)
Modify Line Style Dialog Box (on page 340)
Modify Text Box Style Dialog Box (on page 340)
Save a Style to a Template

1. Open a document template.

3. On the Style dialog box, select the style you want to save to the template of the active
document.
4. Click New or Modify.
5. On the dialog box that appears, click the Name tab.
6. Type a name in the Name text box, and enter other information on the dialog box, as
needed.
7. Click OK to save the changes.
See Also
Add Styles to the Current Document

You can reference a style resource document from any template or document.
1. Click File > Open and open the document to which you want to add a style resource.
3. In the Style dialog box, click Resources.
4. In the Style Resources dialog box, click Add.
5. In the Add Style Resources dialog box, select the name of the style resources document
that you want to add to the template, and then click Open.
6. In the Style Resources dialog box, click OK.
7. In the Style dialog box, click Apply and then click Close.
8. On the Draw toolbar, select Line/Arc Continuous .
9. In the Style list, select a line style. Each line style that you select will be imported to the new
file.
11. In the Style dialog box, click Resources.
12. In the Style Resources dialog box, select the style resource document you previously
added and click Remove.
13. Click OK to close the Style Resources and Style dialog boxes.
14. When you close the document, click OK when you are prompted to indicate whether or not
you want to save changes to the document.
15. The styles in the style resource document are referenced from the template or document
that you just saved. If you open a document that references a style resource document, the
styles in the style resource document will be available on the Styles list of the current
document's ribbon. If you open a document that is based on a template with references to
style resource documents, the styles will also be available in the same manner. You can
then apply the styles in the style resource document to elements or annotations in the
current document.
The line styles are copied from the style resource document into the current document.
The font styles are not copied. So, if you want another person to be able to view the same

fonts in the document and that person's system does not have the same fonts installed, you
should give that person a copy of the fonts along with the document.
Sometimes you might attach several style resource documents that contain styles with
duplicate names. In these cases, the style in the style resource document that is listed first in the
Style Resources list takes precedence and will be listed on the ribbon of the active document.
See Also
Create a Style Using a Formatted Element

2. Apply the formats you want to save as a style by setting the options you want on the ribbon.
3. On the ribbon, click the Style box to select the current style name of the element.
4. Type a new name to create a style using the formats applied to the element.
5. Press ENTER.
If you create a new style using the Style box on the ribbon, you cannot base the new
style on any other style.
See Also
Reapply Style Dialog Box (on page 341)
Styles Commands and Dialog Boxes

This section contains topics about the commands and dialog boxes used for applying and
managing styles.
Style Dialog Box

Specifies the name of the style, the formats defined for the style, and other options for working
with styles.
Dialog Box Options

Style type — Specifies the style type. If you are placing a new element, you can specify the
style by clicking the appropriate style type in this box and then clicking the style that you want in
the Styles box. You can also change the style of an existing element by selecting the element
and then clicking Styles on the Format menu to set these options.
Styles — Specifies the style. Before selecting an item on this list, you must first select the
appropriate style type in the Style Type box.
List — Specifies which styles appear in the Styles list. You can list only the styles in use, styles
that you defined, or all styles.
The only styles that appear in the list are styles that are saved in the current document.
The styles saved in a styles resource document are not listed. However, if you click New, you

can select a style from a style resource document to use as a base style for the new style that
you are creating.
Description — Displays a description of the settings in the style.
Apply — Applies the style selected in the Styles box to elements that you selected. Applying a
new style to elements that you selected removes the current formats for the element.
New — Accesses one of the New Style Dialog Boxes so that you can create a new style.
Modify — Accesses one of the Modify Style dialog boxes so that you can modify the style that
you selected in the Styles list.
Delete — Deletes the selected style from the document or template.
Resources — Allows you to add style resource documents to the current template with the
Style Resources dialog box.
New Line Style Dialog Box

Creates a line style by allowing you to specify new characteristics. You can also define a new
dash definition.
See Also
Name Tab (on page 339)
Name Tab
Names a style when you create or modify a style. This tab appears only when you click New or
Modify on the Styles dialog box.
Name — Names the style. Style names can contain up to 253 characters (including aliases and
separators) and can include any combination of characters and spaces, except the backslash
character (\), semicolon (;), and braces ({ }). Style names are case sensitive.
Based On — Displays the name of the style that the current or new style is based on.
Description — Displays a description of the formatting options.
General Tab (New Line Style Dialog Box)

Sets formats for a line.
Style — Displays the name of the style that is currently applied to the selected element.
Color — Sets the drawing color.
Width — Sets the line width.
Type — Defines how the line appears.
Description — Displays a description of the formatting options.

See Also
Modify Line Style Dialog Box (on page 340)
New Line Style Dialog Box (on page 339)
New Text Box Style Dialog Box
Specifies the name of the style, the formats defined for the style, and other characteristics.
See Also
New Dimension Style Dialog Box

Sets options for creating a new dimension style. A dimension style is a collection of dimensional
formats, including primary and secondary units, text, spacing, and terminator type. Using a
dimension style guarantees that the display of related dimensional information is consistent in a
drawing. For example, if you want all driving dimensions to display in a specific color with
vertical text above the base line, you can create a dimension style that contains those specific
formats.
Modify Line Style Dialog Box

Modifies a line style by allowing you to specify new characteristics or a dash definition.
See Also
Modify Text Box Style Dialog Box

Modifies a style by allowing you to specify new characteristics.
See Also
Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box

Modifies a dimension style.
Style Command
Modifies, creates, deletes, or applies styles.

Style Resources Dialog Box

Lists style resource documents that are available to the current document. Resources can be
any .igr document or MicroStation line style resource with an .RSC extension. The styles in the
style resource document are available for use in the current document.
Dialog Box Options

Style Resource Files — Lists the style resource documents that are attached to the current
document. When you attach one of these documents to a template, the styles in the document
appear on the Style dropdown list of the ribbon in the current document. A style is copied into
the current document from the style resource document when you select this style on the ribbon.
A style is also copied when you apply the style to an element or annotation on the drawing
sheet. For example, if you attach DIMENSION.igr to the document, the dimension styles in
DIMENSION.igr appear on the dropdown list when you select a dimension on the drawing sheet
of the active document. You can then apply any of the styles to the dimension. The dimension
style that you applied is then copied from DIMENSION.igr into the active document when you
save it.
Add — Allows you to add a style resource document to the Style Resource Files list with the
Add Style Resource dialog box. This dialog box allows you to select .RSC or .igr documents
and add them to the Style Resource Files list on the Style Resources dialog box.
Remove — Removes a style resource document from the Style Resource Files list. You must
first select a document in that list.
Reapply Style Dialog Box

Redefines a style according to the formatting of selected element, or returns the formatting of
selected element to that of the style currently applied to it.
Style — Displays the name of the style that is currently applied to the selected element.
Redefine the style using the selection as an example? — Changes the formatting of the
current style to the formatting applied to the element that you selected.
Return the formatting of the selection to the style? — Applies the formatting of the current
style to the element that you selected.
Applying Unique Formats

At times, you may want to make geometric elements, dimensions, fills, or annotations look
different from other ones on the drawing. To do this, you can edit the formats of the element
directly. When you do this, the formats are applied only to the selected element or the one you
are about to draw. This overrides whatever settings are applied to it by the style, without
changing the style.

Formatting Individual Elements

Before you place or draw an element, you can set unique formats with the ribbon, without
changing the style. The commands on the Format menu, except for Style, can also be used to
set an element's formats before you place or draw it.
For example, if you click Text Box, a style appears in the Style box on the ribbon. The style
contains a format for bold fonts. If you turn Bold off on the ribbon, the text box that you place will
not display bold text.
You can also apply unique formats to an existing element, dimension, fill, or annotation. You can
select the element and then edit the formats with the ribbon or the Edit > Properties command.
For example, if you select a text box that has a style that displays borders, you can remove the
borders with the Edit > Properties command. Since you are changing the element's format, and
not its style, the style of the text box still contains borders. If you apply this style to any other text
box, it will still display borders.
Formatting More Than One Element

You can change the format of more than one element at a time by selecting the elements and
formatting them the same way you would format an individual element. However, all the
elements that you select must be of the same type. For example, if you select several text
boxes, you can apply settings to all of them at once. You cannot apply the same settings to a
dimension and a text box by selecting both of them at once.
See Also
Format a Geometric Element

1. Select a geometric element, such as a line, arc, or circle.
2. Click Edit > Properties.
 You can also right-click the selected element, and click Properties on the shortcut
menu.
 After selecting the geometric element, you can use the ribbon to edit such properties as
line style, line color, line type, and line width.
3. On the Element Properties dialog box, set the options you want.
 You can also format an element before you draw it by using the Format > Line command,
or by setting options on the ribbon.
 Changing the current style settings on the ribbon or Properties dialog box overrides the line
style formats.
 You can change the definition of a line style with the Style dialog box.
See Also
Element Properties Dialog Box (on page 347)

Format a Text Box

1. Select a text box.
 On the ribbon, set the options you want. To apply several formats at once, click a style
on the ribbon.
 On the shortcut menu, click Properties. Then, on the Text Box Properties dialog box,
set the options you want.
 You can format a text box before you place it by using the Format > Text Box command or
by setting options on the ribbon.
 To format a group of text boxes quickly and easily, select several text boxes and apply a text
style by clicking a style on the ribbon.
 If you apply a text style, you can override the formats of the style by setting options on the
ribbon or Text Box Properties dialog box.
 To apply a border to a text box, click a border option on the ribbon. To change the settings
for the border, you must select the text and then, on the shortcut menu, click Properties to
open the Text Box Properties dialog box where you can set the options.
Set the Dimension Units

1. Select a dimension.
3. On the Dimension Properties dialog box, click the Units tab.
4. Set the options you want to use for the dimension unit.
 You can set the dimension units for a dimension that you are about to place using the
Format > Dimension command.
 You can save the dimension unit settings in a dimension style using the Format > Style
command.
See Also
Format a Dimension or Annotation

1. Select a dimension or annotation.

3. On the Properties dialog box, set the options you want.
 You can format a dimension or annotation before you place it by using the Format >
Dimension command, or by setting options on the ribbon.
 You can also set formatting options on the Dimension ribbon.
 You can also change a dimension style using the Format > Style command. Dimension
styles apply to dimensions and all annotations, except text boxes and callouts.
 If you want to format an existing balloon, you must click to select the leader line of the
balloon, and then you can change the formats of the balloon.
Unique Formats Commands and Dialog Boxes

This section contains topics about the commands and dialog boxes used with unique formats.
Dimension Command
Displays the Dimension toolbar. You can use the commands on this toolbar to place and
modify dimensions and annotations.
Dimension Ribbon
Sets options for dimensions. Some options on this toolbar are not available until you select an
element on the drawing sheet.
Dimension Style — Lists and applies the available dimension styles.
(decimal or fractional) and contains values as appropriate for the unit. This control is also
sensitive to the dimension being placed and contains values as appropriate for the dimension.
Dimension Value — Sets the dimensional value.
Driving/Driven — Toggles the selected dimension between a driving and driven state. If you
want to set this option before you place a dimension, you must set Maintain Relationships on
the Tools menu.
Auto Center Mark — Places a center line crosshair at the center of the radius of curvature
being measured by the dimension.
Jog — Offsets the projection line of a radial dimension. You can use this option to prevent
the projection line that you are placing from overlapping other dimensions.
Dimension Axis — Sets the orientation of dimensions placed by Distance Between or

Coordinate Dimension. This option is not available until you select one of those buttons. This
option is not available after you select the origin element.
When you click Default, the dimensions that you place are parallel or
perpendicular to the horizontal edge of the drawing sheet.

When you click Implicit, the dimensions that you place are parallel or
perpendicular to the element that you are dimensioning.
When you click Explicit, the dimensions that you place are parallel or
perpendicular to the element that you set the dimension axis to with
the Axis on the Dimension toolbar. You can use Explicit when the
default horizontal and vertical axes are not appropriate for the
geometry that you are dimensioning.
Complement — Places an angular dimension at the 180 degree complement.
Half/Full — Toggles between half and full. When you toggle this option, the symmetric
diameter appears as half or full.
The following options are available only if you click SmartDimension button on the Dimension
toolbar and select an element:
Length — Places a linear dimension for the following:

 The length of a line
 The arc length of an arc
 The horizontal or vertical distance between the end points of a line
Angle — Places an angular dimension for the angle of a line or the sweep angle of an arc.
Radius — Places a radial dimension for the following:

 Arc
 Circle
 Ellipse

 Curve
Diameter — Places a diameter dimension for an arc or circle.
Prefix — Opens or closes the Dimension Prefix dialog box for specifying prefix, suffix,
superfix, and subfix information.
Dimension Type — Specifies the dimension type and the related tolerances.
Upper Tolerance — Sets the primary upper tolerance value. This option is available for
tolerance or limits dimension types only.
Lower Tolerance — Sets the primary lower tolerance value. This option is available for
tolerance or limits dimension types only.
Class — Sets the tolerance class. This option is available for the class dimension type only. You
can set the deviation (letters) and the grade (numbers).
See Also

Element Properties Dialog Box

Sets the display properties and properties you define for elements.
See Also
Info Tab (Element Properties Dialog Box) (on page 347)
Format Tab (Element Properties Dialog Box) (on page 351)
User Tab (Properties Dialog Box) (on page 351)
Info Tab (Element Properties Dialog Box)

The contents of this tab vary depending on whether you selected or highlighted one of the
following types of elements:
Line Tab Options

Type — Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type.
Sheet — Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the
name of the drawing sheet.
Layer — Sets the layer that contains the element.
Start Point — Sets the X and Y values for the start point of the element.
X — Sets a value for the X coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option.
Y — Sets a value for the Y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option.
End Point — Sets the X and Y values for the end point of an element.
Length — Displays the length of a curve. You cannot edit this value.
Angle — Sets the angle of a line.
Arc Tab Options

Start Point — Sets the X and Y values for the start point of the element.
X — Sets a value for the X-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option.
Y — Sets a value for the Y-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option.
Center Point — Sets the X and Y values for the center point of the arc.

End Point — Sets the X and Y values for the end point of an element.
Start Angle — Displays the angle formed by the X axis and the first point of the sweep angle.
Zero degrees is horizontal to the x-axis.
Sweep Angle — Sets the sweep angle.
Circle Tab Options

Center Point — Sets the X and Y values for the center point of the circle.
Diameter — Sets the diameter of the circle.
Circumference — Displays the circumference of a closed element. Although you cannot edit
the circumference, the box automatically updates when you edit the geometry.
Area — Displays the area of a closed element. Although you cannot edit the area, the box
automatically updates when you edit the geometry.
Curve Tab Options

Curve Type — Displays the type of curve (open or closed). You cannot edit this field.
Order — Displays the order of the curve. Higher order curves are more accurate or precise than
lower order curves. All curves drawn with the curve command will be 4th order curves.
Vertices — Sets the coordinates of the nodes on the curve.
Nodes — Lists the nodes on a selected curve. When you select a node from the list, its x and y
values are displayed so you can edit them. The node type is also displayed.
Length — Displays the length of a curve. You cannot edit this value.
Area — Displays the area of a closed curve. Although you cannot edit the area, the box
The X/Y coordinate values are read-only.

Ellipse Tab Options

Center Point — Sets the X and Y values for the center point of a closed element.
Primary Axis — Sets the length of the primary axis. The ellipse orientation is based on the
primary axis.
Secondary Axis — Sets the length of the secondary axis. The secondary axis is perpendicular
to the primary axis.
Rotation Angle — Sets the angle of the primary axis of the ellipse. Zero degrees is horizontal to
the X-axis. The angle increases in the counterclockwise direction.
Point Tab Options

Coordinate — Sets the X and Y values for an element.

Fillet Tab Options

Radius — Specifies the radius between the two elements you want to use to create the fillet.
Chamfer Tab Options

Angle — Measures the angle between the chamfer and the first linear element.
Setback A — Specifies the distance from the corner to the beginning of the chamfer on the first
linear element you selected.
Setback B — Specifies the distance from the corner to the beginning of the chamfer on the
second linear element you selected.
Rectangle Tab Options

Centroid — Defines the exact center of the rectangle with X and Y coordinates.
Height — Sets the height of the rectangle or square.
Width — Sets the width of the rectangle or square.
Angle — Sets the orientation angle of the element. Zero degrees is horizontal to the X-axis. The
angle increases in the counterclockwise direction.

See Also
Format Tab (Element Properties Dialog Box)

Color — Sets the drawing color.
Width — Sets the line width.
Type — Sets the drawing line type and style.
See Also
User Tab (Properties Dialog Box)
Attribute set — Names a group of attributes. You can type a name in the box and press TAB.
Attributes
Sets the name, type, and value of the attribute set. You can type a name in the box and press
TAB.
the Type box.
table.
row in the table.
See Also

Format Dimension Dialog Box

Sets options for placing dimensions. You can access this dialog box with Dimension on the
Format menu. You can define dimension styles with Style on the Format menu.
Format Line Dialog Box

Sets options for placing lines. You can access this dialog box by clicking Line on the Format
menu. You define line styles by clicking Style on the Format menu.
Format Text Box Dialog Box

Sets options for placing text boxes. You can access this dialog box by clicking Text Box on the
Format menu.
See Also
Border and Fill Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box) (on page 329)
Info Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box) (on page 326)
Line Command
Formats a new line as you place it.
Properties Command
Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected style.
SmartFrame Properties Dialog Box

Sets properties for a frame, called a SmartFrame, which provides a border for an object when
you insert or paste the object into the current document. You can scale the object by dragging
one of the handles on the frame. Or, you can crop the object by pressing the SHIFT key and
dragging one of the handles.
Info Tab (SmartFrame Properties Dialog Box)

Provides information about frames around objects, such as raster images or drawings from
other applications.
Type — Displays the category of the selected element. You cannot edit this value.
Sheet — Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the selected element. You
cannot edit this value.
Name — Allows you to type a name for the SmartFrame.
Layer — Sets the layer that contains the selected element.
Origin — Specifies the coordinates, or location, of an element along the X and Y-axes.

Behavior — Specifies how the SmartFrame reacts to changes made within its source. For
example, if Fit Reference to Frame is selected and the size of the frame contents is expanded,
the SmartFrame will also resize and attempt to encompass all the data. Conversely, if you resize
the SmartFrame, the data inside is scaled so that it continues to fit within the frame. If Frame
Fixed is selected, the SmartFrame does not react to changes made within its source, and
resizing the frame will not affect the scale factor of the frame contents; consequently, the frame
remains "fixed" in its original size and position.
Height — Displays the height of the selected SmartFrame. The value in this field is for display
purposes only.
Width — Displays the width of the selected SmartFrame. The value in this field is for display
purposes only.
Scale — Allows you to specify the SmartFrame scaling options:
 Scale (1:1) — Sets the drawing scale to a 1:1 ratio. This means that the representation of
the objects on the drawing sheet is the same size as the real-world object being described.
 Select scale — Sets the drawing scale to a standard ratio. The specified ratio defines the
size of the drawing in relation to the size of the real-world object. For a 2:1 ratio, the “2”
represents the size of the drawing and the “1” represents the size of the real-world object.
 Custom — Defines a custom or scale ratio. The first value defines the distance on the
drawing sheet and the second value defines this distance in a real-world value.
Use photographic style scale — Controls how paper-based items are scaled. When this
option is enabled (and if the Display as printed option on the View Tab of the Options dialog
box is also enabled), text and geometry widths scale up. When this option is disabled, text and
geometry widths stay true to size (even if Display as printed is enabled).
Link — Determines the way that the object links with a SmartFrame. This option is available
only for linked objects.
 As part of the model (public) — Allows the linked object to publicly appear in any
document that links to the current document. Therefore, if you link an object to the current
drawing and then link to the current drawing from another document, the current drawing
and the linked object appear in the other document. For example, this setting is useful if you
link comments from a Word document to the current drawing and you want other documents
to appear in the current drawing with the comments.
 As reference only (private) — Restricts the linked object from being displayed in any
document that links to the current document. If the current drawing is linked to another
document, the linked object does not appear in the other document. For example, this
setting could be useful if you want to link comments from a Word document to the current
drawing and you want other documents to display the drawing, but not the comments.
Border Tab (SmartFrame Properties Dialog Box)

Allows you to format frames around objects, such as raster images or drawings from other
applications.
Show border — Turns on/off the frame border around the object.
Color — Sets the color of the border.

Line Type — Overrides a line type for a drawing sheet or embedded object and sets another
line style for an element or linked object.
View shape — Specifies the geometric shape of the border. Two options are available:
Rectangular and Elliptical. Changing the border shape can result in cropping the contents of
the SmartFrame.
User Tab (SmartFrame Properties Dialog Box)

Attribute set — Names a group of attributes. You can type a name in the box and press TAB.
Attributes
Sets the name, type, and value of the attribute set. You can type a name in the box and press
TAB.
the Type box.
table.
row in the table.
Text Box Command

Places a text box in a document.
You can find this command on the Label toolbar.
Applying Colors and Patterns to Closed Boundaries

You can fill a boundary with a pattern or a solid color using Fill on the Draw toolbar. A fill is like
other elements in that you can format it and move it around, but the fill is always associated with
a boundary. The boundary can be made up of more than one element, but it must be closed on
all sides. The following figure shows a pattern fill and solid fill.

The software provides styles for fills for various engineering standards, such as ANSI, ISO, and
AIA.
Modifying Fills
A fill is associative, which means it maintains its original orientation to an element regardless of
the way you manipulate the element. For example, if you move the boundary, the fill moves with
it. If you change the boundary, the fill changes to conform to the new boundary area.
A fill can exist only inside a closed boundary. If you drag a fill to another region, the fill assumes
the shape of the region where you dragged it. If you open a closed boundary, the fill changes
color to indicate that it is disabled. If you close the boundary again, the fill changes color to show
that it is now active.
Masking Objects
You can mask out underlying graphics without deleting or trimming. The software provides a lot
of flexibility for creating a mask, such as shape, line style, with or without a label or border. The
following illustrations show examples of masks placed in a drawing. The first example shows a
rectangular mask, border shown with dashed line style, with a caption.
The second example shows a polygonal mask, border shown in green and no label.

See Also
Format a Fill (on page 357)
Place a Fill
 You can place a fill only inside a closed boundary. If the software cannot determine the fill
boundary due to the complexity of the geometry, the fill color will be gray to indicate that the
fill was improperly done.
 If the software determines that the fill boundary is not closed, the feedback is a beep and no
fill.
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Fill .
2. On the Fill ribbon, click the settings that you want.

3. Click inside one or more closed boundaries that you want to fill.
 If you open a closed boundary, the fill color changes to gray to indicate that it is disabled. If
you close the boundary again, the fill changes color to show that it is now active.
 When you change a filled boundary by drawing another element, the fill does not
automatically update to fit the new boundary. You can refill the new boundary by selecting
the fill handle, then clicking Redo Fill on the ribbon to apply the fill to the new boundary. You
can also refill an area by dragging the handle to the new area.
 To fill a boundary quickly, you can zoom in on it first using Zoom Area on the View menu.
 You cannot modify an existing fill style, but you can create a new fill style by typing a new
name in the Style box on the Fill ribbon. The new style uses the settings on the ribbon as
the formats for the style.
See Also
Refill a Modified Boundary (on page 358)
Format a Fill
1. Select a fill.
2. On the Fill ribbon, click the settings that you want to update the fill.
 You can format a fill before you place it by setting options on the ribbon or using Properties
on the Edit menu.
 You can apply several formats at once by clicking a new fill style in the Style list box on the
ribbon.
 You cannot modify an existing fill style, but you can create a new fill style by typing a new
name in the Style list box on the Fill ribbon. The new style uses the settings on the ribbon
as the formats for the style.
 If you want to copy a fill style from one document to another, just create a fill, apply a style,
and then copy the fill to a new document. The fill style appears in a drop-down list on the Fill
ribbon in the new document.

 The blank color on the Fill ribbon (the cross hatched area at the bottom-right of the
color-picker grid) takes on the background color of the document. This is useful for creating
symbols that can cover an element on which the symbol is placed. Incorporating a fill with
blank color into the symbol allows the symbol, when placed, to mask out elements such as
lines or connectors that intersect the symbol.
See Also
Create a Fill Color

When you change a fill by setting options on the ribbon, you can create custom colors for the fill.
1. Select the Fill command.
The existing fill will be replaced by the pattern and color you select.
2. On the Fill ribbon, click Solid Color or Pattern Color.
Pattern Color will not be selectable when Solid Color is selected.
3. At the bottom of the palette, click More.
4. On the Colors dialog box, click Define Custom Colors and set the options you want to
create a new color.
5. Click Add to Custom Colors.
6. On the Custom Color Name dialog box, type the name that you want for the color you
created. This name appears on the palettes for Solid Color or Pattern Color on the Fill
ribbon.
See Also
Refill a Modified Boundary

When you change a filled boundary by drawing another element, the fill does not automatically
update to fit the new boundary.
1. Select the fill handle inside the fill.
2. On the Fill ribbon, click Redo Fill to apply the fill to the new boundary.
You can also refill an area by dragging the fill handle to the new area.
See Also

Colors and Patterns Commands, Ribbons, and Dialog Boxes

This section contains topics about the commands, ribbons, and dialog boxes used to apply
colors and patterns to boundaries in a drawing.
Custom Color Name Dialog Box

Saves a color that you created with a name. This dialog box appears after you create a color
with the Colors dialog box.
Color Name — Specifies the name of the color that you created on the Colors dialog box. After
you save the custom color with a name, the name appears on the color palette.
See Also
Create a Fill Color (on page 358)
Fill Command
Places a fill inside a closed boundary. You can place a fill only inside a closed boundary. If
the software cannot determine the fill boundary due to the complexity of the geometry, the fill
color will be gray to indicate that the fill was improperly done. Also, if the software determines
that the fill boundary is not closed, the feedback is a beep and no fill.
You can modify fill properties using the Fill ribbon.
See Also
Place a Fill (on page 356)
Fill Ribbon
Displays the active settings for a fill.
Style — Lists and applies the available styles. To define a new fill style, you can type a name in
the box. The new style uses the current settings on the ribbon.
Pattern Color — Applies a pattern line color for pattern fills. If you select none (the
cross-hatched area at the bottom-right of the grid), the background will be transparent. Filled
elements cover other elements when they overlap. You can click More to define custom colors
with the Colors Dialog Box (on page 302).

Solid Color — Applies a system color to set the background color for the fill. If you select
none (the cross-hatched area at the bottom-right of the grid), the pattern will be transparent.
Filled elements cover other elements when they overlap. You can click More to define custom
colors with the Colors dialog Box.
The blank fill color (the cross hatched area at the bottom-right of the color-picker grid for
both the Pattern Color and the Solid Color) takes on the background color of the document.
This is useful for creating symbols that can cover an element on which the symbol is placed.
Incorporating a fill with blank color into the symbol allows the symbol, when placed, to mask out
elements such as lines or connectors that intersect the symbol.
Redo Fill — Re-applies a fill to a filled area when the boundary changes. A fill can become
disabled, and change color, if you modify its boundary by drawing another element or moving
part of the existing boundary. If you click Redo Fill, the area surrounding the fill handle is filled
again.

Angle — Sets the angle of the fill in the active unit. Zero degrees is horizontal to the X axis, and
the angle (A) increases in a counterclockwise direction with zero on the positive side (B) of the X
axis. If you type a negative value, the software displays the equivalent positive value.
Spacing — Sets the spacing between the pattern lines.

See Also
Place a Fill (on page 356)
Sample Workflows
Formatting a New Drawing

You can use styles to make new drawings conform to your company's standards. For example,
the software provides line styles with names such as Normal. You have decided to apply the
Normal style to hidden lines. The Normal style has a line type that looks like a dashed line.
Your company standard may require that a hidden line look like a dotted line.
To change the Normal line style to conform to your company's standards, you can follow these
steps:

2. On the Style dialog box, click the line style type in the Style Type box.
3. In the Styles list box, click the Normal line style.
4. Click Modify to access the Modify Line Style dialog box.
5. On the General tab, in the Type box, select the line type that looks like a dotted line.
All the lines that you draw while the Normal style is selected on the ribbon will conform to your
company’s standards: hidden lines will appear as dotted lines. You can save the style to a
template with Style on the Format menu. This allows you to use the style again in other
drawings.
Formatting an Existing Drawing

You can use styles to make existing drawings conform to your company's standards. Suppose
you receive a drawing from another company, and all the hidden lines are continuous.
Your company standard indicates that hidden lines should be a line type that is dashed. You
have been using a line style, called Dashed, to conform to the standards used by your
company.
To change the hidden lines in the drawing quickly and efficiently, you can follow these steps:
1. Open the drawing that you received from the other company.
2. Select all the lines that you want to change.
3. On the ribbon, select Dashed in the Style box to change all the lines that you have
selected. All the lines now appear as dashed lines instead of continuous lines.
How Embedding Works

When you embed data from another program, the object becomes part of the drawing. When
you double-click the embedded object in Catalog Manager, the software in which the object was
created opens so that you can edit it. When you go back to Catalog Manager, the object
updates automatically with the changes that you made. The changes, however, exist only in the
current drawing.
You can embed existing information or create a new object and then embed it.
Embedding an Object
Suppose you want to use Word to add comments to a Catalog Manager drawing. First, click
Insert > Object. On the dialog box, click Create New and then click Microsoft Word in the list.
After you click OK, Word opens so that you can edit the object. If Word is already open, the new
document creates a new window in Word. After you type your notes, click Update on the File
menu in Word. You should then switch back to the Catalog Manager document or drawing. A
box the size of the object appears beside the pointer. You can then click on the drawing sheet to
place the Word object and display your notes on the drawing sheet. You can use this same
process with any documents created with Office-compatible or OLE- compliant software.

If you want to insert some notes that you already have in a Word document, you can use the
Insert > Object command. On the dialog box, you should select Create From File and then
enter the name of the Word document to insert the entire document into the Catalog Manager
document.
If you want to embed the object, make sure the Link check box is not set.
You can also embed information that you copied from another document. Copy the information,
and then switch to the Catalog Manager document, and use Paste Special to paste the
information as an embedded object.
If you want to use a mouse to embed objects, you can select the information in the source
software and then drag it into another document. You can also drag the document that you want
to embed from the Windows Explorer or into a Catalog Manager document. The object is placed
with the mouse drop point at the center of the object.
When dropping Catalog Manager documents, you can place the object coincident with the
coordinate system of the container document. To do this, select Coincident on the Reference
Files tab of the Options dialog box.
Editing an Embedded Object

To edit an embedded object, you can double-click the object to open the software that created
the object. The menus and toolbars of the current software are temporarily replaced by the
menus and toolbars of the software that just opened.
The software that created both documents must support OLE.
You can also click commands on the shortcut menu to activate the software that created the
object. To get the shortcut menu, select the embedded object and then right-click.
See Also
Change the Source for a Linked Object (on page 368)
Edit an Embedded Object with the Source Software (on page 363)
Embed an Object (on page 362)
Link an Object (on page 366)
Open an OLE Object for Editing (on page 367)
Embed an Object
To Embed a New Object
1. Click Insert > Object.
2. On the Insert Object dialog box, click Create New.
3. In the Object Type box, click the type that describes the software in which you want to
create the object, and then click OK.
The contents of the list depend on which applications installed on your computer support
linking and embedding.
4. To return to Catalog Manager, do one of the following:
 If the object was created in another application that is in a separate window, click Exit or
Update on the File menu in that application. If a message appears asking if you want to
update the document, click Yes.

 If the software temporarily replaces some of the Catalog Manager menus and toolbars, click
anywhere outside the embedded object.
 When you return to Catalog Manager, a box the size of the object appears beside the
pointer. You can click on the drawing sheet to place the object that you edited or created.
While the box appears beside the pointer, if you press the ESCAPE key, the object will be
placed at the default location. You can set the default location with the Tools > Options
command. You enter the location on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog box.
To Embed an Existing Object

1. Click Insert > Object.
2. On the Insert Object dialog box, click Create from File.
3. In the File box, type or click the name of the object you want to embed, and then click OK.
If you do not see the file that you want to embed, click a different drive or volume, directory
or folder.
A box the size of the object appears beside the pointer. You can click on the drawing sheet to
place the object that you edited or created.
While the box appears beside the pointer, if you press the ESC key, the object will be
placed at the default location. You can set the default location using the Tools > Options
command. You enter the location on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog box.
 If you are working in the source software, you can embed an existing object using the Edit >
Paste Special command.
 You can also embed an object by dragging and dropping a document from the Windows
Explorer into a Catalog Manager document.
 If you insert a Catalog Manager document into the current document, the terminators,
spaces, text, and styles appear in paper units relative to the source document. The
dimension lines and extension lines scale as though they are in real-world units. This
behavior can cause the dimensions and text to appear very large or small in the container
document.
See Also
Object Command (on page 364)
How Embedding Works (on page 361)
Edit an Embedded Object with the Source Software

1. Double-click the embedded object.
2. Edit the object.
 If you are editing the object in a separate application window, click either Exit or Update on
the File menu to return to Catalog Manager.
 If you are editing the object in software that temporarily replaces the Catalog Manager
menus and toolbars, click anywhere outside the embedded object to return to Catalog
Manager.

See Also
Embedding Objects Commands and Dialog Boxes

This section contains topics about the commands and dialog boxes used when embedding
objects in a drawing.
Insert Object Dialog Box

Create New — Creates a new object to insert into the file that is currently open. After you insert
the object, you will be able to automatically enter information into it.
Create from File — Inserts an entire document into the file that is currently open. You will be
able to edit the inserted object with the program used to create the file.
File — Provides a space to type the file name you want to insert into your document.
Browse — Provides a dialog box for locating the file you want to insert into your document.
Link — Allows you to choose whether you want to link or embed your file.
Result — Shows the type of file you are inserting. This information changes depending on the
type of file you are inserting.
To get help for various items on the dialog box, click the Question Mark in the upper
right corner of the dialog box, and then click on a dialog box control.
See Also
How Linking Works (on page 365)
Object Command
Inserts objects into a document through linking and embedding. The difference between linking
and embedding is how data is stored and updated. The Object command inserts any OLE 2.0
enabled object, such as a Word document, .AVI document, or CAD document. The inserted
object can then be edited by double-clicking it.
 When you link an object to a document, the document stores information about where the
object is located—the object is not stored in the document. When you embed an object in a
document, a copy of the object is stored in the document.
 When you make changes to a linked object, all documents that have links to that object
update. When you make changes to an embedded object, only the copy of the object that is
stored in the document updates.
See Also


Update Command
Updates the active document with the information that you just placed in the document for the
object. This command appears on the File menu when you double-click an inserted object in a
document.
How Linking Works

Suppose you are sketching a drawing with Catalog Manager, and you want to include it in an
engineering change request that was created in Word. You intend to update the drawing several
times and want the change request to reflect the latest updates. A good way to keep the
updates current is to link the drawing to the Word document and then periodically update the
link.
Creating a Link
You can create links between documents as easily as you cut and paste information. To create
a link to an entire document, you insert information into the destination document with Object on
the Insert menu. This is convenient when you do not want to switch away from the document in
which you are currently working.
You can also link information by dragging and dropping the document from the Windows
Explorer into a Catalog Manager document.
To insert the document as a linked object, you must press CTRL + SHIFT while
dragging and dropping the document; otherwise, the document is embedded.
To create a link to just part of a document, copy the information in the source document and
then use Paste Special in the destination document to create the link. To establish the link, you
must save the destination document. The software that created both documents must support
OLE.
Reconnecting or Changing a Link

When you move a document or rename the source document, the links in the destination
document are broken. To reconnect the link to the source document or change the link to
another document, you can click Links on the Edit menu.
Updating a Link
Suppose you linked revision notes in a Word document to your drawing. You have revised your
notes in Word since you first created the link. You must now update the link in the document so
that it displays the latest revisions to your notes. You can specify whether the updates happen
automatically when you change the Word notes or if you must manually update the link in your
original document. First, click Links on the Edit menu and then, on the Links dialog box, select
the link that you want to set. You can then click Automatic or Manual. With Automatic set,
Catalog Manager updates the links every time you open the document. With Manual set,
Catalog Manager updates the links only when you click Update Now on the Links dialog box.

Editing Linked Information

The best way to edit linked information is to change it in the source document. To edit the linked
information, double-click on the linked object.
If you place dimensions or constraints to items located within a reference file, it is
recommended that you do not manipulate those items in the reference file without first deleting
the dimension or constraint in the Master file. Such manipulations could cause problems in the
Master file.
Breaking a Link
If you do not need to automatically update the information displayed in the destination
document, you can break the link using Links on the Edit menu. Once the link is broken, the
information still appears in the destination document, but you cannot update the information or
reconnect the link. You must create a new link instead.
See Also
Break a Connection to a Linked Object (on page 368)
Link an Object
Make sure that you save the source document before you link the information.
Create a link to another document

1. In the software in which the information you want to link was created, open the source
document and then select the information that you want to link.
2. Click Edit > Copy.
3. Switch to your original document.
4. Click Edit > Paste Special.
5. Click Paste Link.
With this procedure, you can create a link only to an entire document; you cannot link
to a selection in a document.
 The software creates links as automatic links by default. It updates automatic links each
time you open the document and each time the data in the source document changes,
whereas it updates manual links only when you specify. To change the way the software
updates links, see Update a Link.
 You can also link information by dragging and dropping a document from the Windows
Explorer onto the drawing sheet. You must press CTRL + SHIFT while dragging and
dropping to link the information. If you do not press a key, the information will be embedded.
 If you insert an .igr or .sym document into the document, the terminators, spaces, text, and
styles appear in paper units relative to the source document. The dimension lines and

extension lines scale as though they are in real-world units. This behavior can cause the
dimensions and text to appear very large or small in the container document.
 In order to save files containing unavailable linked references to a previous version of the
software, you must do one of the following:
 Delete the SmartFrame that references the unavailable linked file.
 Make the link available by restoring it to its original location, or place the linked file in the
same location as the file that references the link.
See Also
Links Command (on page 369)
Links Dialog Box (on page 369)
Open an OLE Object for Editing

1. Select an OLE object.
 If the object is linked, right-click to display the shortcut menu and click Edit Object >
Open to open the source file in which the object was created.
 If the object is embedded, double-click the object to edit it.
See Also
Edit a Linked Object

1. Click Edit > Links to open the Links dialog box.
2. In the Links list, click to select the linked object you want to edit and click Open Source.
3. In the source file, make the changes you want to the linked object.
4. In the source file, click File > Save to save the changes in the source file.
5. In the source file, click File > Exit to return to the Catalog Manager document.
You can also double-click a linked object from within the Catalog Manager document to
open up the source file and make any necessary changes.
See Also

Change the Source for a Linked Object

1. Click Edit > Links.
2. In the Links list, click to select the link whose source file you want to change.
3. Click Change Source.
4. In the File Name box, type the name of the new source file.
If you do not see the file you want to open, navigate to a different drive, directory, or
folder.
5. Click Close to return to the Catalog Manager document.
If you have other links to the same source file, make sure you change all links from the
previous source file to the new source file.
See Also
Break a Connection to a Linked Object

1. Click Edit > Links.
2. In the Links list, click to select the link you want to break.
To select multiple linked objects, hold down the CTRL key and click each linked object.
3. Click Break Link, and then when the software prompts you to confirm that you want to
break the link, click Yes.
4. Click Close to return to the Catalog Manager document.
See Also
Links Dialog Box (on page 369)
Linking Objects Commands and Dialog Boxes

This section contains topics about the commands and dialog boxes used when linking objects in
a drawing.
Change Source Dialog Box

You can access the Change Source dialog box by using Change Source on the Links dialog
box.

See Also
Edit a Linked Object (on page 367)
Links Command
Edits or updates links to objects in another document. This command is available only on the
Edit menu.
See Also
Edit a Linked Object (on page 367)
Links Dialog Box

Displays information about links in a document including file name, file location, and whether the
link is automatically or manually updated.
Links — Lists the names, types, locations, and update settings of the linked source files in the
active SmartSketch document.
Cancel — Closes the Links dialog box without saving any of the changes that you have made.
Update Now — Updates the selected links.
Open Source — Opens the selected file in the source application for editing.
Change Source — Changes the source file for the selected link to a different file.
Break Link — Breaks the link between the source file and the Catalog Manager document.
Data for broken links is no longer updated if the source file changes. After you break a link, it no
longer appears in the Links list.
Update — Allows you to specify whether your link is updated automatically or manually. If you
select Automatic, whenever you change the linked information in the original document, this
document will be updated. If you select Manual, you will need to click Update Now to update
information in your document.
Linked Object Edit Command (Edit Menu)

Opens the selected linked document for editing.
Linked Object Open Command (Edit Menu)

Opens the selected document and activates the software used to create it.

See Also
Open a MicroStation Document (on page 401)
Break a Connection to a Linked Object (on page 368)
Open an AutoCAD Document (on page 383)
Open an OLE Object for Editing (on page 367)

SECTION 6
Customizing the Software

Customization allows you to modify and enhance the software to meet your specific needs. You
do so by adding built-in commands to the toolbars and menus in the software. For example, the
Text Box button is on the Label toolbar: if you use the Text Box button more frequently
than any other button on the toolbar, you could add the Text Box button to the Main toolbar. If
you want to offset elements, you can add an Offset button to any toolbar that you want. You
can also add button commands to a menu or a menu command to a toolbar. For example, you
can place the Sheet Setup command on the Main toolbar as a button.
To add a button to a toolbar or a command to a menu, click Tools > Customize. From there,
click the Menu or Toolbars tab and click the options that you want.
If you want to create a new toolbar that does not exist in the software, you can start by clicking
the View > Toolbars command. You then click the New button and type the name of the new
toolbar on the New Toolbar dialog box. After you click OK, the Customize dialog box
automatically appears so that you can add buttons to the new toolbar.
When you add commands or buttons to the menus or toolbars in the software, the
changes you made appear only if a symbol is open.
Designing Symbol Toolbars

Symbols toolbars allow you to create toolbars that contain the symbols you use most frequently,
keeping them conveniently located for easy access. Symbol toolbars can be plant-level or
user-level. You create plant-level toolbars in Catalog Manager; whereas, you create user-level
toolbars in either Catalog Manager or SmartPlant P&ID. With the most often used equipment,
instrumentation, or piping symbols, for example, your symbol toolbars can streamline your work
considerably. The symbol toolbars can be docked on any side of the main window.
Define a Custom Symbol Toolbar

1. In the Catalog Explorer tree view, open the My Catalog node.
2. Right-click on the Toolbars node.
 If no Toolbars node exists, create a Toolbars folder in your Symbols directory, and
refresh the view.
 You must have write-access to the Symbols directory to create project-level toolbars.
3. Click New on the shortcut menu.
4. Name the new toolbar.
5. In the Catalog Explorer, find the symbols you want to place on the new toolbar, and drag
them to the new toolbar in the My Catalog node.

6. When you have added all the new symbols you want to your new toolbar, click on the
toolbar to view the symbols available from the new toolbar.
 The symbols toolbar can be docked on any side of the main window.
 You can define up to two levels of toolbars. For example, you can create a Vessels node
under Toolbars, and under Vessels, you can create Vertical and Horizontal nodes. You
cannot create another level under that. A divider appears in the toolbar between levels.
Create a New Menu

1. Click Tools > Customize.
2. On the Menu tab, click the command category that you want in the Categories box.
3. In the List box, click the name of an existing menu.
4. Click Add Menu. The new menu is added after the existing menu.
If you want to add a menu to an existing menu, select the Place into selected menu
check box before you click Add Menu. You can add commands to the new menu later to
create a cascading menu.
5. In the List box, type the name of the menu and click anywhere away from the name to enter
it.
When you create menus, the changes that you made appear only if a document is open.
See Also
Customize Command (on page 377)
Customize Dialog Box (on page 377)
Add a Command to a Menu

2. On the Menu tab, click the command category that you want in the Categories box.
3. In the Commands box, click the name of the command that you want to add.
4. In the Preview box, double-click the name of an existing menu that you want to add a
command to. The Preview box expands to show the commands on the existing menu.
5. Click the name of the command that you want the new command to appear after.
6. Set the Place into selected menu check box.
If you want to add the new command to the main menu bar, do not set the Place
into selected menu check box. The name of the new command will be added to the main
menu bar after the existing menu that you selected in the Preview box.
7. Click Add Command. The new command is added after the existing command.
When you add buttons to the menus, the changes that you made appear only if a
document is open.
You can also add custom commands/macros to an existing menu. In the Categories box,
select Custom Commands. The Commands box becomes the Macros box and displays a list

of macros that are available in the current active directory. You can click Browse to change the
active directory. When you do so, the macro list in the Macros box updates to display a list of
macros in the specified location.
See Also
Delete a Command from a Menu

2. On the Menu tab, double-click a menu in the List box. The List box expands to show the
commands on the existing menu.
3. Click the name of an existing menu or command that you want to remove from the menu or
the main menu bar.
4. Click Remove.
When you delete a command from a menu, the changes that you made appear only if a
document is open.
See Also
Add a Button to a Toolbar

2. On the Toolbars tab, click the category that contains the command you want to add.
3. Drag the command button from the Buttons display area to the toolbar.
See Also
Remove a Command from a Toolbar

2. On the Toolbars tab, drag the button you want to remove from the toolbar and drop it
outside the toolbar boundary.
When you remove commands from the toolbars, the changes that you made appear only if
a document is open.
See Also

Restore All Built-in Menus to the Original Settings

2. On the Menu tab, click Reset All.
If you remove the Customize command from the Tools menu, you can restore it by
positioning the pointer over a toolbar and, on the shortcut menu and clicking Customize.
See Also
Install or Remove an Add-In

1. Click Tools > Add-Ins.
2. On the Add-In Manager dialog box, click Browse and locate the drive, directory, and
filename for the add-in.
3. To make the add-in available in Catalog Manager, select the associated check box.
4. To remove, clear the check box associated with the add-in. The software removes the
add-in the next time you start this application.
Display or Hide Toolbars

1. Click View > Toolbars.
2. In the Toolbars list, click on any toolbar you want to show or hide from the main window.
A toolbar is active when an X appears in the box beside its name on the Toolbars
window.
Create a New Toolbar

2. On the Toolbars dialog box, click New.
3. On the New Toolbars dialog box, type the name of the new toolbar. When you click OK, the
Customize dialog box appears so that you can add buttons to the new toolbar.
4. On the Toolbars tab, click the category containing the command that you want to add.
5. Drag the command button from the Buttons display area to the toolbar.
When you create a new toolbar, the changes that you made appear only if a document
is open.
See Also

Restore a Customized Toolbar to Default Settings

If you customize a toolbar, you can restore the toolbar to the original settings.
2. In the Toolbars dialog box, select the toolbar you want to restore.
3. Click Reset.
4. Click OK.
See Also
Remove a Command from a Toolbar (on page 373)
Restore All Built-in Menus to the Original Settings (on page 374)
Create a New Menu (on page 372)
Run a Custom Command

2. In the Custom Command dialog box, locate the custom command you want to run.
3. Click Open.
You can create custom commands with any programming tool that supports OLE
automation, such as Microsoft Visual Basic.
See Also
Custom Commands Command (on page 376)
Customizing the Software Commands and Dialog

Boxes
This section contains topics about the various commands and dialog boxes used when
customizing the software.

Add-Ins Command
Opens the Add-In Manager dialog box, from which you can install or remove:
 Add-ins that come with the software.
 Add-ins that you create.
Add-In Manager Dialog Box

Allows you to install or remove supplemental features, such as the SmartPlant Line Style Editor
for an application.
Available add-ins — Lists all installed supplemental applications and features.
Add-in description — Provides a brief description of the add-in selected in the Available
add-ins field.
Browse — Allows you to search for additional add-ins on your computer or network.
Custom Commands Command

Opens the Custom Command dialog box. You can choose a macro and run it. Some
macros are delivered with the software, generally in the [Installation Folder]\Program
Files\SmartSketch\VB Examples folder. You can also create your own macros and store them in
a location of your choosing.
You can use Tools > Customize to place the Macro button on a toolbar.
The following custom commands are delivered with Catalog Manager:
2D Custom Commands
 Align Dimensions - Aligns linear dimensions that you select to a common point. For more
information, see Align Dimensions.
 Clear Manual Edits – Clears manual edits from the drawing.
 Highlight Manual Edits – Highlights in the drawing the label and dimension options,
including filters that you select. For more information, see Run Highlight Command.
 Run Extend - Extends one or more open elements to a point in space or to another
element. For more information, see Run Extend Command.
 Run Highlight - Highlights in the drawing label and dimension options, including filters, that
you select. For more information, see Run Highlight Command.
 Run Place Girth Dimension - Places a girth dimension. For more information, see Run
Place Girth Dimension Command.
 Run Trim - Trims open and closed elements to a point in space, to a point on another
element, or performs a partial delete on a section of the element itself. For more information,
see Run Trim Command.

3D Custom Commands
Catalog Manager also delivers 3D custom commands. These commands are run from Tools >
Custom Commands on the main menu, rather than the Drawing Editor. For more information
on using 3D Custom commands, see Custom Commands in the Common User's Guide.
 Large Sector Utility – PROGID: DwgBinaryEditorCmd.FixSectorSize
Converts existing production drawings from a small to larger sector format so that Microsoft
structured storage limits and their corresponding errors are avoided.
 Repair Style Path Command – PROGID: DwgRepairCmd.RepairDocuments
Fixes the Symbol or Style path on a RAD document.
 Synchronize Drawing Templates Command – PROGID:
DwgSynchTemplatesCmd.SynchTemplates
Synchronizes or copies a template from one drawing component to another.
See Also
Run a Custom Command (on page 375)
Add a Button to a Toolbar (on page 373)
Add a Command to a Menu (on page 372)
Custom Command Dialog Box (on page 377)
Custom Command Dialog Box

Allows you to locate the custom command or macro that you want to run.
See Also
Custom Commands Command (on page 376)
Run a Custom Command (on page 375)
Customize Command
Allows you to customize toolbars or menus to fit your workflow. This command is available only
on the Tools menu.
Customize Dialog Box

Customizes toolbar buttons and menus.
See Also
Menu Tab (Customize Dialog Box) (on page 378)
Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box) (on page 378)

Menu Tab (Customize Dialog Box)

Adds or removes commands and macros from menus or the main menu bar. You can add a
command to an existing menu or build a custom menu with the commands that you want.
Categories — Sets the category from which you want to select a command or macro to add to
the menu or main menu bar. When you select the category for a group of commands in this box,
a list of commands specific to the selected category is displayed in the Commands box. When
you select Custom Commands in the Categories box, the Commands box becomes the
Macros box and displays a list of available macros. Also, a Browse button displays that you can
use to open the Select Macro Directory dialog box.
Commands — Specifies the command or macro that you want to add to the menu. If you select
Custom Commands in the Categories list, the Commands box becomes the Macros box and
displays a list of macros that are available in the current active directory. You can use Browse
to change the active directory. When you change the active directory, the macro list in the
Macros box updates to display a list of macros in the specified location.
Preview — Lists the menus. Double-click on a menu name to see all the commands on a menu.
When you click Add Command, Add Menu, Place into selected menu, or Remove, the
changes show up on this list. This list also changes to allow you type in a name for the new
menu that you want to add.
Place into selected menu — Places a command or macro that you selected in the Commands
box on the menu that you selected in the Preview box. If you do not set this option, then the
macros or commands that you are adding are placed before or after the command or menu that
you selected in the Preview box.
Reset All — Restores all menus and the main menu bar to the original settings.
Add Command — Places a command or macro on a menu or the main menu bar. This button
is available only when you select a command or macro in the Commands box.
Add Menu — Places a menu on an existing menu or the main menu bar. When you add a menu
with this option, you can add commands to the new menu later. If you add a menu to an existing
menu, this creates a cascading menu. After you click this button, you can type the name that
you want in the Preview box and then click away from the name to enter it.
Remove — Removes the command or menu that you selected in the Preview box.
Description — Displays a description or result of the options that you selected before you apply
them to a menu.
Browse — Opens the Select Macro Directory dialog box where you can navigate to the
directory containing the macro you want to add to a Catalog Manager menu. Browse appears
only when you click Custom Commands in the Categories box.
Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box)

Allows you to customize existing toolbars by adding or removing commands and macros. You
can also create your own toolbars.
Categories — Sets the category from which you want to select a command or macro to add to
the toolbar. When you select the category, a list of toolbar buttons specific to the selected
category is displayed in the Buttons box. When you select Custom Commands in the

Categories box, the Buttons box becomes the Custom Commands box and displays a list of
available macros. Also, a Browse button displays that you can use to open the Select Macro
Directory dialog box.
Buttons/Custom Commands — Specifies which button or macro from the active category you
want to add to a toolbar. If you select a macro, you can also click Browse and change the active
directory. When you change the active directory, the macro list in the Commands/Custom
Commands box displays a list of macros in the specified location.
Description — Describes the selected button displayed in the Buttons/Custom Commands
box. Descriptions are not available for macros.
Browse — Opens the Select Macro Directory dialog box where you can navigate to the
directory containing the macro you want to add to a toolbar. Browse appears only when you
click Custom Commands in the Categories box.
New Toolbar Dialog Box

Names a toolbar that you selected on the Toolbars dialog box. You can type the name of the
new toolbar in the box.
See Also
Refresh Symbol Toolbar Command (Catalog Explorer >

Catalog Menu)
Activates plant- or user-level symbol toolbars or updates the symbol toolbars to incorporate any
modifications to a toolbar.
Toolbars Command
Creates new toolbars and displays or hides selected toolbars. You can also change toolbar color
schemes and button sizes. This command is available only on the View menu.
Toolbars Dialog Box

Sets options for displaying, hiding, or changing toolbars. The settings on this dialog box are
remembered for the current user.
Toolbars — Lists the available toolbars. You can select the box next to the toolbar you want to
display, hide, or change.
Toolbar name — Displays the name of the toolbar that you have selected.
New — Accesses the New Toolbar dialog box in which you can specify a name for the new
toolbar.

Customize — Adds buttons to or removes buttons from built-in toolbars with the Customize
dialog box.
Reset — Resets the selected toolbar to the original icons.
Color buttons — Adds color to the toolbar buttons. If this option is cleared, toolbar buttons are
black and white.
Large buttons — Enlarges toolbar buttons so that they are easier to see.
Show ToolTips — Displays on-screen descriptions of a toolbar button when the pointer pauses
over it.
Classic icons — Displays the toolbar icons using the classic icons. If this option is not selected,
toolbars use the high-color icons.
OK — Saves changes and dismisses the dialog.
Cancel — Ignores any changes and dismisses the dialog.
Help — Displays the Help topic for this dialog.
See Also
New Toolbar Dialog Box (on page 379)

SECTION 7
ActiveCGM
If you want to place a document on an HTML page for viewing on the Web, you can save the
document to .CGM format. Computer Graphic Metafile (cgm), a standard file format for vector
and raster data, is an ideal format for publishing 2D vector drawings on the Web. This format
requires little storage space, displays quickly in a web browser, and has the ability to zoom and
display more detail. CGM documents can also contain embedded hotspots, hyperlinks, and
database links, allowing you to access information outside the document instantly.
Definition of CGM
CGM supports the definition of graphic objects bound to non-graphic attributes. The CGM file
format is defined by ANSI/ISO 8632-1992 (American National Standards Institute/International
Standards Organization) and MIL-STD-2301 (Military Standard). CGM is the international
standard that defines a hybrid (raster, vector, and text) graphics format. Definition of graphical
objects is supported at any arbitrary level of abstraction through a tagging mechanism similar to
SGML and HTML.
Definition of ActiveCGM
ActiveCGM® technology converts 2D design files, such as construction drawings, into CGM files
to link non-graphical data into graphical elements. For example, you can navigate an intelligent
drawing using a Web browser. ActiveCGM provides rapid, accurate, enterprise-wide access and
display of graphic information. It allows hyperlinking of vector and raster graphics defined in the
Version 4.0 Computer Graphics Metafile format. ActiveCGM products based on ActiveCGM
technology support zooming, panning, magnification, navigation of CGM graphics.
Open a Document Inside Internet Explorer

 In Internet Explorer, click File > Open.

ActiveCGM

SECTION 8
Working with CAD Drawings

®
Use Catalog Manager's CAD translation capabilities to translate or reference MicroStation and
®
AutoCAD files for use with Catalog Manager. You can modify your drawings in Catalog
Manager and then save them as either MicroStation or AutoCAD formats. CAD translation
provides equivalent objects to and from which elements or entities may be mapped during
translation. Translator options let you customize how MicroStation or AutoCAD fonts, linestyles,
widths, views, and units are imported, referenced, or saved as MicroStation or AutoCAD
drawings.
APPENDIX A
Working with AutoCAD Files

The topics in this section provide you with information about how you can use your AutoCAD
files with the software to get the most out of both systems. A command comparison and task
comparison will help the AutoCAD user become familiar with Catalog Manager terminology.
See Also
Command Comparison with AutoCAD (on page 384)
Task Comparison with AutoCAD (on page 390)
Open an AutoCAD Document

2. On the Foreign Data tab, click the software that you want in the Format box.
3. In the Import box, click Options to access the AutoCAD Import Options dialog box.
4. On the General tab of the dialog box, enter the directory path and template that you want in
the Template File box.
You can search for the template by clicking Browse.
5. Click File > Open.
6. On the Open dialog box, select the .dwg extension.
7. Select the document that you want to open.
 If you create a reference file, you can either click Insert > Object or drag an AutoCAD
document from the Windows Explorer into the current document.
 After you place the AutoCAD information on the drawing sheet, you can locate elements and
establish relationships among the new information and elements that are already in the
current document.

 AutoCAD polylines are imported as Catalog Manager line strings.

 AutoCAD mtext (two or more lines of text handled as a text box) is imported into the
software as two separate line strings (text boxes).
 When you open an AutoCAD document that has references to other documents, those
referenced documents appear as well. Nested reference documents can be up to four levels
deep. You can locate referenced documents in the current document.
Command Comparison with AutoCAD

This command comparison lists AutoCAD commands and their equivalent commands in the
software.
AutoCAD Software
Arc
...Center Start Angle Arc by Center Point Command (on page 154)
...Center Start End
...Center Start Length
...Start Center Angle Arc by 3 Points Command (on page 154)
...Start Center
...Start Center Length
...Start End Angle
...Start End Direction
Area Measure Area Command (on page 248)
Array
.....Polar Circular Pattern Command (on page 188)
....Rectangular Rectangular Pattern Command (on page 189)
Block Symbols

AutoCAD Software
Change Properties Command (Edit Menu) and Style

Command (on page 340)
...color Select Tool (on page 177) and Properties

Command (Edit Menu)
...endpoint
...layer
...linetype
...style
Circle
...2 Point Circle by Center Point Command (on page

147) and Tangent Circle Command (on page
148)
...3 Point Circle by 3 Points Command (on page 147)
...Center Radius Circle by Center Point Command (on page

147)
...Tangent Radius Tangent Circle Command (on page 148) with

SmartSketch Settings Command (on page
201)
Color Select Tool (on page 177) and Style

Command (on page 340) or the command
ribbon.
Copy
...Multiple Select Tool (on page 177) and Copy

...Single Copy Command (on page 185) or Move

Command (on page 181) with copy option
DIM
...diameter SmartDimension Command (on page 242)

AutoCAD Software
...horizontal Distance Between Command (on page 240)
...leader Leader Command (on page 324)
...style Style Command (on page 340)
Dimension
...Radius SmartDimension Command (on page 242)
...Save Dimension Command (on page 344)
...Variables
...Vertical SmartDimension Command (on page 242)
DxfIn Open Command (choose a dxf format

document)
DxfOut Save As Command (use the dxf file format)
Ellipse
....Center Ellipse by Center Point Command (on page

159)
... Axis Endpoint Ellipse by 3 Points Command (on page 159)
End Exit Command (File Menu)
Erase
...multiple objects Select Tool (on page 177) and Delete

...single object
Extend Extend to Next Command (on page 288) (use

direct manipulation of the handles.)

AutoCAD Software
Fillet Fillet Command (on page 288)
Grid SmartSketch Settings Command (on page

201) and PinPoint Command (on page 210)
Hatch
...Single Hatch Style Command (on page 340) and Fill

Command
Layer
...OFF Display Manager Command (on page 302)
...ON
Line
...Line Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 156)
...Osnap TAN
...perp Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 156)

and SmartSketch Settings Command (on
page 201)
Linetype Style Command (on page 340)
List Properties Command (Edit Menu)

AutoCAD Software
Mview Not Applicable
Menu Toolbars and Shortcut menus
Mirror Mirror Command (on page 289)
Move
...multiple objects Select Tool (on page 177) and Move

...single object Select Tool (on page 177) and Move

Ortho SmartSketch Settings Command (on page

201)
Osnap
...INT
PSpace
Pan Pan Command (on page 28)
Pline FreeSketch Command (on page 170)
Plot Print Command (on page 118)
Point This command is available only if you use the

Customize command to place it on a toolbar
or menu.
Quit Exit Command (File Menu)

AutoCAD Software
Redraw Screen refresh is automatic.
Regen Not applicable.
Rename
...Block Save As Command
Rotate
....several objects Select Tool (on page 177) and Rotate

Save Save Command (on page 114)
Scale
...a single object Scale Command (on page 292)
...multiple objects
Snap
...Standard SmartSketch Settings Command (on page

201)
Stretch Scale Command (on page 292)
Style Style Command (on page 340)
Text
...Justify Text Box Command (on page 325)
Trim Trim Command (on page 293) and Chamfer


AutoCAD Software
Undo Undo Command (on page 177)
Units
Zoom
...All Fit Command (on page 27)
...In Zoom Area Command (on page 29)
...Out Zoom Out Command (on page 30)
...Window Zoom Area Command (on page 29)
Task Comparison with AutoCAD

This task and term comparison lists AutoCAD tasks and terms and the equivalent functionality in
the software.
AutoCAD Equivalent Command
Angular Dimension The SmartDimension Command (on page 242) (Label

Toolbar) measures the angles or sweep angles of arcs. The
Angle Between Command (on page 231) (Label Toolbar)
measures the angle between two elements.
Absolute Coordinates The PinPoint Command (on page 210) allows you to specify
coordinates.

Annotations The annotation commands allow you to add text, balloons,

and leaders to drawings.
Anonymous Block Although anonymous blocks are not necessary for

crosshatching, you can use the Fill Command (Label
Toolbar) and select from several fill patterns.
Approximation Points The FreeForm Command (on page 169) allows you to easily
sketch curves. The software converts the approximation into
a precision drawing.
Array The software provides the Rectangular Pattern Command

(on page 189) (Draw Toolbar) and the Circular Pattern
Command (on page 188) for drawing patterns of elements.
Arrowhead The terminator, such as an arrow or dot at the end of a

dimension line shows which element a dimension measures.
Associative Dimension The dimensions in the software are associative.
AutoCAD Development The software uses macros to create programs to run with the
System (ADS) software. You can create programs that automate many
software tasks.
AutoDesk Device The system architecture of The software uses GDI or Open
Interface (ADI) GL for developing device drivers needed for peripherals.
Axes Tripod The PinPoint Command (on page 210) displays the xy axis
as you draw.
AutoLISP Programming with the software is easy. You can write

macros for graphics or use 3rd Party LISPS that support the
software architecture.
B-spline Curve The FreeForm Command (on page 169) allows you to draw
curves.
Bezier Curve
Bind OLE servers can be used to join files.
Blip Marks Blip marks, temporary screen markers displayed when you
designate a point, are not applicable to the software. The
software automatically refreshes geometry as you draw.

Block Symbols in the software are similar to AutoCAD blocks. You

can also use OLE servers to embed or link an AutoCAD
block in a software document.
removed symbols and OLE server links
Block Definition Symbols can be created with the software by allowing you to
use OLE servers to embed or link an AutoCAD file.
Block Reference Symbols can be created with the software by allowing you to
use OLE servers to embed or link an AutoCAD file.
BYBLOCK The Style Command (on page 340) allows you to define the
color or line type of symbols within a drawing.
BYLAYER The Display Manager Command (on page 302) allows you to
define colors, line types and other properties associated with
a layer.
Cartesian Coordinate The PinPoint Command (on page 210) allows you to define
System precision points in space using a Cartesian coordinate
system.
Centerline The AutoCenter Line option in the Dimension Command (on

page 344) (Label Toolbar) allows you to place a center line at
Center Mark the center of a curved element.
Chamfer The Chamfer Command (on page 286) allows you to draw a
line between existing lines. The existing lines are trimmed to
the chamfer's end points.
Circular External OLE servers allow you to link or embed a file as a reference
Reference file.
Color Map The Style Command (on page 340) allows you to define the
colors of elements.
Cubic Curve The FreeForm Command (on page 169) allows you to draw
curves.
Cursor The mouse cursor allows you to place graphics and

annotations. It is a screen display device.
Cursor Menu The Shortcut menu automatically appears when you

right-click. The commands displayed on the Shortcut menu
depend upon the type of element or object you select.

Curve The FreeForm Command (on page 169) allows you to draw
curves.
Curve Fitting
Default The Style Command (on page 340) allows you to predefine
the default settings of elements.
Definition Points The software does not need definition points for placing an
associative dimension because all dimensions are associated
with the geometry.
DIESEL (Direct Programming in the software allows you to program and

Interpretively Evaluated customize menu items.
String Expression
Language)
Diameter Dimension The SmartDimension Command (on page 242) (Label

Toolbar) allows you to place a diameter dimension.
Dimension Line A dimension line shows where a measurement starts and

stops. All dimensions in the software have dimension lines.
Dimension Line Arc The arc spanning the angle formed by the extension lines of
an angular dimension. An angular dimension can be placed
with the SmartDimension Command (on page 242) (Label
Toolbar).
Dimension Style The settings that determine the appearance of the dimension.
You can set the dimension style formats in the software by
using the Dimension Command (on page 344).
Dimension Text The value and text display of dimensioned elements is

defined by using the Dimension Command (on page 344).
Dimension Variables The dimensioning variables can be defined with the

Dimension Command (on page 344).
Display Extents Windows are used as display devices. The window

coordinates are defined as view coordinates.
Documentation Drawing Documentation drawings are two-dimensional drawings that

describe a real world object. Documentation drawings are
composed of drawing sheets.
Drag Geometry or documents can be moved by dragging them

with the mouse cursor.

Drawing Drawing sheets are used to draw your elements on.
Drawing Extents The Fill Command displays the entire drawing in a window.
Drawing File Documents are drawing files that can be saved on the disk.
You can save files in the software format or in AutoCAD
format.
Drawing Unit The units of measure for a drawing sheet can be English or
metric.
dxf (Drawing The files you create can be saved in the ASCII file format
Interchange Format) used by AutoCAD through OLE servers.
Entity Entities are elements within documents.
Extension Lines Extension lines, also called witness lines or projection lines,
are parts of dimensions.
External Program The software allows you to write and run external programs.
External Reference OLE servers allow you to attach files to one another.
(xref)
Fill The Fill Command (Label Toolbar) allows you to fill enclosed
shapes with various colors or styles.
Fillet The Fillet Command (on page 288) creates a constant radius
blend between two elements. The elements are trimmed to
the end points of the fillet.
Fit Points The FreeForm Command (on page 169) allows you to place
curves with interpolation and approximation points.
Freeze The Display Manager Command (on page 302) allows you to
define how you want the information on specific layers to
display.
Graphics Area Drawing sheets provide an area for creating and editing a
drawing.

Graphics Cursor The mouse cursor is a screen display device that allows you
to place graphics and annotations.
Graphics Screen / The windows of the software allow you to create graphics
Graphics Window and select commands. Drawing sheets are displayed in the
window.
Grips Handles and selection sets are highlighted when geometry is

selected for an element modification or edit.
Grips Modes Handles and selection sets are highlighted when geometry is
Handle Handles in the software are similar to grips in AutoCAD.
Hatching The Fill Command (Label Toolbar) allows you to fill enclosed
Horizontal Dimension Horizontal or vertical dimensions can be placed with the

Distance Between Command (on page 240) (Label Toolbar).
Icon Menu Toolbars contain icons, and menus and shortcut menus
contain Command names.
Include Angle The SmartDimension Command (on page 242) (Label

Toolbar) allows you to describe the sweep angle of a
dimension.
Initial Environment Templates allow you to define variables and settings for a
new drawing.
Instance Symbols can be created with the software by allowing you to

use OLE servers to embed or link an AutoCAD block or
convert the graphics of an AutoCAD block.
Interpolation Points The FreeForm Command (on page 169) allows you to create
curves. The points that the curve passes through are created
when you draw the curve.
Island Islands are closed boundaries that have not been filled within
an area that has been filled with the Fill Command (Label
Toolbar).

Key The software provides user properties, OLE servers, and

Open Database Connection (ODBC) from Microsoft.
Layer Layers allow you to group elements according to type or for

manipulation purposes.
Leader A leader line with a terminator allows you to place

annotations on drawings.
Linetype The Style Command (on page 340) allows you to define dash
definitions for lines.
Link In AutoCAD, a link is a database connection between an SQL

element and a database record. In the software, links allow
you to reference information between documents.
Macro The software allows you to write programs in the form of

macros. A macro is a sequence of actions or commands that
are named and saved.
Method When you program with the software, you use methods. A
method is a named operation or instance.
Mirror The Mirror Command (on page 289) allows you to move
elements or sets of elements about a mirror point.
Mnemonic The mnemonics on menus and dialog boxes allow you to

select commands quickly.
Model Space In the software, you can create 2-D models, which represent
real world objects, by drawing the real world object on a
drawing sheet.
Node The Curve Command (on page 155) in the software draws a
curve that has nodes. The nodes describe the various key
points along the curve.
Normal A perpendicular vector.

Noun/Verb Selection In the software you can select either the command or the
object first.
NURBS (Non- Uniform A non-uniform rational B-spline curve. The software curves
Rational B- spline) are mathematically defined as NURBS.
Curve
Object The software provides elements for drawing creation.
Object Snap (Osnap) The SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 201) and
PinPoint Command (on page 210) allow you to create precise
elements on drawings. The software recognizes key points of
elements and describes the relationship between the element
and the mouse pointer.
Object Snap Override The SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 201) and
Origin The PinPoint Command (on page 210) allows you to specify
the coordinates of a point. The Measure Distance command
(Tools menu) allows you to locate positions and points on
elements including elements on symbols.
Ortho Mode The SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 201) and
Orthogonal The SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 201) allows

you to define horizontal or vertical element positions on
drawings. The software recognizes key points of elements
and describes the relationship between the element and the
position of the mouse pointer.
Pan The Pan Command (on page 28) allows you to shift the view
of a drawing.
Paper Space Drawing sheets are 2-D areas that you can use to draw.

Parallel Dimension Parallel dimensions can be placed with the SmartDimension

Command (on page 242) (Label Toolbar). A linear dimension
can be parallel to the line it measures.
Personalization You can personalize when you install the software.
Pick Handles and selection sets allow you to select geometry and
objects. The mouse cursor is a screen display device that
allows you to place graphics and annotations.
Point An x and y position in space.
Pline The FreeSketch Command (on page 170) allows you to

create an element that is composed of one or more
connected line or arc segments.
Polar Coordinate The PinPoint Command (on page 210) allows you to specify
System the coordinates of a point.
Polygon Window Handles and selection sets highlight when geometry is

Polyline The FreeSketch Command (on page 170) allows you to

create an element that is composed of one or more
connected line or arc segments.
Radial Dimension Radial dimensions can be placed with the SmartDimension

Command (on page 242) (Label Toolbar).
Real World Units The PinPoint Command (on page 210) allows you to specify
the coordinates of a point. You can draw on drawing sheets
and then scale to real-world units.
Redraw Windows are automatically refreshed as you draw.
Regenerate Windows are automatically refreshed as you draw.
Region Regions are automatically closed as you draw with the

SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 201).
Relative Coordinates The PinPoint Command (on page 210) allows you to specify
the coordinates of a point.

Rubber- Band Line The software displays geometry as it is constructed. As you

use a command, one end of a dynamic line is attached to a
point in your drawing and the other end of the line is attached
to the mouse cursor.
Running Object Snap The SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 201) allows
you to connect end points by moving the pointer over the end
points.
Screen Menu Toolbars contain icons, and menus and shortcut menus
Script File Scripts are written and run as macros. Programming with
SmartSketch allows you to write macros for the software. A
macro is a sequence of actions or commands that are named
and saved.
Selection Set The software provides group selection and manipulation

using Select Tool (on page 177) and edit commands.
Snap Mode The SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 201) allows
you to define how you want to locate elements.
Snap Resolution The SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 201) allows
you to define locate zones that define how close the pointer
must be to an element you want to recognize or select.
Space Drawing Sheets allow you to draw in a 2-D work space.
Text Style The Text Box Command (on page 325) (Draw Toolbar) lets
you define the text characteristics you want to use.
Thickness The z value, or elevation, of a 3-D element is maintained as

an attribute through OLE servers when an AutoCAD file is
embedded in a software file.
Toolbar Toolbars contain icons, and menus and shortcut menus

Transparent Command The view commands allow you to start a Command while
another is processing.

UCS (User Coordinate The PinPoint Command (on page 210) allows you to specify
System) Icon the coordinates of a point.
Unit
Vector The PinPoint Command (on page 210) allows you to specify
Vertical Dimension The length of a line can be measured with the

SmartDimension Command (on page 242) (Label Toolbar).
The Distance Between Command (on page 240) (Label
Toolbar) can also be used to place a horizontal or vertical
dimension.
View Windows are used to display drawings from a particular

viewpoint.
Viewport Drawing sheets allow you to define a bounded area.
WPolygo The software provides group selection and manipulation

using the Select Tool (on page 177).
XYZ Point Filters The PinPoint Command (on page 210) allows you to specify
Zoom Extents The Zoom Out Command (on page 30) and Zoom Area
Command (on page 29) allow you to increase or decrease
the display of the graphics in a drawing. The Fill Command
changes the display of a window so that all the elements are
displayed.

APPENDIX B
Working with MicroStation Files

The topics in this section provide you with information about how you can use your MicroStation
files with the software to get the most out of both systems. A command comparison and task
comparison will help the MicroStation user become familiar with Catalog Manager terminology.
See Also
Command Comparison with MicroStation (on page 402)
Task Comparison with MicroStation (on page 411)
Open a MicroStation Document

2. On the Foreign Data tab, click the software that you want in the Format box.
3. In the Import box, click Options to access the MicroStation Import Options dialog box.
4. On the General tab of the dialog box, enter the directory path and template that you want in
the Template File box.
You can search for the seed file by clicking Browse.
5. On the Browse dialog box, click the seed file you want.
6. On the Open dialog box, select the .dgn extension.
7. Select the document that you want to open.
 If you create a reference file, you can either click Insert > Object or drag a MicroStation
document from the Windows Explorer into the current document.
 After you place the MicroStation information on the drawing sheet, you can locate elements
and establish relationships between the new information and elements that are already in
the current document.
 You can use DGN resource files to preserve the original fonts and line types of the
document when you open a MicroStation document with File > Open. You can set font
locations before opening the MicroStation document by clicking Tools > Options and then
clicking the File Locations tab. You can set options for line types by clicking Format > Style
and then clicking Resources.
 MicroStation line strings are imported as Catalog Manager line strings.
 MicroStation point strings are imported as groups.
 A MicroStation text node (two or more lines of text handled as a text box) is imported into
the software as two separate line strings (text boxes).
When you open a MicroStation document that has references to other documents, those
referenced documents show up as well. Nested reference documents can be up to four levels
deep. You can locate referenced documents in the current document.

Command Comparison with MicroStation

This command comparison lists MicroStation commands and their equivalent commands in the
software.
MicroStation Software
Active
...Color (CO=) Style Command (on page 340)
...Font (FT=) Text Box Command (on page 325)
...Keypoint SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 201)
...Style Style Command (on page 340)
...Weight(WT=)
Array
.....Polar Circular Pattern Command (on page 188)
....Rectangular Rectangular Pattern Command (on page 189)
Change
...Color Select Tool (on page 177) and Properties

...Level Display Manager Command (on page 302)
...Style Style Command (on page 340)
Construct
...Tangent Arc1 Tangent Arc Command (on page 157)
Construct Bisector

...Angle Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 156)

and SmartSketch Settings Command (on page
201)
...Line Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 156)
Construct Circle
...Tangent to Three Circle by 3 Points Command (on page 147) with

Elements SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 201)
Construct Line
...AA1 Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 156)

with SmartSketch Settings Command (on page
201)
Construct
Perpendicular
...From Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 156)

...To 201)
Construct Tangent
...Between Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 156)

...Circle 1 201)
...Perpendicular
...To
...from Element
Copy Element Select Tool (on page 177) and Copy Command
(on page 185)
Copy Parallel Move Command (on page 181) with copy option
...by Distance Move Command (on page 181) with copy and
step distance option
Create Cell Symbols
Create Chain

...Manual Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 156)
Crosshatch Style Command (on page 340); Fill Command
Define Cell Origin Symbols
Delete
...Element Select Tool (on page 177) with Delete

...Partial Trim Command (on page 293)
Delete Cell Select Tool (on page 177) with Delete

Dimension
...Diameter SmartDimension Command (on page 242)

Extended
...Radius
...Save style Format Dimension Command
...Size Arrow
...modify text Select Tool (on page 177)

location
...settings Format Dimension Command
...text style
Enter data field
...commands Text Box Command (on page 325)
Exit Exit Command (File Menu)
Extend Element 2 Extend to Next Command (on page 288)
Extend Line

...Intersection Extend to Next Command (on page 288) with

...by Keyin Select Tool (on page 177)
Fence
...Change Color Select Tool (on page 177); Properties

Command (Edit Menu)
...Change Level
...Change Style Select Tool (on page 177)
...Change Select Tool (on page 177); Properties

Symbology Command (Edit Menu)
...Copy Select Tool (on page 177) with Copy Command

(on page 185)
...Delete Select Tool (on page 177) with Delete

...Move Select Tool (on page 177) with Move Command

(on page 181)
...Stretch Select Tool (on page 177) with Move Command

(on page 181)
Fence Array
...Polar Select Tool (on page 177) with Circular Pattern

...Rectangular Select Tool (on page 177) with Rectangular

Pattern Command (on page 189)
Fence Rotate
...Original Select Tool (on page 177) with Rotate

Fence Scale
...Copy Select Tool (on page 177) and Scale Command

(on page 292) with copy option

...Original Select Tool (on page 177) and Scale Command

(on page 292)
File Fence (FF=)
Fillet
...Modify Fillet Command (on page 288) with

...Nomodify
...Single Fillet Command (on page 288) with

and Trim Command (on page 293)
Fit Fit Command (on page 27)
Graphic Group Select Tool (on page 177) with Group

Command (on page 305) and UnGroup
Hatch Fill Command
Identify
...Cell Select Tool (on page 177) and select a symbol.
Increment Text Macros (Custom Commands Command (on

page 376)) with Text Box Command (on page
325)
Intersection SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 201)
Justify
...Center Text Box Command (on page 325)
...Left

...Right
Levels
...Off (OF=) Display Manager Command (on page 302)
...On (ON=)
Lock
...Axis SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 201)
...Grid
Measure
...Area Measure Area Command (on page 248)
...Area Element
...Distance Points Measure Distance Command (on page 248)
...Radius Select Tool (on page 177) or SmartDimension

Mirror Copy
...Horizontal/Vertical Mirror Command (on page 289) with copy

option
...Line
Mirror Original
...Horizontal/Vertical Mirror Command (on page 289)
...Line
Modify

...Element Select Tool (on page 177) (Use direct

manipulation of the handles)
Modify Arc
...Angle
...Radius
Move
...Element Move Command (on page 181)
...Up/Left/Right/Dow
n
Place
...Lstring Point FreeSketch Command (on page 170)
...Mline Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 156)
...Note Text Box Command (on page 325)
...Shape Rectangle Command (on page 162)
...Shape Orthogonal
...Text Text Box Command (on page 325)
Place Arc
...by Center Arc by Center Point Command (on page 154)
...by Edge Arc by 3 Points Command (on page 154)
...by Radius Tangent Arc Command (on page 157)
Place Block Rectangle Command (on page 162)

...Rotated Rectangle Command (on page 162)
Place Cell
...Absolute Symbols
Place Circle
...Center Circle by Center Point Command (on page 147)
...by Diameter
...by Edge
...by Radius
Place Ellipse
...Half Ellipse by Center Point Command (on page

159) and Trim Command (on page 293)
...Quarter Ellipse by 3 Points Command (on page 159)

and Trim Command (on page 293)
...by Center Ellipse by Center Point Command (on page

159)
...by Edge Ellipse by 3 Points Command (on page 159)
Place Line Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 156)
Place Point SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 201)
Place Text Text Box Command (on page 325)
Plot Print Command (on page 118)
Quit
...Stop Close Command

Rename Cell (CR)= Symbols
Reset (button) Right mouse button.
Rotate
...Copy Rotate Command (on page 290) with copy

option
...Original Rotate Command (on page 290)
Save Save Command (on page 114)
Scale
...Copy Scale Command (on page 292) with copy

option.
...Original Save Command (on page 114)
Select Cell
...Absolute Symbols
Set
...Linefill Style Command (on page 340) ; Fill Command
Set Coordinates PinPoint Command (on page 210)
Show Library Symbols
Stop Drawing Screen automatically refreshes.
Undo Undo Actions (on page 175)

Update Screen automatically refreshes.
Window
...Area Zoom Area Command (on page 29) Also

located on Main tool bar and shortcut menu.
...Center Pan Command (on page 28) Also located on

Main tool bar and shortcut menu.
Zoom
...In Zoom In Command Also located on Main tool

bar and shortcut menu.
...Out Zoom Out Command (on page 30) Also located

on Main tool bar and shortcut menu.
Task Comparison with MicroStation

This task and term comparison lists MicroStation tasks and terms and the equivalent
functionality in the software.
MicroStation Equivalent Command
Active Depth The active depth of a 3-D element is maintained through OLE
servers as an attribute when a MicroStation file is embedded in a
software file.

Cell Symbols can be created with the software by allowing you to use
OLE servers to embed or link a MicroStation cell or convert a cell
library.
Command Window The ribbon allows you to give and receive feedback when you are
using a command.
Compress It is not necessary to compress documents in the software.
Default The Style Command (on page 340) allows you to pre-define the
default settings of elements.
Data Point The PinPoint Command (on page 210) is used to draw geometry.
Data Button The software uses the left mouse button for providing input points.
Dimension Units The Dimension Command (on page 344) allows you to specify the
units you want to use when you place dimensions.
Dimension Format The Dimension Command (on page 344) allows you to specify how
your dimensions appear when you place them.
Drop Status The Ungroup Command (on page 310) allows you to remove an
element from a group.
Design ".dgn" file Drawing sheets provide an area for creating and editing a drawing.
Drawing sheets are part of the software document.
Dynamic Update The software displays geometry as it is constructed. As you use a

command, one end of a dynamic line is attached to a point in your
drawing and the other end of the line is attached to the pointer.
Element Attributes The Style Command (on page 340) allows you to define the
attributes of elements.
Fence The software provides group selection and manipulation using

Select Tool (on page 177) and edit commands.
Font Font support includes TrueType fonts

Graphics Cursor The pointer is a screen display device that allows you to place
graphics and annotations.
Graphics Screen / The windows of the software allow you to create graphics and
Graphics Window select commands. Drawing sheets are displayed in the window.
Handles Handles and selection sets are highlighted when geometry is

selected for modification.
Hatching The Fill Command (Label Toolbar) allows you to fill enclosed
Identify Select Tool (on page 177) allows you to identify elements for
selection and manipulation.
Level The Display Manager Command (on page 302) allows you to define
layers and styles for layers.
Line style The Style Command (on page 340) allows you to define the line
styles of elements.
MicroCSL The software allows you to program and customize.
Mirror The Mirror Command (on page 289) allows you to move elements
or sets of elements about a mirror point.
Origin The PinPoint Command (on page 210) allows you to specify the
coordinates of a point. The software Command (Tools Menu)
allows you to locate positions and points on elements including

elements on symbols.
Parameter The software allows you to define user properties of elements and
objects.
Pull-down Menus The software has menus, shortcut menus, and toolbars for
command selection.
Real World Units The PinPoint Command (on page 210) allows you to specify the
coordinates of a point. You can draw on drawing sheets and then
scale to real-world units.
Relative The PinPoint Command (on page 210) allows you to specify the
Coordinates coordinates of a point.
Reset Button Reset by releasing a button or by selecting a new command.
Screen Menu The software has menus, shortcut menus, and toolbars for
command selection.
Seed File Templates allow you to define variables and settings for a new
drawing.
Tags The software provides a mechanism for using database features.
Tentative Snap Points on elements as you draw such as midpoints and end points.
U The SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) allows you to locate the

key
UCS (User The PinPoint Command (on page 210) allows you to specify the
Coordinate coordinates of a point.
System) Icon
Update Windows are automatically refreshed as you draw.

View Views are used to display the information in a window. Windows

display drawings from a particular viewpoint.
Working Units The software allows you to specify the working units you want to
use when you draw.
Z Depth The z value of a 3-D element is maintained as an attribute through

OLE servers when a MicroStation file is embedded into a software
file.
Zoom The Zoom Out Command (on page 30) and Zoom Area Command
(on page 29) allow you to increase or decrease the display of the
graphics in a drawing. The Fit Command (on page 27) changes the
display of a window to display all elements.


Glossary
A
alias
An alternative name for an object, such as a variable, file, device, or database instance.
archive
To copy a file to a specified storage location and then delete the file from the current location.
attribute
1. A property or characteristic of a component.
2. A characteristic that all members of a class possess. Each property has an associated value
that defines its current state. Most databases represent an attribute by a column in a table.
B
backup
To copy a file to a specified storage location while retaining the file in the current location.
batch processing
A method of processing data that collects a series of operations into a group and runs the group
in a continuous stream without user intervention.
Boolean operator
Syntax that defines logical relationships between expressions like AND (both), OR (either), and
NOT (other than).
C
cache
Memory that stores recently-accessed data so that subsequent requests to access the same
data can be processed quickly.
catalog
A collection of catalog items, which are blueprints or templates for creating an item within the
model.

Glossary
check in
The process of moving a file from a user location to a storage location and recording that
location in the database.
class
A blueprint for creating an item. The class defines the properties and behaviors that an item can
show.
client
A user, software application, or computer that requests the services, data, or processing of
another application or computer. The client is the user process. In a network environment, the
client is the local user process and the server may be local or remote. All network operations
among two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship.
client/server database
A database system in which the database engine and database applications reside on separate,
intelligent computers that communicate with each other through a network. In this system, the
processing power is split between the two CPUs. The workstation for the user is the client, and
the database runs on the server.
code list
See select list.
column
An attribute of a database table. A group of columns defines a table in the database.
commodity code
A code you define that provides an index to material descriptions.
commodity item
A standard component that you can find in a manufacturer catalog.
component
A catalog item that represents a part of the P&ID. A component has database information
associated with it.
concentric
Having a common center or origin point with varying radii.

Glossary
configuration files
Files that are used to identify and characterize the components of a network. Configuration is
largely a process of naming network components and identifying relationships among those
components.
connect point
An active point item that is specially designated in a component. A connect point is a location at
which lines, labels, and other components connect to one another. Also, a location for applying
a relationship.
connectivity
Linkage between items that relate because of their graphics, like a valve and a pipe run. Proper
connectivity must exist to confirm valid data integrity.
connector
Item with multiple vertices; behavior of a connector relies on the two items that it connects.
D
data dictionary
The underlying data model of a plant, consisting of database entries and select lists. SmartPlant
Data Dictionary Manager maintains this information.
data model
Application items that populate a project. Typical items in a data model are components, lines,
and labels.
database
Collection of files of comprehensive information that have predefined structure and organization;
a specific program can communicate, interpret, or process these files.
database administrator
The technical support person who assigns user IDs and data access permissions, creates new
databases, removes databases no longer in use, and monitors disk storage usage of the
database and performance.
database link
A pointer that defines a one-way communication path from an Oracle database server to
another database server. This pointer is stored in the local database and identifies the remote
database, a communication path to that database, and optionally, a user name and password. In

Glossary
connected Workshare, the database link is used to access the remote database, providing the
satellite a view into the plant schema at the host site.
database table
Part of the database consisting of rows and columns and containing information about the
project and design elements.
design file
File containing graphics and text data, also called a drawing file.
design-wide break
A region of the drawing within which a single property value is defined for all the included
components. Indicating the region, a closed shape exists, along with an accompanying label that
shows the property value.
display-only annotation
Feature that allows you to generate temporary annotation graphics for review without placing the
graphics in a design file.
drawing file
File that contains graphical items; also called a design file.
drawing, P&ID
Graphics file that contains data about one unit. Each drawing has a unique drawing number
within the unit to which the drawing belongs.
driving label
Graphics, text, or both with their own properties that are placed on the P&ID to define property
values of the components and groups to which they apply.
E
easting
Term used in plane surveying that describes an east, or positive, difference in longitude.
edge-edge model
A model that represents connectivity entirely by edges.
enumerated list
See select list.

Glossary
exclusive database relationship

Relationship that exists between any given item and the parent item to which it belongs, for
example, an instrument can belong only to one loop at a time.
F
filter
Function that creates a subset of items. This subset meets criteria that property values define.
fixed point
A control point that usually is a locally known monument with known coordinates.
flow rate
Quantity of fluid that flows per unit of time.
full path name

Name of the entire path or directory hierarchy to a file, including the filename. See also relative
path name and UNC path.
G
glyphs
1. Icons attached to the pointer that provide feedback as you draw. For SmartPlant P&ID,
glyphs identify the relationships that you are creating.
2. Icons that show the perpendicular or parallel relationships with other items in the drawing as
you point over items in the drawing.
H
hierarchical
An ordered relationship from greatest to least; refers to the relationships among groups,
components, and labels.
hierarchy
A classified structure with superiors, or roots, and subordinates, or dependents, for grouping
files or commands.
horizontal angle
Angle measured in the horizontal plane. Horizontal angles are the basic measurements needed
to determine bearings and azimuths.

Glossary
horizontal distance
Distance between two points computed using only the northing and easting coordinates of the
points.
host
A computer that acts as the controlling source of information. In SmartPlant P&ID Workshare, a
site that controls satellites.
I
implied piping component
Piping components that the software creates in the alphanumeric database; these components
are not represented graphically.
inline
Term used to refer to those piping or instrument components that have been inserted in a piping
segment.
inline instruments
Components that have been inserted in a piping segment. Inline instruments include instrument
valves, such as butterfly valves and temperature regulator valves, and other instrument
components, such as orifice plates and flow controllers.
instance
A single allocation of an item class.
instrument loops
A group of one or more instruments or control functions arranged so that signals can pass from
one function to the next for the purpose of measuring and controlling a process variable. In
SmartPlant P&ID, you can create instrument loops containing any combination of inline and
offline instruments.
instruments
Devices that directly or indirectly measure or control a variable in a plant process, such as flow
or temperature. Instruments can be devices such as final control elements, computing devices,
or electrical switches. Two types of instruments exist: inline instruments and offline instruments.
interference checking
Process that identifies possible collisions or insufficient clearance between items in a drawing.

Glossary
isometric
Relating to or concerning a drafting system characterized by three equal axes at right angles; a
view in which the horizontal lines of an item are drawn at an angle to the horizontal and all
verticals are projected at an angle from the base.
item
Unit of storage within a larger unit, such as a file in a catalog; a single member in a drawing.
item type
Distinct objects that users can manipulate in SmartPlant P&ID, such as equipment, events, and
safety classes.
L
label
A graphic representation that reflects the status or condition of an associated item.
line style
Collection of formats or properties that you name and store as a group to apply as a style of a
line.
loop
Software structure that allows a specified sequence of instructions to run repeatedly, if the
stated conditions remain constant.
M
macro
A sequence of actions or commands that can be named and stored. When you run the macro,
the software performs the actions or runs the commands. You can create the macros in Visual
Basic or other OLE-aware programming applications. Some of the OLE-aware programming
applications are VBA, Visual C++ Delphi, Visual Basic, and so forth.
mirror
To create the reverse image of a display set through a plane or around a defined axis.
mirror handle
Reflects an image about the horizontal and vertical axes. Point to the manipulation handle on
upper corner of an item to display the mirror handle.

Glossary
model
A representation of graphics or a schema; collection of all items and their relationships to create
a coherent description of a process plant.
model file
A design file or database file that defines the 2-D or 3-D geometry and connectivity of a
structure.
MTO
Material take-off; also called a Bill of Materials.
N
net service alias
(Oracle) An alternative name for a directory naming object in a directory server. A directory
server stores net service aliases for any defined net service name or database service.
net service name

(Oracle) A simple name for a service that resolves to a connect descriptor. Users initiate a
connect request by passing a username and password along with a net service name in a
connect string for the service to which they wish to connect: CONNECT
username/password@net_service_name.
network
Interconnection of host computers and workstations that allows them to share data and control.
The term has a dual meaning: network can refer to the devices that connect the system, or
network can refer to the connected system.
node name
A name or alias that you can assign to the node address of a device on a network.
northing
Term used to describe a north coordinate location in the plant coordinate system.
nozzle
A special equipment item that contains the connection point to piping.

Glossary
O
offline
Term that refers to those instrument components that are not inserted in a pipe run.
offline instruments
Components that are not inserted in a piping segment. Typically, these components are the
instruments that monitor and control inline instruments. Offline instruments include temperature
regulators, level gauges, and system functions, such as digital control stations (DCS) or
computers.
Oracle Net
Communication software that enables a network session from a client application to an Oracle
database server. Once a network session is established, Oracle Net acts as a data courier for
the client application and the database server. It is responsible for establishing and maintaining
the connection between the client application and database server, as well as exchanging
messages between them. Oracle Net is able to perform these jobs because it is located on each
computer in the network.
Oracle Net Manager

A graphical user interface tool that provides an integrated environment for configuring and
managing Oracle Net Services.
ORACLE_HOME
An alternate name for the top directory in the Oracle directory hierarchy on some
directory-based operating systems.
orientation by system
A type of orientation in which the software places items in the same orientation that you created
them, if you place the items in free space or in a horizontal line. For example, if you placed the
item in a vertical line, the software automatically rotates the item 90 degrees counterclockwise
from the orientation in which you created it. See also orientation by user.
orientation by user
A type of orientation in which you define the orientation of an item when you place it. The default
orientation of this item is identical to items that the software orients. You can change the default
orientation at placement time. See also orientation by system and orientation fixed.
orientation fixed
A type of orientation in which the software places items in the same orientation in which you
created them, regardless of the method or location that you used for placement. You cannot

Glossary
change the orientation at placement time. See also orientation by system and orientation by
user.
orthogonal view
A view that is a projection of the drawing onto a plane along lines that are orthogonal to the
plane.
P
P&ID
See Piping and Instrumentation Diagram.
parameter
A property with a value that determines the characteristics or behavior of an item.
parametric item
Item that contains geometry constrained together using relationships, with driving dimensions
that are defined as adjustable parameters.
path name
Sequence of directories leading to a file. See also relative path name.
PFD
Process Flow Diagram; a drawing that serves as a start for a P&ID.
pipe run
A line run that has piping properties. Also, a contiguous set of pipe run segments separated only
by inline components, branch points and gap components. A pipe run has a beginning and an
end. It does not branch or contain spaces between components. A pipe run segment may have
identical properties as a pipe run from which it branches but is not considered part of the pipe
run.
pipeline
Set of connected piping segments and their associated piping items. Also, the collection of pipe
runs from all drawings in a project whose project-defined line property values are identical.
Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID)

A primary drawing for maintaining a plant. The P&ID includes three primary groups of items:
equipment, piping, and instrumentation. The drawing relates critical process-related information,
such as process conditions for temperatures and pressures, and identifies physical components
in the plant. The P&ID is the basis for both the construction of the physical plant and further
specification of instrumentation components.

Glossary
piping components
Graphic elements that represent processes or functions within a particular piping segment.
Piping components include valves, flanges, reducers, strainers, and safety components. In
drawings, piping components are connected with multiple line segments.
Piping Materials Class (PMC)

Classification of components by service or specification - for example, a 150-pound carbon steel
specification.
piping segment
A line string with two or more vertices that defines the centerline geometry of the pipe run and
contains the non-graphic data associated with the pipe run.
plant
A group of facilities and equipment that performs one or more material processing functions
within a given geographical area. One company can have several plants located at different
geographical locations.
plant group items

The building blocks, such as site, plant, unit, area, and level, used to create plant breakdown
structures or plant structure hierarchies.
plant structure
Represents the business structure or physical hierarchy of a plant.
process line
Ordered collection of connectors and inline components with an equal set of core properties -
typically, items with the same line number. Specifically, a representation of the piping that
transfers process fluid.
process point
A tool that defines the operating conditions at a particular place during a process. Examples
include defining temperature, density, and flow rate.
project
1. A directory file created in an application environment that contains design files and
subprojects. A project is not necessarily specific to an application; the project may contain
design files from multiple applications.
2. Term used for convenient grouping of either all or part of the items that constitute a plant.
Several projects can be under design at one time, probably in separate geographical
locations and having limited communication among them.

Glossary
projection lines
Witness lines; lines extending from the boundaries of an item and between which dimensioning
data for the area marked by the projection lines is placed.
property
A unique characteristic of an object, item, symbol, or document.
The properties of an item can include display properties and properties stored with the item. For
example, the properties of a valve symbol can include display properties such as color, line
style, and width. Other properties stored with the valve symbol can include the manufacturer,
cost, or material. Properties stored with the valve symbol are displayed in the Properties window
when the valve symbol is selected.
R
reference data
A collection of information containing facts relative to industry design codes, catalog data of
vendors, job specifications, commodity libraries, graphics symbology, label descriptions, report
formats, and other information of a similar theme.
reference file
A drawing file attached to another drawing file for reviewing reference; a graphic representation
attached to a drawing view.
Relational Database Management System (RDBMS)

A database management system that uses Structured Query Language (SQL) to implement and
query data in relational tables.
relationship
A condition that exists between items indicating some form of communication of behavior or
state.
relative mode
A placement mode in which symbols respond to their orientation definition at creation time,
whether they are defined in the P&ID reference data as orientation fixed, orientation by system
or orientation by user, and to the orientation of any graphic item to which they are attached at
placement time. Relative placement mode is more flexible then absolute, but much more difficult
to predict.
relative path name

Sequence of directories leading from the current directory to a particular file. See also path
name.

Glossary
report template
An online outline for a new report that you need to define. You can select a user-level or a
project-level template to create a new report template.
required item
Item that the plant model needs. An item is required if the Tag Required Flag property is set to
True for the item in the Properties window of Catalog Manager.
revision cloud
A set or arcs used to enclose changes that have occurred since the last revision.
revision triangle
A numbered triangle placed in the P&ID to indicate the drawing revision when the change
occurred.
rule
Standard mechanism for creating relationships. A rule defines a valid context for two items to
communicate their behavior or state.
S
satellite
A server located remotely from the host server. In SmartPlant P&ID Workshare, a remote server
connected to a satellite slot at the host server.
satellite slot
The host's side of a Workshare connection. Satellites connect to the satellite slots made
available by the host at the host site.
schema
Description of the overall structure of the rulebase or database.
schema file
File that outlines the overall logical structure of a rulebase or database.
schematic file
Schematic drawing or diagram of a particular item in the plant.

Glossary
search criteria
Set of values used to scan a database or object library.
select list
List of related values that Data Dictionary Manager uses to specify various aspects of the data
model. For example, select lists allow you to select from a list of values for specific properties
when creating drawings, filters, and symbols. A select list for the fluid code property, for
example, allows you to select from a set of standard entries: such as P for process or MMA for
methyl alcohol.
server
In network operations, the node that maintains common data or performs a common task that
clients need. All network operations between two or more nodes establish a client/server
relationship.
signal lines
1. Intelligent line strings that connect offline instruments, inline instruments, and piping.
2. An ordered collection of connectors, and inline components with an equal set of core
properties: typically, items that share the same line number. Specifically, a representation of
the wiring used for transferring electrical or software signals.
3. A collection of signal runs from all drawings in a project whose project-defined line property
values are identical.
signal run
A line run with signal properties. See also pipe run.
site
A group of plants. A site can contain one or more plants.
site server
A text file containing the database type, connection alias, data dictionary, and schema
information for the site. Appears as the root directory for each site in SmartPlant Engineering
Manager.
SP_IDs
Unique identification numbers assigned by the SmartPlant software to all items created in the
database.
Standard Query Language (SQL)

Language developed by IBM for creating, modifying, and querying relational databases.

Glossary
static Oracle port

A network configuration that forces an Oracle database link to always connect via a fixed path to
a fixed port number.
style
1. The appearance of geometry and annotations on the drawing sheet. For example, color and
line weight of an element, the font used in a text box, and so forth.
2. A collection of formats or properties that you name and store as a group. When you apply a
style to a selected item, the software applies all the formats or properties in the style to the
element. The style types include: fill, dimension, line, and text.
subnet
A division of a network into an interconnected, but independent, segment, or domain, in order to
improve performance and security.
subnet mask
The technique used by the IP protocol to filter messages into a particular network segment. The
subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine, server, or router and is
matched up with the incoming IP address to determine whether to accept or reject the packet.
subscribe
To sign up for a service. In SmartPlant P&ID Workshare, to connect a satellite site with a
satellite slot at the host.
symbology
1. Display style of an item, including color, pattern, style, and width.
2. In Options Manager, symbology provides graphical clarity to a drawing by differentiating
among various items by their appearance. Symbology refers to the color, line weight, and
style associated with items in a particular filter.
T
table
Collection of data for quick reference, either stored in sequential locations in memory or printed
as an array of rows and columns of data items of the same type.
template
A document or file having a preset format, used as a starting point or blueprint for a particular
application so that the format does not have to be re-created each time it is used. In SmartPlant
P&ID, a file used to create a drawing with a set of default parameters; a template serves as an

Glossary
outline or blueprint for you to create a new drawing. In SmartPlant Engineering Manager, a file
used to create roles, data dictionaries or other database schemas.
time stamping
A process that prompts the software to generate a record when you change a property.
transaction
A non-graphic record of any additions, deletions, and changes that you request during job
posting activities.
U
UNC path
Universal Naming Convention. The full name of a resource on a network. It conforms to the
\\servername\sharename syntax, where servername is the name of the server and sharename is
the name of the shared resource. UNC names of directories or files can also include the
directory path under the share name, with the following syntax:
\\servername\sharename\directory\filename.
unit
Group of parts of the schematic and individual worlds of a plant that together perform a given
process function. The identifying number of the unit is unique within the project and within the
plant. Most companies, but not all, use the concept of unit.
user name
Name that provides access to an account on the system. Same as username.
V
validation
A process or program that verifies data integrity in the database.

Index
A B
AABBCC Codes for Symbols • 42 Background Sheets Command (View Menu)
About Command (Help Menu) • 37 • 118
Activate a Drawing Sheet • 111 Background Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box) •
ActiveCGM • 381 136
Add a Button to a Toolbar • 373 backup • 417
Add a Command to a Menu • 372 Balloon Command • 321
Add a Dimension to a Dimension Group • Balloon Properties Dialog Box • 321
221 Balloon Ribbon • 323
Add a Leader • 315 batch processing • 417
Add Button Command (Catalog Explorer Behavior Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) •
Navigation Menu) • 20 133
Add Shortcut Buttons to the Catalog Boolean operator • 417
Explorer • 17 Border and Fill Tab (Text Box Properties
Add Smart Text to Labels • 78 Dialog Box) • 329
Add Smart Text to Symbols • 58 Border Tab (SmartFrame Properties Dialog
Add Styles to the Current Document • 337 Box) • 353
Add-In Manager Dialog Box • 376 Break a Connection to a Linked Object •
Add-Ins Command • 376 368
alias • 417 Bring an Element to the Front of the Display
Alignment Indicator Command • 200 Order • 296
Alphabetical List of Functions • 254 Bring to Front Command • 301
Angle Between Command • 231 Browser Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) •
Annotations Commands, Ribbons, and 132
Dialog Boxes • 320
Apply a Border to a Text Box • 313 C
Apply a Style • 334
Apply a Style to a Group of Elements • 335 cache • 417
Applying Colors and Patterns to Closed Cascade Command • 27
Boundaries • 354 Case Where a Relationship Is Not
Applying Formats with Styles • 333 Maintained • 204
Applying Relationships to Change Existing catalog • 417
Elements • 280 Catalog Explorer • 13
Applying Unique Formats • 341 Catalog Explorer Command • 17
Arc by 3 Points Command • 154 Catalog Explorer Toolbar Commands and
Arc by Center Point Command • 154 Dialog Box • 20
Arc Ribbon • 154 Catalog Manager • 11
archive • 417 Catalog Manager Help Command (Help
Arranging Elements • 293 Menu) • 37
Arranging Elements Commands, Ribbons, Catalog Tools Toolbar • 35
and Dialog Boxes • 301 Chamfer Command • 286
Assign a Command to a Catalog Explorer Chamfer Ribbon • 286
Toolbar Button • 17 Change a Driven Dimension to a Driving
attribute • 417 Dimension • 223
AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box • 129 Change Layer Dialog Box • 301
Axis Command • 232 Change Source Dialog Box • 368
Change the Active Layer • 301

Index
Change the Background Sheet • 112 Connect Points While Modifying a Line •
Change the Curve Type • 152 205
Change the Display of Catalog Manager Connect to a Database • 11
View Window • 25 connectivity • 419
Change the Formats of a Style • 336 connector • 419
Change the Layer of an Element • 300 Control the Display of Elements in a
Change the List View Display • 17 Window • 299
Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Convert Symbols with the Symbol
Group • 308 Conversion Utility • 41
Change the Node Type • 153 Coordinate Dimension Command • 233
Change the Source for a Linked Object • Copy an Element • 182
368 Copy an Element with the Select Tool • 182
Change Toolbar • 31 Copy Command • 185
Changing the Shape of an Element • 267 Copy Linear Pattern Dialog Box • 101
Character Map Command • 323 Copy Linear Style Dialog Box • 101
check in • 418 Copy Point Style Dialog Box • 102
Circle by 3 Points Command • 147 Copy Point Styles, Linear Styles, or Linear
Circle by Center Point Command • 147 Patterns • 99
Circle Ribbon • 147 Copy Style Command • 102
Circular Pattern Command • 188 Copying and Pasting Elements • 181
Circular Pattern Options Dialog Box • 188 Copying and Pasting Elements Commands,
Circular Pattern Ribbon • 188 Ribbon, and Dialog Box • 185
class • 418 Create (clone) a Symbol Using Elements of
Clear a Selection • 175 an Existing Symbol • 160, 192
client • 418 Create a Color for Displaying Sheets or
client/server database • 418 Layers • 299
Clone Catalog Items • 18 Create a Customized Line Style • 89
Clone Command (Catalog Explorer File Create a Fill Color • 358
Menu) • 20 Create a Label • 76
Close a Document • 114 Create a Layer • 300
Close Catalog Explorer • 20 Create a Layer Group • 307
Close Command (Catalog Explorer File Create a New Menu • 372
Menu) • 21 Create a New Toolbar • 374
Close Command (File Menu) • 119 Create a Parametric Symbol • 52
code list • 418 Create a Point Style • 90
Collinear Command • 287 Create a Property Break • 78
Colors and Patterns Commands, Ribbons, Create a Style for a Linear Pattern • 91
and Dialog Boxes • 359 Create a Style for a Linear Style • 94
Colors Dialog Box • 302 Create a Style Using a Formatted Element •
Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box) • 120 338
column • 418 Create a Style with the Style Command •
Command Comparison with AutoCAD • 384 336
Command Comparison with MicroStation • Create a Symbol • 45
402 Create a Symbol Containing an Assembly
commodity code • 418 of Items • 49
commodity item • 418 Create a Symbol with Predefined Properties
component • 418 • 46
concentric • 418 Create a Text Label • 77
Concentric Command • 287 Create a Variable Using a Function or
configuration files • 419 Subroutine • 255, 264
Connect Command • 287 Create a Variable with a Link to a
connect point • 419 Spreadsheet • 253
Connect Points While Drawing a Line • 205

Index
Create a Variable with a Value or Define Icons for New Symbols • 60

Expression • 251 Define Jacketing for New Symbols • 60
Create Catalog Items • 18 Define Minimum Value for a Parametric
Create Catalog Nodes • 19 Symbol Dimension • 58
Create Custom Linear Patterns • 98 Define PinPoint Origin Ribbon • 210
Create Custom Linear Styles • 99 Define Point Style Graphics Command •
Create Custom Point Styles • 98 102
Create Equipment Symbols • 51 Define Variables and Parameter Handles
Create Instrumentation Symbols • 51 for Parametric Symbols • 57
Create New Linear Pattern Dialog Box • 102 Defining a Title Block • 46
Create New Linear Style Dialog Box • 102 Delete a Command from a Menu • 373
Create New Point Style Dialog Box • 102 Delete a Layer Group • 308
Create New Style Command • 102 Delete a Node from a Curve • 153
Create Piping Symbols • 50 Delete a Relationship • 199
Create Symbol Command • 192 Delete a Style • 335
Creating a Customized Line Style • 88 Delete a Vertex from a Leader • 317
Creating Patterns • 186 Delete an Element • 191
Creating Patterns Commands, Ribbons, Delete Catalog Items • 19
and Dialog Boxes • 188 Delete Catalog Nodes • 19
Creating Symbols • 42 Delete Command • 191
Creating Symbols Commands, Ribbons and Delete Command (Catalog Explorer File
Dialog Boxes • 63 Menu) • 20
Cursor Tab (SmartSketch Settings Dialog Delete Node Command (Shortcut Menu) •
Box) • 201 157
Curve Command • 155 Delete Point Styles, Linear Styles, or Linear
Curve Ribbon • 155 Patterns • 100
Custom Color Name Dialog Box • 359 Delete Style Command • 103
Custom Command Dialog Box • 377 Delete Text in a Text Box • 313
Custom Commands Command • 376 design file • 420
Customize Command • 377 Designing Symbol Toolbars • 371
Customize Dialog Box • 377 design-wide break • 420
Customize the Software with the Options Details Command (Catalog Explorer View
Command • 113 Menu) • 20
Customizing the Software • 371 Dimension Command • 344
Customizing the Software Commands and Dimension Groups • 218
Dialog Boxes • 375 Dimension Prefix Dialog Box • 233
Cut an Element • 190 Dimension Properties Dialog Box • 234
Cut Command • 191 Dimension Ribbon • 344
Cutting or Deleting Elements • 190 Dimension the Diameter of a Circle • 263
Cutting or Deleting Elements Commands • Dimension the Length of a Line • 263
191 Dimensioning Drawing Elements • 213
Display Background Sheets • 112
D Display Manager Command • 302
Display Manager Dialog Box • 302
data dictionary • 419 Display or Hide Layers • 300
data model • 419 Display or Hide Relationship Handles • 198
database • 419 Display or Hide Toolbars • 374
database administrator • 419 Display Shortcut Buttons in Catalog
database link • 419 Explorer • 17
database table • 420 Display Symbol Connect Points • 61
Define a Custom Symbol Toolbar • 371 display-only annotation • 420
Define a New Title Block Label • 47 Distance Between Command • 240
Define Heat Tracing for New Symbols • 59

Index
Document Commands, Controls, and Drawing Line/Point Commands and

Dialog Boxes • 118 Ribbons • 142
Documents in Catalog Manager • 109 Drawing Lines • 141
Draw a Chamfer • 276 Drawing Precisely • 207
Draw a Circle by Center Point • 144 Drawing Rectangle Command and Ribbon •
Draw a Circle by Defining Three Points • 162
145 Drawing Setup • 109
Draw a Circle Tangent to One or Two Drawing Squares, Rectangles, and
Elements • 146 Polygons • 160
Draw a Circle with FreeSketch • 167 Drawing with Relationships • 192
Draw a Circular Pattern • 187 drawing, P&ID • 420
Draw a Corner by Trimming and Extending driving label • 420
Elements • 280
Draw a Curve • 149 E
Draw a Curve with FreeForm • 164
Draw a Fillet • 278 easting • 420
Draw a Horizontal Line • 203 edge-edge model • 420
Draw a Line • 141, 203 Edit a Dimension Prefix • 229
Draw a Line Connected to Another Line • Edit a Formula Containing a Function • 256
202 Edit a Linked Object • 367
Draw a Line with FreeSketch • 166 Edit a Symbol • 69
Draw a Line with PinPoint • 262 Edit a Text Box • 314
Draw a Point • 142 Edit an Embedded Object with the Source
Draw a Rectangle or Square • 161 Software • 363
Draw a Rectangle or Square with Edit an Existing Variable • 252
FreeSketch • 168 Edit Smart Text • 79
Draw a Rectangular Pattern • 187 Edit Symbol Connect Points • 62
Draw an Arc by Center Point • 150 Edit Symbol Properties • 69
Draw an Arc by Defining Three Points • 150 Edit Text in a Text Label • 77
Draw an Arc Tangent to Two Elements • Editing Symbols • 69
151 Editing XML Data of Title Block Label • 48
Draw an Arc with FreeSketch • 167 Element Display Priority • 295
Draw an Ellipse by Center Point • 158 Element Properties Dialog Box • 347
Draw an Ellipse by Defining Three Points • Ellipse by 3 Points Command • 159
158 Ellipse by Center Point Command • 159
Draw Connected Lines and Arcs • 148 Ellipse Ribbon • 159
Draw Connected Lines and Arcs with Embed an Object • 362
FreeSketch • 168 Embedding Objects Commands and Dialog
Draw Ellipses Commands and Ribbon • 159 Boxes • 364
Draw Toolbar • 32 enumerated list • 420
Draw with FreeSketch • 165 Equal Command • 288
Draw with PinPoint • 208 Establish More Than One Relationship •
Draw with Relationships • 198 206
Drawing Arcs Commands and Ribbons • exclusive database relationship • 421
154 Exit Command (File Menu) • 139
Drawing Basic Elements • 140 Extend an Element • 274
Drawing Circles Commands and Ribbon • Extend to Next Command • 288
147 Extending or Trimming Elements • 273
Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses • 144
Drawing Element Dimensions Commands F
and Dialog Boxes • 231 File Locations Tab (Options Dialog Box) •
drawing file • 420 121
Drawing FreeForm Shapes • 163 Fill Command • 359

Index
Fill Ribbon • 359 G

Fillet Command • 288
General Commands • 36
Fillet Ribbon • 288
General Tab • 234
filter • 421
General Tab (AutoCAD Export Options
Filter Command (Variable Table Shortcut
Dialog Box) • 129
Menu) • 257
General Tab (AutoCAD Import Options
Filter Dialog Box • 257
Dialog Box) • 127
Find Command (Catalog Explorer Find
General Tab (Balloon Properties Dialog
Menu) • 21
Box) • 321
Find Dialog Box • 21
General Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) •
Fit a Sketch Drawn in Real-World Units on
130
the Drawing Sheet • 244
General Tab (MicroStation Export Options
Fit All Elements in the Active View • 25
Dialog Box) • 126
Fit Command • 27
General Tab (MicroStation Import Options
Fit to Symbol Command • 27
Dialog Box) • 125
fixed point • 421
General Tab (New Line Style Dialog Box) •
flow rate • 421
339
Font Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog
General Tab (Options Dialog Box) • 120
Box) • 129
glyphs • 421
Font Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog
Grid Display Command • 212
Box) • 128
Grid Snap Command • 212
Font Tab (MicroStation Export Options
Group Command • 305
Dialog Box) • 126
Group or Ungroup Elements • 294
Font Tab (MicroStation Import Options
Group Properties Dialog Box • 305
Dialog Box) • 125
Group Ribbon • 306
Foreign Data Tab (Options Dialog Box) •
Grouping Elements • 293
124
Format a Column • 254
Format a Dimension or Annotation • 343 H
Format a Fill • 357 hierarchical • 421
Format a Geometric Element • 342 hierarchy • 421
Format a Text Box • 343 horizontal angle • 421
Format Dimension Dialog Box • 352 horizontal distance • 422
Format Line Dialog Box • 352 Horizontal/Vertical Command • 289
Format Tab (Element Properties Dialog host • 422
Box) • 351 How Embedding Works • 361
Format Text Box Dialog Box • 352 How Linking Works • 365
Formatting a New Drawing • 360
Formatting an Existing Drawing • 361
FreeForm and FreeSketch Commands and
I
Ribbons • 169 implied piping component • 422
FreeForm Command • 169 Import Point Styles, Linear Patterns, and
FreeForm Ribbon • 169 Linear Styles • 99
FreeSketch Command • 170 Import Style Command • 103
FreeSketch Ribbon • 170 Info Tab (Element Properties Dialog Box) •
full path name • 421 347
Function Keys • 36 Info Tab (Group Properties Dialog Box) •
Function Wizard Step 1 of 2 Dialog Box • 305
258 Info Tab (SmartFrame Properties Dialog
Function Wizard Step 2 of 2 Dialog Box • Box) • 352
259 Info Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box) •
326
inline • 422

Index
inline instruments • 422 Line Width Tab (MicroStation Import

Insert a Font Character into a Text Box • Options Dialog Box) • 126
315 Line/Arc Continuous Command • 156
Insert a Function into a Formula • 256 Linear Pattern Properties Dialog Box • 103
Insert a Node into a Curve • 152 Linear Style Properties Dialog Box • 105
Insert a Vertex in a Leader • 316 Lines and Coordinate Tab • 236
Insert Node Command (Shortcut Menu) • Linestyle Tab (AutoCAD Export Options
157 Dialog Box) • 129
Insert Object Dialog Box • 364 Linestyle Tab (AutoCAD Import Options
Install or Remove an Add-In • 374 Dialog Box) • 128
Install the Line Style Editor • 88 Linestyle Tab (MicroStation Export Options
instance • 422 Dialog Box) • 126
instrument loops • 422 Linestyle Tab (MicroStation Import Options
instruments • 422 Dialog Box) • 125
Intent Zones • 196 Link an Object • 366
interference checking • 422 Linked Object Edit Command (Edit Menu) •
isometric • 423 369
item • 423 Linked Object Open Command (Edit Menu)
item type • 423 • 369
Linking Objects Commands and Dialog
L Boxes • 368
Linking Variables to a Spreadsheet • 265
label • 423 Links Command • 369
Label Properties and Guidelines • 74 Links Dialog Box • 369
Label Toolbar • 32 List Command (Catalog Explorer View
Label Types • 73 Menu) • 21
Labels Commands and Dialog Boxes • 81 List View • 16
Large Icons Command (Catalog Explorer Lock an Element or Key Point • 199
View Menu) • 21 Lock Command • 200
Layer Display Dialog Box • 309 loop • 423
Layer Groups Command • 306
Layer Groups Dialog Box • 307
Layer Tab (MicroStation Export Options M
Dialog Box) • 127 macro • 423
Layers Command • 308 Main Toolbar • 33
Layers Ribbon • 309 Maintain Relationships • 199
Layers Tab (Display Manager Dialog Box) • Maintain Relationships Command • 200
304 Make Elements Collinear • 285
Leader Command • 324 Make Elements Concentric • 283
Leader Properties Dialog Box • 324 Make Elements Equal • 285
Leader Ribbon • 325 Make Elements or Key Points Horizontal or
Line Command • 142, 352 Vertical • 285
Line Ribbon • 142 Make Elements Parallel • 283
line style • 423 Make Elements Perpendicular • 284
Line Style Editor Commands and Dialog Make Elements Symmetric About an Axis •
Boxes • 101 286
Line Style Editor Toolbar • 97 Make Elements Tangential • 284
Line Width Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors •
Dialog Box) • 130 332
Line Width Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Measure a Distance • 246
Dialog Box) • 128 Measure an Area • 246
Line Width Tab (MicroStation Export Measure Area Command • 248
Options Dialog Box) • 127 Measure Distance Command • 248

Index
Measure the Length of a Line • 262 net service name • 424

Measuring Distances and Areas • 245 network • 424
Measuring Distances and Areas New Dimension Style Dialog Box • 340
Commands • 248 New Item Command (Catalog Explorer File
Mechanism Modeling • 171 Menu) • 21
Menu Tab (Customize Dialog Box) • 378 New Line Style Dialog Box • 339
MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box • New Text Box Style Dialog Box • 340
126 New Toolbar Dialog Box • 379
MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box • New Window Command • 28
124 node name • 424
mirror • 423 northing • 424
Mirror a Symbol • 70 Not To Scale Command (Shortcut Menu) •
Mirror an Element • 270 241
Mirror Command • 289 nozzle • 424
mirror handle • 423
Mirror Ribbon • 289 O
Mirroring Elements • 269
Mirroring Symbols • 70 Object Command • 364
model • 424 offline • 425
model file • 424 offline instruments • 425
Modify an Element with the Select Tool • Offset Command • 185
268 Offset Elements • 184
Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box • 340 Offset Ribbon • 183
Modify Layers in a Layer Group • 307 Open a Document • 110
Modify Line Style Dialog Box • 340 Open a Document Inside Internet Explorer •
Modify Point Styles, Linear Styles, or Linear 381
Patterns • 100 Open a MicroStation Document • 401
Modify Symbols • 61 Open an AutoCAD Document • 383
Modify Text Box Style Dialog Box • 340 Open an OLE Object for Editing • 367
Most Recently Used Files Command (File Open Catalog Items • 18
Menu) • 119 Open Command (Catalog Explorer File
Move a Dimension • 229 Menu) • 21
Move a Label • 77 Open Command (File Menu) • 119
Move a Text Box • 313 Open Database Command • 12
Move an Annotation • 318 Open Dialog Box • 119
Move an Element • 179 Open Plant Structure Dialog Box • 13
Move an Element Precisely • 180, 209 Open Site Server Dialog Box • 12
Move an Element with the Select Tool • 180 Open Source Command • 259
Move Command • 181 Open Symbol Catalogs • 16
Move Ribbon • 181 Open Symbols in Catalog Manager • 45
Moving Elements • 178 Options Command (Tools Menu) • 119
Moving Elements Command and Ribbon • Options Dialog Box • 120
181 Oracle Net • 425
MTO • 424 Oracle Net Manager • 425
ORACLE_HOME • 425
orientation by system • 425
N orientation by user • 425
Name Tab • 339 orientation fixed • 425
Name Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box) • 136 orthogonal view • 426
Navigate the Catalog Explorer Tree View •
15 P
Navigating in Catalog Manager • 11
net service alias • 424 P&ID • 426
Pan a View • 25

Index
Pan Command • 28 Placing Elements with a Grid • 211

Paragraph Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Placing Elements with a Grid Commands •
Box) • 328 212
Parallel Command • 289 plant • 427
parameter • 426 plant group items • 427
parametric item • 426 plant structure • 427
Paste an Element • 182 Point Command • 143
Paste an Element with a Different Format • Point Ribbon • 143
183 Point Style Properties Dialog Box • 107
Paste Command • 186 Precision Placement Commands and
Paste Link Command (Shortcut Menu) • Ribbons • 209
260 Previous Command • 28
Paste Special Command • 186 Print a Document • 115
Paste Special Dialog Box • 186 Print an Area of a Drawing Sheet • 117
Paste Unicode Characters into Smart Text Print Area Dialog Box • 137
Editor • 80 Print Command • 118
path name • 426 Print Command (File Menu) • 136
Perpendicular Command • 290 Print Dialog Box • 136
PFD • 426 Print Several Documents Simultaneously •
PinPoint Command • 210 117
PinPoint Ribbon • 210 Print to a File • 116
pipe run • 426 Printable Guides Command (Help Menu) •
pipeline • 426 37
Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) Printer Document Properties Dialog Box •
• 426 137
piping components • 427 Printing Documents • 114
Piping Materials Class (PMC) • 427 process line • 427
piping segment • 427 process point • 427
Place a Balloon • 314 project • 427
Place a Dimension Between Two Elements projection lines • 428
or Key Points • 225 Properties Command • 24, 107, 352
Place a Dimension Group • 219 Properties Command (File Menu) • 130
Place a Driving Dimension • 222 Properties Dialog Box • 130
Place a Fill • 356 Properties Window • 22
Place a Linear, Angular, or Radial property • 428
Dimension • 226 Property Breaks Command • 81
Place a Symmetric Diameter Dimension • Property Breaks Dialog Box • 82
227 Pull an Element Up in the Display Order •
Place a Text Box • 313 297
Place Elements with a Grid • 211 Pull Up Command • 310
Place Label Ribbon • 63 Push an Element Down in the Display
Place Label Ribbon - Options for Order • 297
SmartPlant P&ID • 64 Push Down Command • 310
Place Point Command • 66
Place Point Ribbon (P&ID) • 66 R
Place Point Ribbon (SmartPlant Electrical) •
67 Reapply Style Dialog Box • 341
Place Point Style Graphics Command • 107 Rectangle Command • 162
Place Point Styles in the Drawing Sheet • Rectangle Ribbon • 162
101 Rectangular Pattern Command • 189
Place Symbol Connect Points • 62 Rectangular Pattern Options Dialog Box •
Placing Annotations • 311 189
Placing Elements in Precise Locations • 207 Rectangular Pattern Ribbon • 189

Index
Redefine Point Styles • 100 S

Redo Actions • 176
Sample Workflows • 202, 262, 360
Redo Command • 176
satellite • 429
Redo List Command • 176
satellite slot • 429
reference data • 428
Save a Document • 113
reference file • 428
Save a Style to a Template • 336
Reference Files Tab (Options Dialog Box) •
Save Command • 114
123
Saving Documents • 113
Refill a Modified Boundary • 358
Scale an Element • 271
Refresh Symbol Toolbar Command
Scale an Element with Its Handles • 272
(Catalog Explorer > Catalog Menu) • 379
Scale an Inserted Object Back to Its
Relational Database Management System
Original Model Size • 273
(RDBMS) • 428
Scale Command • 292
relationship • 428
Scale Ribbon • 292
Relationship Handles Command • 200
Scaling Elements • 271
Relationships Commands • 200
schema • 429
Relationships Tab (SmartSketch Settings
schema file • 429
Dialog Box) • 201
schematic file • 429
relative mode • 428
search criteria • 430
relative path name • 428
Search for Items in Catalog Explorer • 20
Remove a Command from a Toolbar • 373
Secondary Units Tab • 237
Remove Button Command (Catalog
Select a Graphical Element with QuickPick •
Explorer Navigation Menu) • 21
174
Remove Shortcut Buttons from the Catalog
Select All Command • 176
Explorer • 17
Select an Element • 174
Rename a Style • 335
select list • 430
Rename Catalog Items • 19
Select Tool • 177
Rename Catalog Nodes • 20
Select Tool Ribbon • 177
Rename Command (Catalog Explorer File
Selecting Elements • 173
Menu) • 22
Selecting Elements Commands and Ribbon
Re-Orient PinPoint • 209
• 176
report template • 429
Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements •
Reposition the PinPoint Target Point • 209
171
required item • 429
Send an Element to the Back of the Display
Resize a Text Box • 314
Order • 296
Restore a Customized Toolbar to Default
Send to Back Command • 310
Settings • 375
server • 430
Restore a View • 26
Set a Dimension Axis • 224
Restore All Built-in Menus to the Original
Set an Item Type for a Label • 80
Settings • 374
Set Document Properties • 112
Return Dimension Text to the Actual Value
Set File Locations • 113
of the Element • 223
Set Item Type Command • 83
revision cloud • 429
Set Item Type Dialog Box • 83
revision triangle • 429
Set Printing Options • 116
Ribbon Toolbar • 34
Set the Dimension Type • 217
Rotate a Symbol • 71
Set the Dimension Units • 343
Rotate an Element • 269
Set the Unit of Measure • 247
Rotate Command • 290
Set Up a Drawing Sheet • 112
Rotate Ribbon • 290
Setting Paper and Model Units • 243
Rotating Elements • 268
Settings Dialog Box • 138
Rotating Symbols • 71
Sheet Setup Command (File Menu) • 135
rule • 429
Sheet Setup Dialog Box • 135
Run a Custom Command • 375

Index
Sheets Tab (Display Manager Dialog Box) • Tangent Arc Command • 157
303 Tangent Circle Command • 148
Show Buttons Command (Catalog Explorer Tangent Command • 292
Navigation Menu) • 22 Task Comparison with AutoCAD • 390
Show Points Command • 68 Task Comparison with MicroStation • 411
Show Styles in Resource Files Command • template • 431
108 Terminator and Symbol Tab • 238
signal lines • 430 Test a New Linear Style • 97
signal run • 430 Text and Leader Tab (Balloon Properties
site • 430 Dialog Box) • 321
site server • 430 Text Box Command • 325, 354
Size and Scale Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Text Box Properties Dialog Box • 325
Box) • 135 Text Box Ribbon • 330
Small Icons Command (Catalog Explorer Text Tab • 235
View Menu) • 22 Tile Horizontally Command • 28
Smart Text Command • 83 Tile Vertically Command • 29
Smart Text Editor Dialog Box • 84 time stamping • 432
SmartDimension Command • 242 Title Block Field Command (Insert Menu) •
SmartFrame Properties Dialog Box • 352 68
SmartSketch Settings Command • 201 Toolbars • 30
SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box • 201 Toolbars Command • 379
Sort Properties Alphabetically • 23 Toolbars Dialog Box • 379
Sort Properties by Category • 23 Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box) • 378
SP_IDs • 430 transaction • 432
Spacing Tab • 237 Transforming Elements • 266
Standard Control Keys • 36 Transforming Elements Commands and
Standard Query Language (SQL) • 430 Ribbons • 286
static Oracle port • 431 Tree View • 15
Statistics Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) • Trim an Element • 275
131 Trim Command • 293
style • 431 Types of Dimensions • 216
Style Command • 340
Style Dialog Box • 338 U
Style Resources Dialog Box • 341
Styles Commands and Dialog Boxes • 338 UNC path • 432
subnet • 431 Undo Actions • 175
subnet mask • 431 Undo Command • 177
subscribe • 431 Undo List Command (Edit Menu) • 178
Summary Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) • Ungroup Command • 310
131 Unicode Character Map Dialog Box • 331
Suspend Relationships • 199 Unique Formats Commands and Dialog
Symbol Conversion Utility • 41 Boxes • 344
Symbol Guidelines • 39 unit • 432
Symbol Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) • Units Tab • 234
132 Units Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) • 132
symbology • 431 Update Command • 365
Symbols Tab (Options Dialog Box) • 123 user name • 432
Symmetric Command • 242, 292 User Tab (Group Properties Dialog Box) •
Symmetric Diameter Command • 243 306
User Tab (Properties Dialog Box) • 351
User Tab (SmartFrame Properties Dialog
T Box) • 354
table • 431

Index
User Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box)

• 330
Using Dimensions to Change Existing
Elements • 222
Using Layers to Arrange Elements • 297
Using Relationships as You Draw • 194
Using the Line Style Editor • 87
Using the Variable Table • 249
Using Variables to Calculate Dimensional
Values • 263
V
validation • 432
Variable Table Dialog Box • 260
Variables Command • 260
Variables Commands and Dialog Boxes •
257
View Tab (Options Dialog Box) • 122
View the Properties of a Document • 112
View Window • 24
View Window Commands • 27
View XML Symbol Structure • 72
Viewing the XML Symbol Structure • 72
W
Window List Command • 29
Working Sheets Command (View Menu) •
139
Working with AutoCAD Files • 383
Working with CAD Drawings • 383
Working with Drawing Tools • 109
Working with Labels • 73
Working with MicroStation Files • 401
Working with Symbols • 39
Z
Zoom Area • 26
Zoom Area Command • 29
Zoom In • 26
Zoom In Command • 29
Zoom Out • 27
Zoom Out Command • 30

Cat MGR Users Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cat MGR Users Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SmartPlant Catalog Manager

Version 2014 (7.0.0)

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

2 SmartPlant Catalog Manager User's Guide

SmartPlant Catalog Manager User's Guide 3

Working with Symbols .............................................................................................................................. 39

Working with Labels.................................................................................................................................. 73

SmartPlant Catalog Manager User's Guide 5

Using the Line Style Editor ....................................................................................................................... 87

6 SmartPlant Catalog Manager User's Guide

Show Styles in Resource Files Command ................................................................................... 108

Working with Drawing Tools .................................................................................................................. 109

SmartPlant Catalog Manager User's Guide 7

Resize a Text Box ........................................................................................................................ 314

Customizing the Software ...................................................................................................................... 371

8 SmartPlant Catalog Manager User's Guide

ActiveCGM ............................................................................................................................................... 381

Working with CAD Drawings .................................................................................................................. 383

Glossary ................................................................................................................................................... 417

Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 433

SmartPlant Catalog Manager User's Guide 9

10 SmartPlant Catalog Manager User's Guide

Navigating in Catalog Manager

SmartPlant Catalog Manager User's Guide 11

Open Database Command

Open Site Server Dialog Box

12 SmartPlant Catalog Manager User's Guide

Open Plant Structure Dialog Box

SmartPlant Catalog Manager User's Guide 13

14 SmartPlant Catalog Manager User's Guide

Navigate the Catalog Explorer Tree View

SmartPlant Catalog Manager User's Guide 15

Open Symbol Catalogs

16 SmartPlant Catalog Manager User's Guide

Change the List View Display

Catalog Explorer Command

Add Shortcut Buttons to the Catalog Explorer

Display Shortcut Buttons in Catalog Explorer

Remove Shortcut Buttons from the Catalog Explorer

Assign a Command to a Catalog Explorer Toolbar Button

SmartPlant Catalog Manager User's Guide 17

Create Catalog Items

Open Catalog Items

Clone Catalog Items

18 SmartPlant Catalog Manager User's Guide

Rename Catalog Items

Create Catalog Nodes

Delete Catalog Items

Delete Catalog Nodes

SmartPlant Catalog Manager User's Guide 19

Rename Catalog Nodes

Search for Items in Catalog Explorer

Close Catalog Explorer

Catalog Explorer Toolbar Commands and Dialog Box

Add Button Command (Catalog Explorer Navigation Menu)

Delete Command (Catalog Explorer File Menu)

Details Command (Catalog Explorer View Menu)

Clone Command (Catalog Explorer File Menu)

20 SmartPlant Catalog Manager User's Guide

Close Command (Catalog Explorer File Menu)

Find Command (Catalog Explorer Find Menu)

Large Icons Command (Catalog Explorer View Menu)

List Command (Catalog Explorer View Menu)